Fuji Bikes Power Supply 5000G11S P11S User Manual
Instruction Manual  
FRENIC 5000G11S/P11S  
High-Performance, Low-Noise Inverter  
General-Purpose Industrial Machines  
230V Series  
Fans and Pumps  
230V Series  
0.25HP/FRNF25G11S-2UX  
to 125HP/FRN125G11S-2UX  
460V Series  
7.5HP/FRN007P11S-2UX  
to 150HP/FRN150P11S-2UX  
460V Series  
0.50HP/FRNF50G11S-4UX  
to 600HP/FRN600G11S-4UX  
7.5HP/FRN007P11S-4UX  
to 800HP/FRN800P11S-4UX  
！
CAUTION  
„ Read all operating instructions before  
installing, connecting (wiring),  
operating, servicing, or inspecting the  
inverter.  
„ Ensure that this instruction manual is  
made available to the final user of the  
inverter.  
„ Store this manual in a safe,  
convenient location.  
„ The product is subject to change  
without prior notice.  
Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.  
Fuji Electric Corp of America  
INR-SI47-1206-E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions on wiring  
WARNING  
• Connect the inverter to power via a line-protection molded-case circuit breaker or Fuse,  
as fire may result.  
• Always connect a ground wire, as electric shock or fire may result.  
• A licensed specialist must perform the wiring works, as electric shock may result.  
• Turn off the power before starting the wiring work, as electric shock may result.  
• Wire the inverter after installation is complete, as electric shock or injury may occur.  
CAUTION  
• Confirm that the phases and rated voltage of this product match those of the AC power supply,  
as injury may result.  
• Do not connect the AC power supply to the output terminals (U,V,and W), as injury may result.  
• Do not connect a braking resistor directly to the DC terminals (P(+)and N(-)), as fire may result.  
• Ensure that the noise generated by the inverter, motor, or wiring does not adversely affect peripheral  
sensors and equipment, as accident may result.  
Instructions on operation  
WARNING  
• Be sure to install the surface cover before turning on the power (closed). Do not remove the cover while  
power to the inverter is turned on.  
Electric shock may occur.  
• Do not operate switches with wet hands, as electric shock may result.  
• When the retry function is selected, the inverter may restart automatically after tripping.  
(Design the machine to ensure personal safety in the event of restart)  
Accident may result.  
• When the torque limiting function is selected, operating conditions may differ from preset conditions  
(acceleration/deceleration time or speed). In this case, personal safety must be assured.  
Accident may result.  
• As the STOP key is effective only when a function setting has been established, install an emergency  
switch independently, and when an operation via the external signal terminal is selected,  
the STOP key on the keypad panel will be disabled.  
Accident may result.  
• As operations start suddenly if alarm is reset with a running signal input, confirm that no running signal  
is input before resetting alarm.  
Accident may result.  
• Do not touch inverter terminals when energized even if inverter has stopped.  
Electric shock may result.  
CAUTION  
• Do not start or stop the inverter using the main circuit power.  
Failure may result.  
• Do not touch the heat sink or braking resistor because they become very hot.  
Burns may result.  
• As the inverter can set high speed operation easily, carefully check the performance of motor or machine  
before changing speed settings.  
Injury may result.  
• Do not use the inverter braking function for mechanical holding.  
Injury may result.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instructions on maintenance, inspection, and replacement  
WARNING  
• Wait a minimum of five minutes (30HP or less) or ten minutes (40HP or more) after power has been tumed  
off (open) before starting inspection. (Also confirm that the charge lamp is off and that DC voltage between  
terminals P (+) and N (-) do not exceed 25V.)  
Electrical shock may result.  
• Only authorized personnel should perform maintenance, inspection, and replacement operations.(Take off  
metal jewelry such as watches and rings. Use insulated tools.)  
Electric shock or injury may result.  
Instructions on disposal  
CAUTION  
• Treat as industrial waste when disposing it.  
Injury may result.  
Other instructions  
WARNING  
• Never modify the product.  
Electric shock or injury may result.  
Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe  
CAUTION  
• The contact capacity of alarm output for any fault (30A, B, C) and relay signal output (Y5A, Y5C) is 0.5A at  
48V DC.  
• The ground terminal  
G should be connected to the ground.  
Use a crimp terminal to connect a cable to the main circuit terminal or inverter ground terminal.  
• Where RCD (Residual-current protective device) is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact,  
only RCD of type B is allowed on the supply side of this EE (Electric equipment).  
Otherwise another protective measure shall be applied such as separation of the EE from the environment  
by double or reinforced insulation or isolation of EE and supply system by the transformer.  
• Use a single cable to connect the  
G inverter ground terminal. (Do not use two or more inverter ground  
terminals.)  
• Use a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) and magnetic contactor (MC) that conform to EN or IEC  
standards.  
• Use the inverter under over-voltage category III conditions and maintain Pollution degree 2 or better as  
specified in IEC664. To maintain Pollution degree 2 or more, install the inverter in the control panel (IP54  
or higher level) having structure free from water, oil, carbon, dust, etc.  
• For the input-output wiring of the inverter, use cable (diameter and type) as specified in Appendix C in  
EN60204.  
• To ensure safety, install an optional AC reactor, DC reactor, or external braking resistor as follows:  
1) Install inside an IP4X cabinet or barrier if electrical parts are exposed.  
2) Install inside an IP2X cabinet or barrier if electrical parts are not exposed.  
• It is necessary to install the inverter in appropriate method using an appropriate RFI filter to conform to the  
EMC directive. It is customer's responsibility to check whether the equipment, the inverter is installed in,  
conforms to EMC directive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe  
CAUTION  
Table 1-1 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit in Europe  
Fuse/MCCB  
current rating [A]  
Tightening torque [N*m]  
Recommended wire size [mm2]  
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T  
Inverter type  
With Without  
DCR DCR  
(
G)  
G
With Without  
DCR  
DCR  
1/4 FRNF25G11S-2UX  
1/2 FRNF50G11S-2UX  
1 FRN001G11S-2UX  
2 FRN002G11S-2UX  
3 FRN003G11S-2UX  
5 FRN005G11S-2UX  
7.5 FRN007P11S-2UX  
7.5 FRN007G11S-2UX  
10 FRN010P11S-2UX  
10 FRN010G11S-2UX  
15 FRN015P11S-2UX  
15 FRN015G11S-2UX  
20 FRN020P11S-2UX  
20 FRN020G11S-2UX  
25 FRN025P11S-2UX 100  
25 FRN025G11S-2UX  
30 FRN030P11S-2UX 100  
30 FRN030G11S-2UX  
40 FRN040P11S-2UX 150  
40 FRN040G11S-2UX  
50 FRN050P11S-2UX 175  
50 FRN050G11S-2UX  
5
5
5
10  
10  
20  
30  
5
5
1.2  
1.8  
-
-
2.5  
(2.5)  
10  
15  
15  
30  
40  
2.5  
(2.5)  
2.5  
2.5  
4(4)  
10(10)  
6(6)  
4
6
4
6
2.5  
3.5  
40  
50  
75  
60  
16  
(16)  
35  
10  
(10)  
100  
125  
150  
175  
200  
10  
16  
10  
16  
2.5  
(16)  
25  
(16)  
5.8  
50  
(25)  
3.5  
5.5  
25  
25  
0.2  
to  
0.75  
35  
(16)  
0.7  
35  
50  
35  
16×2  
1.2  
50  
(25)  
25×2  
(25)  
16×2 35×2 25×2  
13.5  
4
6
250  
25×2  
95  
35×2  
70(35)  
95  
(50)  
(50)  
50×2 25×2  
(50)  
70  
60 FRN060P11S-2UX 200  
60 FRN060G11S-2UX  
75 FRN075P11S-2UX 250  
75 FRN075G11S-2UX  
100 FRN100P11S-2UX 350  
100 FRN100G11S-2UX  
125 FRN125P11S-2UX 400  
125 FRN125G11S-2UX  
300  
27  
48  
13.5  
27  
2.5  
to  
6
350  
35×2 70×2 35×2  
50×2  
70×2  
95×2  
120×2  
(35)  
50×2  
185(95)  
240  
(120)  
95×2  
(95)  
(70)  
-
10  
16  
25  
-
-
-
50×2  
240  
70×2  
300  
-
-
150 FRN150P11S-2UX 500  
95×2  
Note: The type of wire is 75℃ (167ºF) 600V Grade heat-resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (PVC).  
The above-mentioned wire size are the recommended size under the condition of the ambient temperature 50℃  
(122ºF) or lower.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe  
CAUTION  
Table 1-2 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit in Europe  
Fuse/MCCB  
current rating [A]  
Tightening torque [N*m]  
Recommended wire size [mm2]  
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T  
Inverter type  
With Without  
DCR DCR  
(
G)  
G
With Without  
DCR  
DCR  
1/2 FRNF50G11S-4UX  
1 FRN001G11S-4UX  
2 FRN002G11S-4UX  
3 FRN003G11S-4UX  
5 FRN005G11S-4UX  
7.5 FRN007P11S-4UX  
7.5 FRN007G11S-4UX  
10 FRN010P11S-4UX  
10 FRN010G11S-4UX  
15 FRN015P11S-4UX  
15 FRN015G11S-4UX  
20 FRN020P11S-4UX  
20 FRN020G11S-4UX  
25 FRN025P11S-4UX  
25 FRN025G11S-4UX  
30 FRN030P11S-4UX  
30 FRN030G11S-4UX  
40 FRN040P11S-4UX  
40 FRN040G11S-4UX  
50 FRN050P11S-4UX 100  
50 FRN050G11S-4UX  
60 FRN060P11S-4UX 100  
60 FRN060G11S-4UX  
75 FRN075P11S-4UX 125  
75 FRN075G11S-4UX  
100 FRN100P11S-4UX 175  
100 FRN100G11S-4UX  
125 FRN125P11S-4UX 200  
125 FRN125G11S-4UX  
150 FRN150P11S-4UX 225  
150 FRN150G11S-4UX  
200 FRN200P11S-4UX 300  
200 FRN200G11S-4UX  
250 FRN250P11S-4UX 350  
250 FRN250G11S-4UX  
300 FRN300P11S-4UX 400  
300 FRN300G11S-4UX  
350 FRN350P11S-4UX 500  
350 FRN350G11S-4UX  
400 FRN400P11S-4UX 600  
400 FRN400G11S-4UX  
450 FRN450P11S-4UX 700  
450 FRN450G11S-4UX  
5
5
5
10  
10  
15  
5
5
10  
15  
15  
20  
1.2  
-
-
2.5  
(2.5)  
1.8  
3.5  
2.5  
(2.5)  
2.5  
2.5  
20  
30  
40  
40  
50  
75  
30  
40  
6
(6)  
2.5  
6
(6)  
4
6
4
6
2.5  
10  
(10)  
50  
5.8  
60  
10  
(10)  
16  
(16)  
25  
(16)  
35  
10  
10  
75  
100  
125  
150  
16  
(10)  
25  
(16)  
35  
(25)  
50  
(25)  
25×2  
70(35)  
95  
(50)  
50×2  
(50)  
50×2  
150  
240  
(120)  
95×2  
300  
120×2  
(120)  
185×2  
(185)  
240×2  
(240)  
240×2  
(240)  
150×3  
300×2  
185×3  
240×3  
25  
25  
35  
25  
35  
50  
(25)  
50  
(25)  
25×2  
(25)  
25×2  
(25)  
-
2.5  
13.5  
175  
50  
25×2  
0.2  
to  
0.75  
0.7  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
25×2  
95  
95  
25×2  
95  
50×2  
4
1.2  
13.5  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
27  
6
50×2  
70×2  
70×2  
185  
240  
70×2  
240  
95×2  
10  
16  
25  
2.5  
to  
6
120×2  
120×2  
185×2  
240×2  
150×2  
185×2  
240×2  
300×2  
185×3  
27  
48  
50  
70  
500 FRN500P11S-4UX 800  
150×3  
300×2  
185×3  
300×2  
240×3  
240×3  
500 FRN500G11S-4UX  
600 FRN600P11S-4UX 1,000  
600 FRN600G11S-4UX  
-
-
-
240×3  
700 FRN700P11S-4UX  
-
-
300×3  
300×3  
800 FRN800P11S-4UX 1,200  
Note: The type of wire is 75℃ (167ºF) 600V Grade heat-resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (PVC).  
The above-mentioned wire size are the recommended size under the condition of the ambient temperature 50℃  
(122ºF) or lower.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Compliance with UL/cUL standards [Applicable to products with UL/cUL mark]  
CAUTION  
Tightening torque and wire range  
Inverter type  
G11S/P11S  
Wire range [AWG] (mm2)  
Auxiliary  
.
Required torque [lb-inch](N m)  
Auxiliary  
Voltage  
Main  
L1/R,L2/S,L3/T  
U,V,W  
control-  
power  
Control  
control-  
power  
Control  
terminal  
FRNF25G11S-2UX  
FRNF50G11S-2UX  
FRN001G11S-2UX  
FRN002G11S-2UX  
FRN003G11S-2UX  
FRN005G11S-2UX  
FRN007G11S-2UX  
FRN007,010P11S-2UX  
FRN010G11S-2UX  
FRN015P11S-2UX  
FRN015G11S-2UX  
FRN020P11S-2UX  
FRN020G11S-2UX  
FRN025P11S-2UX  
FRN025G11S-2UX  
FRN030P11S-2UX  
FRN030G11S-2UX  
FRN040G11S/P11S-2UX  
FRN050P11S-2UX  
FRN050G11S-2UX  
FRN060G11S/P11S-2UX  
FRN075G11S/P11S-2UX  
FRN100P11S-2UX  
FRN100G11S-2UX  
FRN125G11S/P11S-2UX  
FRN150P11S-2UX  
FRNF50G11S-4UX  
FRN001G11S-4UX  
FRN002G11S-4UX  
FRN003G11S-4UX  
FRN005G11S-4UX  
FRN007G11S-4UX  
FRN007,010P11S-4UX  
FRN010G11S-4UX  
FRN015P11S-4UX  
FRN015G11S-4UX  
FRN020P11S-4UX  
FRN020G11S-4UX  
FRN025P11S-4UX  
FRN025G11S-4UX  
FRN030P11S-4UX  
FRN030G11S-4UX  
FRN040G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN050G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN060G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN075G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN100P11S-4UX  
FRN100G11S-4UX  
FRN125G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN150G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN200P11S-4UX  
FRN200G11S-4UX  
FRN250G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN300P11S-4UX  
FRN300G11S-4UX  
FRN350G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN400G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN450P11S-4UX  
FRN450G11S-4UX  
FRN500G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN600G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN700P11S-4UX  
FRN800P11S-4UX  
10.6(1.2)  
―
―
16 (1.3)  
15.9(1.8)  
31.0(3.5)  
14 (2.1)  
10 (5.3)  
8 (8.4)  
6 (13.3)  
4 (21.2)  
3-phase  
230V  
6.2(0.7)  
24 (0.2)  
3 (26.7)  
2 (33.6)  
51.3(5.8)  
10.6(1.2)  
16(1.3)  
1 (42.4)  
2X2 (33.6X2)  
119(13.5)  
239(27)  
1X2(42.4X2)  
2/0X2(67.4X2)  
3/0X2(85X2)  
4/0X2(107.2X2)  
425(48)  
250X2(127X2)  
350X2(177X2)  
10.6(1.2)  
15.9(1.8)  
―
―
16 (1.3)  
14 (2.1)  
12 (3.3)  
10 (5.3)  
31.0(3.5)  
8 (8.4)  
6 (13.3)  
4 (21.2)  
2 (33.6)  
1(42.4)  
3-phase  
460V  
6.2(0.7)  
24 (0.2)  
119(13.5)  
239(27)  
3X2 (26.7X2)  
2X2 (33.6X2)  
2X2 (33.6X2)  
4/0(107.2)  
1X2(42.4X2)  
2/0X2(67.4X2)  
10.6(1.2)  
16(1.3)  
3/0X2(85X2)  
4/0X2(107.2X2)  
300X2(152X2)  
350X2(177X2)  
500X2(253X2)  
425(48)  
300X3(152X3)  
400X3(203X3)  
500X3(253X3)  
600X3(304X3)  
Use the following power supply to the inverter  
Inverter Model  
FRNF25G11S-2UX ～ FRN125G11S-2UX  
FRN007P11S-2UX ～ FRN150P11S-2UX  
FRNF50G11S-4UX ～ FRN600G11S-4UX  
FRN007P11S-4UX ～ FRN800P11S-4UX  
Maximum input voltage  
AC240V  
Input source current  
Not more than 100,000A  
AC480V  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Compliance with UL/cUL standards [Applicable to products with UL/cUL mark]  
CAUTION  
• [CAUTION] Hazard of electrical shock. Disconnect incoming power before working on this control.  
• [CAUTION] Dangerous voltage exists until charge lights is off.  
• [WARNING]  
• More than one live parts inside the inverter.  
• Type1 “INDOOR USE ONLY”  
The inverter is approved as a part used inside a panel. Install it inside a panel.  
• Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000rms symmetrical amperes.  
• Use 60/75C copper wire only.  
• A Class2 circuit wired with class1 wire.  
• Field wiring connection must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed-loop terminal connector  
sized for the wire gauge involved. Connector must be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the  
connector manufacturer.  
• Connect the power supply to main power supply terminals via the Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) or  
a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) to apply the UL Listing Mark.  
(See Instruction Manual basic connection diagram Fig.2-3-1).  
• In case of using auxiliary control-power input (R0, T0), connect it referring to Basic connection diagram  
Fig.2-3-1.  
• Solid state motor overload protection is provided in each model.  
General instructions  
Although figures in this manual may show the inverter with covers and safety screens removed for  
explanation purposes, do not operate the device until all such covers and screens have been replaced.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
･･･････････････  
････････････････  
････････････････････････  
････････････････････････  
･･･････････････････  
1. Before Using This Product  
1-1 Receiving Inspections  
1-1  
1-1  
1-1  
1-2  
1-3  
1-3  
5. Function Select  
5-1  
5-1  
5-7  
5-1 Function select list  
････････････････  
1-2 Appearance  
5-2 Function Explanation  
･････････････････  
1-3 Handling the Product  
････････････････････････････  
････････････････････････････  
････････････････････  
1-4 Carrying  
1-5 Storage  
6. Protective Operation  
6-1  
6-1  
6-2  
･･････････  
6-1 List of Protective Operations  
････････････････････････  
6-2 Alarm Reset  
･･････････････  
･･･････････････  
･･････････････････  
2. Installation and Connection  
2-1 Operating Environment  
2-1  
2-1  
2-1  
2-3  
2-3  
･･･････････････････････  
･･････････  
･･････････････  
7. Trouble shooting  
7-1  
7-1  
7-5  
2-2 Installation Method  
2-3 Connection  
7-1 Protective function activation  
7-2 Abnormal motor rotation  
･････････････････････････  
････････････････  
2-3-1 Basic connection  
･････････････  
･････････････････････  
2-3-2 Connecting the main circuit and  
8. Maintenance and Inspection  
8-1  
8-1  
8-1  
････････････････  
ground terminals  
2-8  
2-13  
2-16  
8-1 Daily Inspection  
･･･  
･････････････････  
2-3-3 Connecting the control terminals  
8-2 Periodical Inspection  
････････････  
2-3-4 Terminal arrangement  
2-3-5 Applicable equipment and wire size  
･････････････････  
8-3 Measurement of Main Circuit  
･･･････････････････  
Electrical Quantity  
8-4  
8-5  
8-5  
･･････････････････････  
･･････････････････  
for main circuit  
2-18  
8-4 Insulation Test  
8-5 Parts Replacement  
･･････････････････････････････  
3. Operation  
3-1 Inspection and Preparation  
3-1  
8-6 Inquiries about Products and  
･･････････････････  
Product Guarantee  
8-5  
･････････････････････  
･･･････････････････  
3-2 Operation Method  
･･･････････････････････････  
before Operation  
3-1  
3-1  
3-1  
･･････････････････････････  
･･････････････  
･･････････････  
9. Specifications  
9-1  
9-1  
9-3  
9-4  
3-3 Trial Run  
9-1 Standard Specifications  
9-2 Common Specifications  
･･････････････････････････  
･････････  
･･････････････････  
9-3 Outline Dimensions  
9-4 RS-485 Modbus RTU Serial  
4. Keypad Panel  
4-1  
4-1  
4-1 Appearance of Keypad Panel  
････････････････････  
Communications  
9-8  
9-8  
9-8  
9-8  
9-8  
9-9  
････････  
････････  
･･････････････････････  
4-2  
4-2  
4-2  
4-4  
4-4  
4-4  
4-5  
4-5  
4-5  
4-7  
4-7  
4-8  
4-9  
9-4-1 Transmission Specification  
9-4-2 Connection  
･･････  
9-4-3 Serial Interface Configuration  
･･･････････  
9-4-4 Modbus RTU Functions  
9-4-5 Inverter Function Code Access  
9-4-6 Command and Monitor  
･････  
･･････････････････  
Data Registers  
9-9  
9-11  
9-15  
････････  
･･･････････  
9-4-7 Data Format Specification  
9-4-8 Communication Errors  
･･･････  
･････････････････････････････  
･･･････････････････  
････････  
10. Options  
10-1  
10-1  
10-2  
10-1 Built-in Options  
10-2 Separately Installed Options  
4-10  
4-11  
4-12  
4-13  
4-15  
････  
･･････････････････････････  
11. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)  
11-1  
11-1  
11-1 General  
11-2 Recommended Installation  
･･････････････････････  
11-3 The harmonics restriction  
Instructions  
11-2  
11-5  
･････････････  
in Europe Union (EU)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Before Using This Product  
1-1 Receiving Inspections  
Unpack and check the product as explained below.  
If you have any questions about the product, contact  
the nearest Fuji sales office or your local distributor  
where you purchased the unit.  
① Check the ratings nameplate to confirm that the  
delivered product is the ordered one.  
Ratings nameplate  
TYPE : Inverter type  
FRN 030 G11S-4 UX Power supply voltage system  
:2→ 230V grade、4→460V grade  
Series name:G11S or P11S  
Nominal applied motor:030→30HP  
Product type: FRENIC5000  
SOURCE : Power rating  
OUTPUT : Output rating  
MASS  
: Mass (not indicated for products with 30HP or less)  
SER.No. : Serial number  
7 5 A 1 2 3 A 0 0 0 1 Z  
Production lot serial number  
Production month:1 to 9: January to September,  
X: October, Y: November, Z: December  
Production year: Last digit of year (7 --> 2007)  
② Check for damaged and/or missing parts upon delivery.  
③ In addition to the inverter unit and this manual, the package contains rubber bushing (for products with  
30HP or less) and a terminating resistor (1/2 W, 120Ω). The terminating resistors for products with  
30HP or less is packed in a sack. The terminating resistors for products with 40HP or more is  
connected to the control terminal of the inverter unit. This terminating resistor is required for RS-485  
communication. The terminating resistor need not be removed regardless of RS-485 communication  
status.  
1-2 Appearance  
Mounting screws of surface cover  
Mounting screws of  
surface cover  
(6 screws total)  
Keypad panel  
Surface cover  
Lifting holes  
(4 holes total)  
Keypad panel  
Intermediate cover  
Surface cover  
Ratings nameplate  
Ratings nameplate  
40HP or more  
30HP or less  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3 Handling the Product  
(1) Removing the surface cover  
For the inverter of 30HP or less, loosen the mounting screws of the surface cover, then remove the  
cover by pulling the top (see Figure 1.3.1).  
Fig. 1-3-1 Removing the surface cover (for inverter of 30HP or less)  
For the inverter of 40HP or more, remove the six mounting screws of the surface cover, then  
remove the surface cover.  
Fig. 1-3-2 Removing the surface cover (for inverter of 40HP or more)  
(2) Removing the keypad panel  
After removing the surface cover as explained in (1), loosen the mounting screws of the keypad  
panel and remove as shown in Figure 1.3.3.  
Fig. 1-3-3 Removing the keypad panel  
Loosen the mounting screws of the keypad panel and remove using the finger holds on the  
keypad panel case.  
Fig. 1-3-4 Removing the keypad panel (for inverter of 40HP or more)  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-4 Carrying  
Carry the product by the main unit.  
Do not carry the product while holding the cover or parts other than the main unit.  
Use a crane or hoist to carry a product equipped with hanging holes.  
1-5 Storage  
Temporary storage  
Temporary storage of this product must meet those conditions listed in Table 1-5-1.  
Table 1-5-1 Storage environment  
Item  
Specifications  
Ambient  
temperature  
Storage  
temperature  
Relative  
-10℃(14ºF) to +50℃(122ºF)  
-25℃(-13ºF) to +65℃(149ºF)  
5 to 95%Note2  
Condensation or freezing must not occur as a result of  
sudden temperature changes.  
humidity  
Atmosphere  
Pollution degree 2  
Operation/storage: 86 to 106 kPa  
Transport : 70 to 106 kPa  
Air pressure  
Note1: The storage temperature applies only to short periods such as transport.  
Note2: As a large change in temperature within this humidity range may result in condensation or freezing, do not store  
where such temperature changes may occur.  
① Do not place this product directly on a floor.  
② To store the product in an extreme environment, pack in vinyl sheet, etc.  
③ If the product is stored in a high-humidity environment, insert a drying agent (e.g., silica gel) and pack the  
product in vinyl sheet.  
Long-term storage  
If the product is to be stored for an extended period after purchase, the method of storage depends  
primarily on storage location.  
The general long-term storage method is as follows:  
① The above conditions for temporary storage must be satisfied.  
When the storage period exceeds three months, the upper limit of ambient temperature must be reduced  
to 30℃(86ºF) to prevent the deterioration of the electrolytic capacitors.  
② Pack the product thoroughly to eliminate exposure to moisture and include a drying agent to ensure a  
relative humidity of about 70% or less.  
③ If the product is mounted on a unit or control panel and is left unused and exposed to the elements like  
moisture or dust (particularly on a construction site), remove the product and store in a suitable  
environment.  
④ Electrolytic capacitors not provided with power for an extended period will deteriorate. Do not store  
electrolytic capacitors for one year or longer without providing power.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Installation and Connection  
2-1 Operating Environment  
Install this product in a location that meets those conditions listed in Table 2-1-1  
Table 2-1-1 Operating environment  
Table 2-1-2 Output current reduction rate  
Item  
Specifications  
based on altitude  
Altitude  
Output current  
reduction rate  
Location  
Indoor  
-10℃(14ºF) to +50℃(122ºF)(For products of  
30HP or less, the ventilating covers must be  
removed if ambient temperature exceeds  
+40℃(104ºF))  
3300ft (1000m) or lower  
1.00  
0.97  
0.95  
0.91  
0.88  
Ambient  
temperature  
3300-4950ft (1000 to 1500m)  
4950-6600ft (1500 to 2000m)  
6600-8250ft (2000 to 2500m)  
8250-9900ft (2500 to 3000m)  
Relative  
humidity  
5 to 95% (No condensation)  
Atmosphere  
Air pressure  
Pollution degree 2  
86 to 106 kPa  
3.9inch(100mm)  
3mm:from 2 to less than 9 Hz, 1m/s2:from 9 to  
less than 20 Hz, 1m/s2:from 20 to less than 55  
Hz, 1m/s2:from 55 to less than 200 Hz  
Vibration  
Right  
30HP or less:  
Gap X can be 0.  
(side-by-side  
installation)  
40HP or more:  
Gap X >= 2inch (50mm)  
2-2 Installation Method  
① Securely fasten the product in an upright position on a  
solid structure such that FRENIC5000G11S is facing  
the front.  
3.9inch(100mm)  
Do not turn the product upside down or install in a  
horizontal position.  
Fig.2-2-1  
② As heat is generated during inverter operation, the spaces shown in Fig. 2-2-1 are required to ensure  
sufficient cooling. As heat radiates upward, do not install the product beneath a device sensitive to heat.  
③ As the heat sink may reach a temperature of 90℃(194ºF) during inverter operation, ensure that the  
material surrounding the product can withstand this temperature.  
Install this product on nonflammable material such as metal.  
！
WARNING  
④ When installing this product in a control panel, consider  
ventilation to prevent ambient temperature of the inverter  
from exceeding the specified value. Do not install the  
product in an area from which heat cannot be sufficiently  
released.  
⑤ If two or more inverters must be installed in the same device  
or control panel, arrange the units horizontally to minimize  
the effect of heat. If two or more inverters must be installed  
vertically, place an insulated plate between the inverters to  
minimize the effect of heat.  
⑥ When shipped from the factory, inverters are internal cooling  
type inside panel. An inverter of 30HP or less can be  
converted to an external cooling type simply by adding an  
optional mounting adapter. An inverter of 40HP or more  
can be converted simply by moving mounting adapter.  
Fig.2-2-2  
In an external cooling system, a heat sink radiating about 70% of total inverter heat (total loss) can be  
placed outside the device or control panel.  
Ensure that heat sink surfaces are kept free of foreign matter (lint, Fig. 2-2-2 External cooling system moist  
dust particles etc.).  
･In case of external cooling system, cover the inverter rear side in order not to  
touch the main capacitor and braking resistor. Electric shock may result.  
！
･Ensure that the inverter and heat sink surfaces are kept free of foreign matter  
such as lint, paper dust, small chips of wood or metal, and dust.  
Fire or accident may result.  
WARNING  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
An inverter of 40HP or more can be converted to an external cooling type simply by moving upper and  
lower mounting brackets as shown in Fig. 2-2-3. Remove the M6 bracket screws, move the brackets,  
then secure the brackets using the M5 case mounting screws. (The bracket screws are no longer  
required after changing the bracket mounting position.)  
Quantity of mounting screw  
Voltage  
Case mounting  
screws  
Inverter type  
Bracket screws  
series  
FRN040G11S-2UX to FRN100G11S-2UX  
FRN040P11S-2UX to FRN125P11S-2UX  
FRN125G11S-2UX  
5
6
5
6
5
6
5
6
230V  
460V  
FRN125P11S-2UX  
FRN040G11S-4UX to FRN250G11S-4UX  
FRN040P11S-4UX to FRN300P11S-4UX  
FRN300G11S-4UX to FRN350G11S-4UX  
FRN350P11S-4UX to FRN400P11S-4UX  
Fig. 2-2-3  
⑦ For inverters of 30HP or less, remove the ventilating covers if ambient temperature exceeds +40℃(104ºF)  
(1) Removing the ventilating covers  
One ventilating cover is mounted on top of the inverter and two or three are mounted at the bottom.  
Remove the surface cover, then remove ventilating covers by popping out the cover inserts as shown in  
Fig.2-2-4.  
Fig. 2-2-4 Removing the ventilating cover  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-3 Connection  
Remove the surface cover before connecting the terminal blocks as follows.  
2-3-1 Basic connection  
①Always connect power to the L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T main circuit power terminals of the inverter.  
Connecting power to another terminal will damage the inverter. Check that the power voltage is  
within the maximum allowable voltage marked on the nameplate, etc.  
②Always ground the ground terminal to prevent disasters such as fire or electric shock and to  
minimize noise.  
③Use a reliable crimp terminal for connection between a terminal and a cable.  
④After terminating the connection(wiring), confirm the following:  
a. Confirm that the connection is correct.  
b. Confirm that all necessary connections have been made.  
c. Confirm that there is no short-circuit or ground fault between terminals and cables.  
⑤Connection modification after power-on  
The smoothing capacitor in the direct current portion of the main circuit cannot be discharged  
immediately after the power is turned off. To ensure safety, use a multimeter to check that the  
voltage of the direct current (DC) is lowered to the safety range (25V DC or less)after the charge  
lamp goes off. Also, confirm that the voltage is zero before short-circuiting. The residual voltage  
(electric charge) may causesparks.  
• Always connect a ground wire.  
Electric shock or fire may result.  
• Ensure that a licensed specialist performs all wiring works.  
！
WARNING  
• Confirm that the power is turned off (open) before commencing wiring  
operations.  
Electrical shock may result.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Connection Diagram (Sink Logic)  
G11S:15HP and above  
P11S:20HP and above  
G11S:Up to 10HP  
P11S:Up to 15HP  
DB)  
(CM)  
(THR)  
Ground-fault  
circuit interrupter  
(GFCI)  
RS-485  
Fig.2-3-1  
Note: The control circuit common terminals [11], (CM) and <CMY> are isolated  
(*1) Use a drive with rated voltage matching the power supply voltage.  
(*2) Use as required.  
(*3) Use this peripheral device when necessary.  
(*4) Remove the jumper wire (*4) between P1 and P(+) before connecting a DC REACTOR.  
(*5) Be sure to use the braking unit (option)(*6) when connecting the external braking resistor (option)(*5)  
(*6) Connect the braking unit to P(+) ans N(-). The auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity.  
Connect them as shown in the figure above.  
(*7) The drive can be operated without connecting the auxiliary control power supply.  
(*8) Terminal (X1) to (X9) can be set to 9 (THR) - Braking unit thermal trip input.  
(*9) If usingV2 or C1, as a reference signal, they must be used exclusively.  
(*10) It is possible to input voltage signals (0 to +10 VDC or 0 to +5 VDC) to terminals [12] [11] instead of the potentiometer.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Connection Diagram to PLC (Sink Logic)  
G11S:15HP and above  
P11S:20HP and above  
G11S:Up to 10HP  
P11S:Up to 15HP  
Ground-fault  
circuit interrupter  
(GFCI)  
RS-485  
Fig.2-3-2  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Connection Diagram (Source Logic, Typically used in Europe)  
G11S:15HP and above  
P11S:20HP and above  
G11S:Up to 10HP  
P11S:Up to 15HP  
Ground-fault  
circuit interrupter  
(GFCI)  
RS-485  
Fig.2-3-3  
Note: The control circuit common terminals [11], (CM) and <CMY> are isolated  
(*1) Use a drive with rated voltage matching the power supply voltage.  
(*2) Use as required.  
(*3) Use this peripheral device when necessary.  
(*4) Remove the jumper wire (*4) between P1 and P(+) before connecting a DC REACTOR.  
(*5) Be sure to use the braking unit (option)(*6) when connecting the external braking resistor (option)(*5)  
(*6) Connect the braking unit to P(+) ans N(-). The auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity.  
Connect them as shown in the figure above.  
(*7) The drive can be operated without connecting the auxiliary control power supply.  
(*8) Terminal (X1) to (X9) can be set to 9 (THR) - Braking unit thermal trip input.  
(*9) If usingV2 or C1, as a reference signal, they must be used exclusively.  
(*10) It is possible to input voltage signals (0 to +10 VDC or 0 to +5 VDC) to terminals [12] [11] instead of the potentiometer  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Connection Diagram to PLC (Source logic, Typically used in Europe)  
G11S:Up to 10HP  
P11S:Up to 15HP  
G11S:15HP and above  
P11S:20HP and above  
(THR)  
(P24)  
Ground-fault  
circuit interrupter  
(GFCI)  
RS-485  
Fig.2-3-4  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-3-2 Connecting the main circuit and ground terminals  
Table 2-3-1 Functions of main circuit terminals and ground terminals  
Symbol  
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T  
U, V, W  
Terminal name  
Description  
Main circuit power terminal Connects a 3-phase power supply.  
Inverter output terminal  
Connects a 3-phase motor.  
Connects a backup AC power supply to the  
control circuit. (Not supported for inverter of 1HP  
or less)  
Auxiliary control-power  
input terminal  
R0, T0  
DC reactor connecting  
terminal  
External braking resistor  
connecting terminal  
Connects the optional power-factor correcting DC  
reactor.  
Connects the optional external braking resistor.  
(For inverter of 10HP or less)  
P1, P (+)  
P (+), DB  
Supplies DC link circuit voltage to the external  
braking unit (option) or power regeneration unit  
(option).  
P (+), N (-)  
G
DC link circuit terminal  
Inverter ground terminal  
Grounds the inverter chassis (case) to the earth.  
(1) Main circuit power terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T)  
① Connect these terminals to the power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker or a ground-fault circuit  
interrupter for circuit (wiring) protection. Phase-sequence matching is unnecessary.  
② To ensure safety, a magnetic contactor should be connected to disconnect the inverter from the power  
supply when the inverter protective function activates.  
③ Use control circuit terminal FWD/REV or the RUN/STOP key on the keypad panel to start or stop the  
inverter. The main circuit power should be used to start or stop the inverter only if absolutely necessary  
and then should not be used more than once every hour.  
④ If you need to connect these terminals to a single-phase power supply, please contact the factory.  
(2) Inverter output terminals (U, V, W)  
① Connect these terminals to a 3-phase motor in the correct phase sequence. If the direction of motor  
rotation is incorrect, exchange any two of the U, V, and W phases.  
② Do not connect a power factor correction capacitor or surge absorber to the inverter output.  
③ If the cable from the inverter to the motor is very long, a high-frequency current may be generated by stray  
capacitance between the cables and result in an overcurrent trip of the inverter, an increase in leakage  
current, or a reduction in current indication precision.  
When a motor is driven by a PWM-type drive, the motor terminals may be subject to surge voltage generated  
by drive element switching. If the motor cable (with 460V series motors, in particular) is particularly long,  
surge voltage will deteriorate motor insulation. To prevent this, use the following guidelines:  
Inverters 7.5 HP and larger  
Motor Insulation Level  
460 VAC Input Voltage  
230 VAC Input Voltage  
1000V  
66 ft (20 m)  
1312 ft (400 m) *  
1300V  
328 ft (100 m)  
1312 ft (400 m) *  
1600V  
1312 ft (400 m) *  
1312 ft (400 m) *  
Inverters 5 HP and smaller  
Motor Insulation Level  
460 VAC Input Voltage  
230 VAC Input Voltage  
1000V  
66 ft (20 m)  
328 ft (100 m) *  
1300V  
165 ft (50 m) *  
328 ft (100 m) *  
1600V  
165 ft (50 m) *  
328 ft (100 m) *  
* For this case the cable length is determined by secondary effects and not voltage spiking.  
Note: When a motor protective thermal O/L relay is inserted between the inverter and the motor, the thermal  
O/L relay may malfunction (particularly in the 460V series), even when the cable length is 165 feet (50m) or  
less. To correct, insert a filter or reduce the carrier frequency. (Use function code “F26 Motor sound”.)  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(3) Auxiliary control-power input terminals (R0 and T0)  
The inverter operates even if power is not  
provided to these terminals.  
P1  
P(+)  
Inverter  
Magnetic  
contactor  
Noise filter  
If a protective circuit operates and the  
Power supply  
RCD  
L1/R  
magnetic contactor on the inverter power  
side is opened (off), the inverter control circuit  
power, the alarm output (30A, B, and C), and  
the keypad panel display goes off. To prevent  
this, the same AC power as the main circuit  
AC power must be supplied (as auxiliary  
control power) to the auxiliary control-power  
input terminals (R0 and T0).  
+
L2/S  
L3/T  
Insulation Transformer  
R0  
T0  
Inverter  
+
DC/DC  
control power  
① To ensure effective noise reduction when  
using a radio noise filter, the output power  
from the filter must go to the auxiliary  
Fig. 2-3-5 Connecting the auxiliary control-power input terminals  
control-power input terminals.  
If these terminals are connected to the input side of the filter, the noise reduction effect deteriorates.  
② When the RCD (Residual-current Protective Device) is installed (G11S:30HP or less), the terminal R0 and  
T0 should be connected to the OUTPUT side of the RCD. If they are connected to the input side of the  
RCD, RCD will be malfunction because the power supply of the inverter is three phase and the terminal R0  
and T0 is single phase.  
When the terminal R0 and T0 are connected to the INPUT side of the  
RCD, the insulation transformer is required to install as shown on the  
Fig. 2-3-5.  
(4) DC reactor connecting terminals (P1 and P (+))  
① Before connecting a power-factor correcting DC reactor (optional) to  
these terminals, remove the factory-installed jumper.  
② If a DC reactor is not used, do not remove the jumper.  
Note:For inverter of 100HP or more, the DC reactor is provided as a  
separate standard component and should always be connected to the  
Fig. 2-3-6  
terminals.  
(5) External braking-resistor connecting terminals (P (+) and DB) (G11S:10HP or less)  
For the G11S of 10HP or less, a built-in braking resistor is connected to terminals P (+) and DB.  
If this braking resistor does not provide sufficient thermal capacity (e.g., in highly repetitive operation or heavy  
inertia load operation), an external braking resistor (option) must be mounted to improve braking performance.  
① Remove the built-in braking resistor from terminals P(+)  
and DB. Insulate the resistor-removed terminals with  
adhesive insulation tape, etc.  
DC reactor  
(DCR)  
External braking resistor (DB)  
2
(THR)  
(P24)  
② Connect terminals P(+) and DB of the external braking  
resistor to terminals P(+) and DB of the inverter.  
③ The wiring (cables twisted or otherwise) should not  
exceed 16ft (5m).  
P
DB  
DB  
1
[ x  
x ]  
P1  
P(+)  
N(-)  
(6) DC link circuit terminals (P (+) and N (-))  
The G11S inverter of 15HP or more does not contain a  
drive circuit for the braking resistor. To improve braking  
DBR  
Fig. 2-3-7 Connection (G11S:10HP or less)  
performance, an external braking unit (option) and an external braking resistor (option) must be installed.  
① Connect terminals P(+) and N(-) of the braking unit  
External braking resistor (DB)  
to terminals P(+) and N(-) of the inverter. The  
wiring (cables twisted or otherwise) should not  
2
(THR)  
exceed 16ft(5m).  
1
P
DB  
② Connect terminals P(+) and DB of the braking  
resistor to terminals P(+) and DB of the braking  
unit.  
DC reactor  
(DCR)  
P
P
DB  
N
2
1
The wiring (cables twisted or otherwise) should not  
exceed 33ft (10m). When terminals P (+) and N (-)  
of the inverter are not used, leave terminals open.  
If P (+) is connected to N (-) or the braking resistor  
is connected directly, the resistor will break.  
③ Auxiliary contacts 1 and 2 of the braking unit have  
polarity. To connect the power regeneration unit,  
refer to the "Power Regeneration Unit Instruction  
Manual".  
(P24)  
Braking unit (BU)  
P1  
P(+)  
N(-)  
Fig. 2-3-8 Connection (G11S:15HP or more)  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(7) Inverter ground terminal  
To ensure safety and noise reduction, always ground the inverter ground terminal. Also, metal frames of  
electrical equipment must be grounded as specified in the Electric Facility Technical Standard.  
The connection procedure is as follows:  
① Ground metal frames to a ground terminal (Ground resistance:10Ω or less).  
② Use a suitable cable (short and thick) to connect the inverter system to the ground terminal.  
(8) Auxiliary power switching connector (CN UX) (for inverter of 40HP or more)  
When an inverter of 40HP or more requires a main circuit power voltage as listed in Table 2-3-2, disconnect  
auxiliary power switching connector CN UX from U1 and connect to U2. For the switching method, see Fig.  
2-3-11.  
Table 2-3-2 Main circuit power voltage requiring auxiliary power switching connector switching  
Frequency [Hz]  
Power voltage range [VAC]  
380-398  
50  
60  
380-430  
• Check that the number of phases and rated voltage of this product match  
those of the AC power supply.  
• Do not connect the AC power supply to the output terminals (U, V, W).  
Injury may result.  
！
CAUTION  
• Do not connect a braking resistor directly to the DC terminals (P[+] and N[-]).  
Fire may result.  
(9) Fan power switching connector (CN RXTX) (for inverter of 40HP or more)  
G11S without options supports DC power input via DC common connection by connecting the power  
regeneration converter (RHC series) as shown in Fig. 2-3-10.  
For details, refer to technical documentation.  
The inverter of 40HP or more contains an AC-powered component (e.g., AC cooling fan).  
To use the inverter using DC power input, switch the fan power switching connector (CN RTXT) inside the  
inverter to the R0-T0 side and provide AC power to the R0 and T0 terminals. (See Fig. 2-3-9.)  
For the switching method, see Fig. 2-3-11.  
Note:  
In the standard state, the fan power switching connector (CN RXTX) is connected to the L1/R-L3/T side.  
When DC power input is not used, do not switch this connector.  
The same AC voltage as the main circuit power voltage must be supplied to the auxiliary control-power input terminals  
(R0 and T0). If not supplied, the fan does not rotate and the inverter will overheat (0H1).  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Jumper (not supplied for inverter of 100HP or more)  
40HP or more  
P(+)  
N(-)  
P1  
Inverter  
F
Magnetic  
contactor  
Noise filter  
MCCB  
L1/R  
U
V
W
+
C
L2/S  
L3/T  
M
Power supply  
CN RX TX  
Fan  
CN RX TX  
R0  
T0  
R0  
T0  
When switched to DC power input mode  
Fig. 2-3-9 Fan power switching  
PWM converter  
P(+)  
40HP or more  
Power supply  
R
S
T
C
+
N(-)  
N(-)  
P(+)  
P1  
Inverter  
F
L1/R  
U
V
W
C
+
L2/S  
L3/T  
M
CN RX TX  
Fan  
Switch CNRXTX to the R0-T0 side.  
R0  
T0  
Fig. 2-3-10A Example of connection by combination with power regeneration converter(40HP or more)  
Note:  
To connect the power regeneration converter to an inverter of 30HP or less, do not connect the power supply directly to the auxiliary control-power input  
terminals (R0 and T0) of the inverter. However, if such a connection is required, insulate these input terminals from the main power of the power  
regeneration converter with an insulation transformer. The connection example of a power regeneration unit is provided in the "Power Regeneration  
Unit Instruction Manual".  
Noise filter  
RHC series  
FRN-G11S  
Magnetic  
contactor  
MCCB or RCD  
L1/R  
L1/R  
L3/T  
U
L2/S  
L3/T  
V
Power supply  
M
W
R1  
S1  
T1  
R0  
T0  
Insulation Transformer  
Fig. 2-3-10B Example of connection by combination with power regeneration converter (30HP or less)  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The switching connectors are mounted on the power PCB  
above the control PCB as shown on the right.  
Note:  
To remove a connector, unlock the connector (using the  
locking mechanism) and pull. To mount a connector, push  
the connector until it click locks.  
FRN040G11S-4UX to FRN150G11S-4UX  
FRN200G11S-4UX to FRN350G11S-4UX  
<Enlarged view of part A>  
When shipped from the factory, CN UX is connected to the U1 side  
and CN RXTX is connected to the L1/R-L3/T side.  
<Oblique view of part A>  
Factory shipment status Connector removal After connector switching.  
CNUX  
: U1  
In this figure the power voltage is 380 to 398V AC, 50Hz (or 380 to  
430V AC, 60Hz) and the inverter is used in DC power input mode.  
CNRXTX : L1/R-L3/T  
Fig. 2-3-11 Power switching connectors (only for 40HP or more)  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-3-3 Connecting the control terminals  
Table 2-3-3 lists the functions of the control circuit terminals. A control circuit terminal should be connected  
according to the setting of its functions.  
Table 2-3-3  
Terminal  
Classification  
Terminal name  
Function  
symbol  
13  
Potentiometer power  
supply  
Used for +10V DC power supply for frequency setting POT (variable  
resistor of 1 to 5kΩ)  
12  
Voltage input  
① Frequency is set according to the analog input voltage supplied from  
an external circuit.  
- 0 to +10V DC/0 to 100%  
- Reversible operation using positive and negative signals:0 to +/-  
10V DC/0 to 100%  
- Reverse operation: +10 to 0V DC/0 to 100%  
② The feedback signal for PID control is input.  
③ The analog input value from the external circuit is used for torque  
control. (P11S does not support this function.)  
*
Input resistance: 22kΩ  
V2  
C1  
Voltage input  
Current input  
Frequency is set according to the analog input voltage supplied from an  
external circuit  
Analog input  
- 0 to +10V DC/0 to 100%  
- Reverse operation:+10 to 0V DC/0 to 100%  
*
*
It can be used only one terminal "V2" or "C1" alternatively  
Input resistance:22kΩ  
① Frequency is set according to the analog input current supplied from  
an external circuit.  
- 4 to 20mA DC/0 to 100%  
- Reverse operation:20 to 4mA DC/0 to 100%  
② The feedback signal for PID control is input.  
③ PTC thermistor input  
*
*
It can be used only one terminal "V2" or "C1" alternatively.  
Input resistance:250Ω  
11  
Analog input common  
Common terminal for analog input signals  
FWD  
Forward operation/stop  
command  
Used for forward operation (when FWD-CM is on) or deceleration and  
stop (when FWD-CM is off)  
REV  
Reverse operation/stop  
command  
Used for reverse operation (when REV-CM is on) or deceleration and  
stop (when REV-CM is off)  
X1  
X2  
X3  
X4  
X5  
Digital input 1  
Digital input 2  
Digital input 3  
Digital input 4  
Digital input 5  
The coast-to-stop command, external alarm, alarm reset, multistep  
frequency selection, and other functions (from an external circuit) can be  
assigned to terminals X1 to X9. For details, see "Setting the Terminal  
Functions E01 to E09" in Section 5.2, "Details of Each Function."  
<Specifications of digital input circuit>  
*
X6  
X7  
X8  
X9  
Digital input 6  
Digital input 7  
Digital input 8  
Digital input 9  
Item  
min.  
2V  
22V  
typ.  
max.  
2V  
27V  
Operating voltage ON level  
OFF level  
Operating current at ON level  
Allowable leakage current at OFF level  
-
24V  
-
-
3.2mA 4.5mA  
0.5mA  
Digital input  
-
CM  
Common terminal  
Common terminal for Digital input and FMP terminals  
P24  
PLC  
Control Unit power Supply +24VDC power supply for control input. Maximum output current 100mA  
PLC signal power  
Used to connect power supply for PLC output signals (rated voltage  
24(22 to 27) V DC) at source logic operation.  
FMA  
(11:  
Common  
terminal)  
Analog monitor  
Outputs monitor signal using analog DC voltage 0 to +10V DC.  
The meaning of this signal is one of the following:  
-Output frequency (before slip compensation) -Power consumption  
-Output frequency (after slip compensation) -PID feedback value  
-Output current -PG feedback value  
Analog output  
-Output voltage -DC link circuit voltage  
-Output torque -Universal AO  
-Load factor  
*Connectable impedance:5kΩ minimum  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FMP  
(CM:  
Frequency monitor  
(pulse waveform output)  
Outputs a monitor signal using the pulse waveform.  
This signal has the same function as the FMA signal.  
Pulse output  
Common  
terminal)  
A running signal, frequency equivalence signal, overload early warning  
signal, and other signals from the inverter are output (as transistor  
output) to arbitrary ports, For details, see "Setting the Terminal  
Functions E20 to E23" in Section 5.2, "Details of Each Function."  
Y1  
Transistor output1  
Y2  
Y3  
Y4  
Transistor output2  
Transistor output3  
Transistor output4  
<Specifications of transistor output circuit>  
*
Item  
ON level  
OFF level  
min.  
typ.  
2V  
24V  
-
max.  
3V  
27V  
50mA  
0.1mA  
Operating  
voltage  
-
-
-
-
Maximum load current at ON level  
Leakage current at OFF level  
Transistor  
output  
-
CME  
Transistor output  
common  
Common terminal for transistor output signals  
This terminal is insulated from terminals [CM] and [11].  
30A,30B, Alarm output for any fault  
30C  
If the inverter is stopped by an alarm (protective function), the alarm  
signal is output from the relay contact output terminal (1SPDT).  
Contact rating: 48V DC, 0.5A  
An excitation mode (excitation at alarm occurrence or at normal  
operation) can be selected.  
These signals can be output similar to the Y1 to Y4 signals above.  
The contact rating for any fault is the same as that of the alarm output  
above.  
Relay output  
Y5A,Y5C Multipurpose-signal relay  
output  
An excitation mode (excitation at alarm occurrence or at normal  
operation) can be selected.  
DX+, DX- RS-485 communication  
input-output  
Input-output signal terminals for RS-485 communication. UP to 31  
inverters can be connected using the daisy chain method.  
Terminal for connecting the shield of a cable. The terminal is  
Communication  
SD  
Communication-cable  
shield connection terminal electrically floating.  
(1)Analog input terminals (13,12,V2,C1,and 11)  
①These terminals receive weak analog signals that may be  
affected by external noise. The cables must be as short as  
possible (66ft (20m) or less), must be shielded, and must  
be grounded in principle. If the cables are affected by  
external induction noise, the shielding effect may be  
improved by connecting the shield to terminal [11].  
0k to 5 kΩ  
Fig. 2-3-12  
②If contacts must be connected to these circuits, twin  
(bifurcated type) contacts for handling weak signals must  
be used. A contact must not be connected to terminal  
[11].  
③If an external analog signal output device is connected to  
these terminals, it may malfunction as a result of inverter  
noise. To prevent malfunction, connect a ferrite core or  
capacitor to the external analog signal output device.  
Fig. 2-3-13 Example of noise prevention  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(2) Digital input terminals (FWD, REV, X1 to X9 and CM)  
Programmable  
Logic controller  
① Digital input terminals (e.g., FWD, REV, X1 to X9)  
are generally turned on or off by connecting or  
disconnecting the line to or from the CM terminal. If  
Digital input terminals are turned on or off by  
switching the open collector output of PLC using an  
external power supply, a resulting bypass circuit may  
cause the inverter to malfunction.  
To prevent a malfunction, connect the PLC terminal  
as shown in Fig. 2-3-14.  
② When using a contact input, a relay having highly  
reliable contact must be used.  
Fig. 2-3-14  
Connection for External power supply  
Example: Fuji Electric Control Relay:HH54PW  
(3) Transistor output terminals (Y1 to Y4, CME)  
① To connect a control relay, connect a surge absorbing diode to both ends of its exciting coil.  
(4) Others  
① To prevent a malfunction as a result of noise, control terminal cables must be placed as far as possible  
from the main circuit cables.  
② The control cables inside the inverter must be secured to prevent direct contact with live section (e.g.,  
main-circuit terminal block) of the main circuit.  
Control lines generally do not have enhanced insulation. If the insulation of a  
control line is damaged, the control signals may be exposed to high voltage in the  
main circuit. The Low Voltage Directive in Europe also restricts the exposure to  
high voltage.  
Electric shock may result  
The inverter, motor, and cables generate noise.  
Check that the ambient sensors and devices do not malfunction.  
Accident may result.  
！
！
WARNING  
CAUTION  
(5) Wiring of control circuit (inverter of 40HP or more)  
① Pull out the control circuit wiring along the left panel as shown in Fig. 2-3-15.  
② Secure the cable to cable binding hole A (on the left wall of the main circuit terminal block) using a cable-tie  
(e.g., insulock). The cable-tie must not exceed 0.14inch (3.5mm) in width and 0.06inch (1.5mm) in  
thickness.  
③ When the optional PC board is mounted, the signal lines must be secured to cable binding hole B.  
Fig. 2-3-16 The securing positions of the  
control-circuit line of inverter  
(40HP or more)  
Fig. 2-3-15 The wiring route of the control circuit  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-3-4 Terminal arrangement  
(1) Main circuit terminals  
FRNF25 to 001G11S-2UX  
FRNF50 to 001G11S-4UX  
FRN100G11S-2UX /FRN125P11S-2UX  
Screw size M3.5  
Screw size M4  
R0 T0  
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N(-)  
U
V
W
L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) N(-)  
U
V
W
G
G
G
Screw size G: M10  
other terminals : M12  
Screw size M3.5  
Screw size M3.5  
G
FRN002 to 005G11S-2UX  
FRN002 to 005G11S-4UX  
FRN125G11S-2UX /FRN150P11S-2UX  
FRN200 to 350G11S-4UX /FRN250 to 450P11S-4UX  
R0 T0  
Screw size M4  
R0 T0  
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N(-)  
G
U
V
W
L1/R  
L2/S  
L3/T  
U
V
W
G
P1  
P(+)  
N(-)  
Screw size M4  
Screw size G : M10  
other terminals : M12  
G
G
FRN007 to 010G11S-2UX /FRN007 to 015P11S-2UX  
FRN007 to 010G11S-4UX /FRN007 to 015P11S-4UX  
FRN400, 450 G11S-4UX/FRN500, 600 P11S-4UX  
R0 T0  
Screw size M4  
R0 T0  
Screw size M3.5  
P1  
L1/R L2/S L3/T  
L1/R L2/S L3/T  
U
V
W
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N(-)  
U
V
W
P1  
U
V
W
G
G
P(+)  
N(-)  
G
G
P(+)  
N(-)  
Screw size M5  
FRN015 to 030G11S-2UX /FRN020 to 030P11S-2UX  
FRN015 to 030G11S-4UX /FRN020 to 030P11S-4UX  
Screw size G = M10  
Other terminals = M12  
R0 T0  
Screw size M3.5  
L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N(-)  
U
V
W
FRN500, 600 G11S-4UX/FRN700, 800 P11S-4UX  
R0 T0  
G
Screw size M6  
G
L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) N(-)  
L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) N(-)  
U
V
W
FRN040G11S-2UX /FRN040 to 050P11S-2UX  
U
V
W
FRN040 to 075G11S-4UX /FRN040 to 100P11S-4UX  
G
G
Screw size M4  
R0 T0  
U
V
W
Screw size R0, T0 = M4 G = M10  
Other terminals = M12  
L1/R L2/S L3/T  
P1 P(+)  
N(-)  
G
G
Screw size M8  
FRN050 to 075G11S-2UX /FRN060 to 100P11S-2UX  
FRN100 to 150G11S-4UX /FRN125 to 200P11S-4UX  
Screw size M4  
R0 T0  
U
V
W
L1/R L2/S L3/T  
P1 P(+)  
N(-)  
G
G
Screw size G  
:
M8  
other terminals : M10  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(2) Control circuit terminals  
30C  
30A  
30B  
Y5A  
Y5C  
CMY  
Y4  
Y3  
Y2  
Y1  
11  
C1  
12  
FMA  
13  
FMP  
V2  
PLC  
CM  
X1  
CM  
X2  
FWD  
X3  
REV  
X4  
P24  
X5  
P24  
X6  
DX −  
X7  
DX +  
X8  
SD  
X9  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-3-5 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit  
MCCB or  
Inverter type  
Wire range [AWG] (mm2)  
.
RCD/GFCI  
Required torque [lb-inch](N m)  
Main Auxiliary  
Rated current(A)  
Voltage  
W/  
W/o  
L1/R,L2/S,L3/T  
Auxiliary  
control-power  
G11S/P11S  
Control  
Control  
DCR DCR terminal control-power  
U,V,W  
FRNF25G11S-2UX  
FRNF50G11S-2UX  
FRN001G11S-2UX  
FRN002G11S-2UX  
FRN003G11S-2UX  
FRN005G11S-2UX  
FRN007G11S-2UX  
FRN007,010P11S-2UX  
FRN010G11S-2UX  
FRN015P11S-2UX  
FRN015G11S-2UX  
FRN020P11S-2UX  
FRN020G11S-2UX  
FRN025P11S-2UX  
FRN025G11S-2UX  
FRN030P11S-2UX  
FRN030G11S-2UX  
FRN040G11S/P11S-2UX 150  
FRN050P11S-2UX  
FRN050G11S-2UX  
FRN060G11S/P11S-2UX 200  
FRN075G11S/P11S-2UX 250  
5
5
5
10  
10  
20  
30  
5
5
10.6(1.2)  
15.9(1.8)  
-
-
16 (1.3)  
10  
15  
20  
30  
50  
14 (2.1)  
10 (5.3)  
8 (8.4)  
30,40 50,75  
40  
50  
50  
75  
31.0(3.5)  
51.3(5.8)  
75  
6 (13.3)  
100  
100  
125  
125  
150  
150  
175  
175  
200  
4 (21.2)  
75  
3-phase  
230V  
3 (26.7)  
2 (33.6)  
6.2(0.7)  
24 (0.2)  
100  
100  
100  
100  
10.6(1.2)  
16(1.3)  
1 (42.4)  
2X2 (33.6X2)  
119(13.5)  
239(27)  
175  
250  
1X2(42.4X2)  
300  
350  
2/0X2(67.4X2)  
3/0X2(85X2)  
FRN100P11S-2UX  
FRN100G11S-2UX  
350  
-
4/0X2(107.2X2)  
425(48)  
10.6(1.2)  
15.9(1.8)  
FRN125G11S/P11S-2UX 400  
-
-
5
5
10  
15  
20  
30  
250X2(127X2)  
350X2(177X2)  
FRN150P11S-2UX  
FRNF50G11S-4UX  
FRN001G11S-4UX  
FRN002G11S-4UX  
FRN003G11S-4UX  
FRN005G11S-4UX  
FRN007G11S-4UX  
FRN007, 010P11S-4UX  
500  
5
5
5
5
10  
15  
-
-
16 (1.3)  
14 (2.1)  
12 (3.3)  
15,20 30,40  
31.0(3.5)  
51.3(5.8)  
20  
30  
30  
40  
40  
40  
40  
50  
50  
40  
50  
50  
60  
60  
75  
75  
100  
100  
125  
125  
150  
200  
FRN010G11S-4UX  
FRN015P11S-4UX  
FRN015G11S-4UX  
FRN020P11S-4UX  
FRN020G11S-4UX  
FRN025P11S-4UX  
FRN025G11S-4UX  
FRN030P11S-4UX  
10 (5.3)  
8 (8.4)  
6 (13.3)  
FRN030G11S-4UX  
4 (21.2)  
2 (33.6)  
1(42.4)  
FRN040G11S/P11S-4UX 75  
FRN050G11S/P11S-4UX 100  
FRN060G11S/P11S-4UX 100  
FRN075G11S/P11S-4UX 125  
3-phase  
460V  
6.2(0.7)  
24 (0.2)  
119(13.5)  
239(27)  
3X2 (26.7X2)  
2X2 (33.6X2)  
2X2 (33.6X2)  
4/0(107.2)  
1X2(42.4X2)  
2/0X2(67.4X2)  
10.6(1.2)  
16(1.3)  
FRN100P11S-4UX  
FRN100G11S-4UX  
175  
-
FRN125G11S/P11S-4UX 200  
FRN150G11S/P11S-4UX 250  
-
-
FRN200P11S-4UX  
FRN200G11S-4UX  
300  
-
3/0X2(85X2)  
FRN250G11S/P11S-4UX 350  
-
-
4/0X2(107.2X2)  
300X2(152X2)  
350X2(177X2)  
500X2(253X2)  
FRN300P11S-4UX  
FRN300G11S-4UX  
500  
FRN350G11S/P11S-4UX 500  
FRN400G11S/P11S-4UX 600  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
425(48)  
FRN450P11S-4UX  
FRN450G11S-4UX  
700  
700  
300X3(152X3)  
400X3(203X3)  
500X3(253X3)  
FRN500G11S/P11S-4UX 800  
FRN600G11S/P11S-4UX 1,000  
FRN700P11S-4UX  
FRN800P11S-4UX  
1,000  
1,200  
600X3(304X3)  
Note:The type of wire is 70℃(149ºF) 600V Grade heat-resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (PVC).  
The above-mentioned wire size are the recommended size under the condition of the ambient temperature 50℃(122ºF)  
or lower.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION on Magnetic contactor selection (without DCR)  
[without DCR]  
The magnetic contactor should be selected from "Magnetic contactor models" shown in table 2-3-4 to  
prevent the welding the magnetic contactor when using the auxiliary power input (R0, T0) and the time  
between the magnetic contactor of the main circuit (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) is OFF and re-turning on is "T off  
main circuit re-turning on time" or the less shown in table 2-3-4.  
[with DCR or other conditions]  
When the inverter which is NOT described in the table 2-3-4 or using with DCR (power-factor  
correcting DC reactor), the magnetic contactor is selected from "2-3-5 Applicable equipment and wire  
size for main circuit" in chapter 2.  
Table 2-3-4 Re-turning on time and recommended magnetic contactor models  
*1 T off  
*2  
Re-turning on time [s] Magnetic contactor  
Voltage  
G11S  
P11S  
(the time from power OFF to  
re-turning on)  
models  
(without DCR)  
FRN002G11S-2UX  
FRN003G11S-2UX  
FRN005G11S-2UX  
FRN007G11S-2UX FRN007P11S-2UX  
FRN010G11S-2UX FRN010P11S-2UX  
FRN015G11S-2UX FRN015P11S-2UX  
FRN002G11S-4UX  
54  
76  
108  
77  
112  
77  
27  
SC-N1  
SC-N2  
-
3-Phase  
230V series  
SC-N2S  
SC-N3  
SC-5-1  
-
FRN003G11S-4UX  
FRN005G11S-4UX  
38  
54  
43  
57  
SC-N1  
SC-N2  
FRN007G11S-4UX FRN007P11S-4UX  
FRN010G11S-4UX FRN010P11S-4UX  
FRN015G11S-4UX FRN015P11S-4UX  
FRN020G11S-4UX FRN020P11S-4UX  
FRN025G11S-4UX FRN025P11S-4UX  
FRN030G11S-4UX FRN030P11S-4UX  
3-Phase  
460V series  
77  
SC-N2S  
SC-N3  
112  
134  
154  
*2  
without DCR  
Magnetic  
contactor  
P1  
P(+)  
L1/R  
L2/S  
L3/T  
Power supply  
R0  
T0  
Inverter  
Auxiliary power input  
supplied  
ON  
Magnetic contactor  
OFF  
*1 T off  
ON  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Operation  
3-1 Inspection and Preparation before Operation  
Check the following before operation:  
① Check that the connection is correct.  
In particular, check that the power supply is not  
connected to any of the U, V, and W output terminals and  
that the ground terminal is securely grounded.  
② Check for short-circuits and ground faults between the  
terminals and live sections.  
③ Check for loose terminals, connectors, or screws.  
④ Check that the motor is separated from mechanical  
equipment.  
Fig. 3-1-1 Inverter connection  
⑤ Turn off switches before turning power to ensure that the  
inverter will not start or operate abnormally at power-on.  
⑥ Check the following after power-on:  
a. Check that no alarm message is displayed on the keypad  
panel (see Figure 3-1-2).  
b. Check that the fan inside the inverter is rotating. (For  
inverters with 2HP or more)  
Be sure to put on the surface cover  
before turning on the power (close).  
Never remove the cover while the power  
is applied to the inverter.  
To ensure safety, do not operate  
switches with wet hands.  
！
WARNING  
Electric shock may result  
Fig. 3-1-2  
Display on keypad panel at power-on  
3-2 Operation Method  
There are various methods of operation. Select a method of operation according to operating purpose and  
specifications by referring to Section 4-2, "Operating the Keypad Panel," and Chapter 5, "Explanation of  
Functions." Table 3-2-1 lists general operation methods  
3-3 Trial Run  
Upon confirming that inspection results are normal (see Section 3-1), proceed with a trial run. The initial  
operation mode (set at factory) is using the keypad panel.  
Table 3-2-1 General operation methods  
① Turn power on and confirm that frequency  
Operation  
command  
Operation  
using keypad  
panel  
Operation  
command  
REV  
display 0.00Hz is blinking on the LED monitor.  
Frequency setting  
∧
② Set the frequency to about 5Hz using  
key.  
Keys on keypad panel  
FWD  
FWD  
③ To start the run, press  
key (for forward  
STOP  
REV  
∧
∧
∨
∨
rotation) or  
stop, press  
key (for reverse rotation). To  
key.  
STOP  
Contact input  
(switch)  
Operation  
using  
④ Check the following items :  
Terminals  
FWD-CM and  
REV-CM  
a. Is the rotating direction correct?  
b. Is the rotation smooth? (no buzzing or  
abnormal vibration)  
external  
signal  
terminals  
Freq. Setting POT (VR),  
analog voltage,  
analog current  
c. Is acceleration and deceleration smooth?  
If no abnormality is detected, increase the frequency and check the above items again.  
If the results of the trial run are normal, start a formal run.  
Notes:  
- If an error is detected in the inverter or motor, immediately stop the operation and attempt to  
determine the cause of error referring to Chapter 7, "Troubleshooting."  
- As voltage is still applied to the main circuit terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) and auxiliary  
control-power terminals (R0, T0) even when the output from the inverter is terminated, do not  
touch the terminals. The smoothing capacitor in the inverter is being charged after the power  
is turned off and it is not discharged immediately. Before touching an electric circuit, confirm  
that the charge lamp is off or a multimeter is indicating a low voltage at the terminals.  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Keypad Panel  
The keypad panel has various functions for specifying operations such as keypad operation (frequency  
setting, run/stop command), confirming and changing function data, confirming status, and copying.  
Review the use of each function before commencing running.  
The keypad panel can also be removed or inserted during running. However, if the keypad panel is  
removed during a keypad panel operation (e.g., run/stop, frequency setting), the inverter stops and outputs  
an alarm.  
4-1 Appearance of Keypad Panel  
LED monitor:  
Four-digit 7-segment display  
Used to display various items of monitored data such  
as setting frequency, output frequency and alarm  
code.  
Auxiliary information indication for LED monitor:  
Selected units or multiple of the monitored data (on  
the LED monitor) are displayed on the top line of the  
LCD monitor. The „ symbol indicates selected  
units or multiple number. The symbol ▲ indicates  
there is an upper screen not currently displayed.  
LCD monitor:  
Used to display such various items of information as  
operation status and function data. An operation  
guide message, which can be scrolled, is displayed  
at the bottom of the LCD monitor.  
This LCD monitor has a backlight feature which turns  
on when the control power is applied or any keypad  
key is pressed, and stays on approximately 5  
minutes after the last key stroke.  
Indication on LCD monitor:  
Displays one of the following operation status:  
FWD: Forward operation REV: Reverse operation  
STOP: Stop  
Control keys (valid during keypad panel operation):  
Displays the selected operation mode:  
Used for inverter run and stop  
REM: Terminal block  
LOC: Keypad panel  
FED  
COMM: Communication terminal  
JOG: Jogging mode  
The symbol ▼ indicates there is a lower screen not  
currently displayed.  
: Forward operation command  
: Reverse operation command  
: Stop command  
REV  
STOP  
Operation keys:  
Used for screen switching, data change,  
RUN LED :  
Indicates that an operation command was input by  
frequency setting, etc.  
REV  
FWD  
pressing the  
or  
key.  
Table 4-1-1 Functions of operation keys  
Operation key  
Main function  
Used to switch the current screen to the menu screen or switch to the initial screen in  
PRG  
the operation/trip mode.  
FUNC  
DATA  
Used to switch the LED monitor or to determine the entered frequency, function code,  
or data.  
∧
∨
,
Used to change data, move the cursor up or down, or scroll the screen  
SHIFT  
>>  
Used to move the cursor horizontally at data change. When this key is pressed with  
the up or down key, the cursor moves to the next function block.  
Used to cancel current input data and switch the displayed screen. If an alarm  
occurs, this key is used to reset the trip status (valid only when the alarm mode initial  
screen is displayed).  
RESET  
Used to switch normal operation mode to jogging operation mode or vice versa. The  
selected mode is displayed on the LCD monitor.  
Switches operation mode (from keypad panel operation mode to terminal block  
operation mode or reverse). When these keys are operated, function F01 data is also  
switched from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0. The selected mode is displayed on the LCD  
indicator.  
STOP  
∧
+
+
STOP  
RESET  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2 Keypad Panel Operation System (LCD screen, Level Structure)  
4-2-1 Normal operation  
The keypad panel operation system (screen transition, level structure) is structured as follows:  
FUNC  
DATA  
FUNC  
DATA  
60.00  
60.00  
60.00  
60.00  
PRG  
Supplementary  
screen  
Operation mode  
Program menu  
Screen for each  
function  
FUNC  
DATA  
RESET  
PRG  
RESET  
RESET  
4-2-2 Alarm occurrence  
If an alarm is activated, operation is changed from normal keypad panel operation to an alarm mode operation.  
The alarm mode screen appears and alarm information is displayed.  
The program menu, function screens, and supplementary screens remain unchanged as during normal  
PRG  
operation, though the switching method from program menu to alarm mode is limited to  
.
60.00  
Operation mode  
Keypad panel operating system during normal operation  
Alarm is  
activated  
RESET  
Alarm reset processing (including  
)
Alarm  
Alarm  
Alarm  
Alarm  
FUNC  
DATA  
FUNC  
DATA  
PRG  
Supplementary  
screen  
Alarm mode  
Program menu  
Screen for each  
function  
FUNC  
DATA  
RESET  
RESET  
PRG  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 4-2-1 Overview of contents displayed for each level  
No.  
Level name  
Operating  
mode  
Content  
1
This screen is for normal operation. Frequency setting by keypad panel and the  
LED monitor switching are possible only when this screen is displayed.  
2
Program  
menu  
Each function of the keypad panel is displayed in menu form and can be selected.  
FUNC  
Selecting the desired function from the list and pressing  
displays the screen  
DATA  
of the selected function. The following functions are available as keypad panel  
functions (menus).  
No.  
Menu  
Outline  
name  
DATA SET  
1
2
The code and name of the function are displayed.  
Selecting a function displays a data setting screen for  
checking, or modifying data.  
The code and name of the function are displayed. Select  
a function to display a screen for checking data. Modifying  
data is possible as described above by going to the data  
setting screen.  
Can check various data on the operating status.  
Can check the status of analog and digital input/output for  
the inverter and options as an I/O checker.  
Can check inverter status, life expectancy , communication  
error status, and ROM version information as maintenance  
information.  
DATA CHECK  
OPR MNTR  
I/O CHECK  
3
4
MAINTENANC  
5
LOAD FCTR  
ALM INF  
6
7
8
Can measure maximum and average current and average  
breaking force in load rate measurement.  
Can check the operating status and input/output status at  
the latest alarm occurrence.  
ALM CAUSE  
Can check the latest alarm or simultaneously occurred alarms  
FUNC  
DATA  
and alarm history. Selecting the alarm and pressing  
displays the contents of alarm as troubleshooting.  
,
DATA COPY  
9
Places the function of one inverter in memory for copying to  
another inverter.  
3
4
Screen for  
each function the function.  
Supplementary Functions not completed (e.g., modifying function data, displaying alarm factors)  
The function screen selected on the program menu appears, hence completing  
screen  
on individual function screens are displayed on the supplementary screen.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3 Operating Keypad Panel  
4-3-1 Operation Mode  
The screen for normal inverter operation includes a screen for displaying inverter operating status  
and an operation guide and a screen for graphically displaying the operating status in the form of a  
bar graph. Switching between both screens is possible using the E45 function.  
1) Operation guide (E45=0)  
60.00  
60.00  
Rotating direction (no operation command, blank, yes: FWD/REV)  
Operating status (no operation command, STOP, yes: RUN)  
FWD  
STOP  
PRG  
RUN  
MENU  
PRG  
MENU  
⇒
PRG  
⇒
PRG  
F/D  
⇒LED SHIFT  
F/D  
⇒LED SHIFT  
2) Bar graph (E45=1)  
60.00  
Output frequency (maximum frequency at full-scale)  
Output current (200% of inverter rating at full-scale)  
Torque calculation value (200% of motor rating at full-scale)  
Hz  
A
%
Fout/Iout/TRQ  
4-3-2 Setting digital frequency  
On the operation mode screen, press  
∧
∨
or  
to display the set frequency on the LED. Data is  
∧
∨
initially incremented and decremented in the smallest possible unit. Holding down  
or  
increases or decreases the speed of increment or decrement. The digit to change data can be selected  
S>HI>FT  
FUNC  
DATA  
using  
Press  
and then data can be set directly. To save the frequency settings, press  
.
and  
to return to the operation mode.  
RESET  
PRG  
If keypad panel settings are not selected, the present frequency setting mode appears on the LCD.  
When selecting the PID function, PID command can be set with a process value. (Refer to technical  
documentation for details).  
1) Digital (keypad panel) settings (F01=0 or C30=0)  
60.00  
60.00  
<DIG.SET Hz>  
LOCAL  
56.89  
<DIG.SET Hz>  
LOCAL  
Frequency setting value  
Screen explanation  
∧ ∨  
RUN  
PRG  
∧ ∨  
Present frequency setting mode  
Frequency setting range  
Operations guide  
50  
F/D  
−
⇒
400  
DATA SET  
50  
F/D  
−
400  
⇒DATA SET  
PRG  
⇒
MENU  
F/D⇒LED SHIFT  
FUNC  
DATA  
When  
pressed and writing data  
STORING...  
2) Other than digital setting  
60.00  
60.00  
Frequency setting value  
<REMOTE REF>  
12+V1  
Screen explanation  
∧ ∨  
RUN  
Present frequency setting mode  
PRG  
F/D  
⇒
PRG MENU  
F/D⇒DATA SET  
⇒LED SHIFT  
Operation guide  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3-3 Switching the LED monitor  
FUNC  
DATA  
On the normal operation, press  
to switch to LED monitor display.  
When power is turned on, the monitor contents set by the function (E43) are displayed on the LED.  
When stopping  
When running  
(E44 =0,1)  
Unit  
Remarks  
(E44 = 0)  
(E44 = 1)  
E43  
Output frequency 1 (before slip compensation)  
Output frequency 2 (after slip compensation)  
0
1
2
3
4
Setting frequency  
Setting frequency  
Setting frequency  
Output current  
Output voltage  
(specified value)  
Synchronous  
speed setting  
value  
Hz  
Setting frequency  
Output current  
Output voltage (specified value)  
A
V
5
Synchronous speed  
r/min.  
For 4 digits or more, the last  
digits are cut, with x10, x100  
marked on the indicator.  
6
7
Line speed setting  
value  
Load rotation  
speed setting  
value  
Line speed  
m/min.  
r/min.  
Load rotation speed  
8
9
Torque calculation  
value  
Torque calculation value  
Power consumption  
%
± indication  
Power  
kW  
consumption  
10  
11  
PID setting value  
PID remote setting  
value  
PID setting value  
PID remote setting value  
−
−
Displayed only when PID is  
effective in PID operation  
selection.  
12  
PID feedback  
value  
PID feedback value  
−
4-3-4 Menu screen  
The “Program menu” screen is shown below. Only four items can be displayed simultaneously. Move the  
FUNC  
to display the next screen.  
DATA  
∧
∨
cursor with  
or  
to select an item, then press  
1.DATA SETTING  
2.DATA CHECK  
3.OPR MNTR  
4.I/O CHECK  
5.MAINTENANC  
6.LOAD FCTR  
7.ALM INF  
Display  
4.I/O CHECK  
5.MAINTENANC  
⇒
⇒
8.ALM CAUSE  
9.DATA COPY  
6.LOAD FCTR  
7.ALM INF  
4-3-5 Setting function data  
On the “program menu” screen, select "1. Data Setting" then the “Function Select” screen appears  
with function codes and names on it. Select the desired function.  
FUNC  
DATA  
FUNC  
DATA  
60.00  
PRG  
60.00  
60.00  
60.00  
F01FREQ COM 1  
⇒
1.DATA SETTING  
2.DATA CHECK  
3.OPR MNTR  
4.I/O CHECK  
F00DATA PRTC  
F01FREQ COM 1  
F02OPR METHOD  
F03MAX Hz-1  
RUN  
PRG⇒PRG MENU  
F/D⇒LED SHIFT  
0
0 − 11  
Function code Function name  
Data setting range  
Data  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The function code consists of alphanumeric characters. Unique alphabetical letters are assigned for each  
function group.  
Table 4-3-1  
Function code  
F00 - F42  
E01 - E47  
C01 - C33  
P01 - P09  
H03 - H39  
A01 - A18  
U01 - U61  
o01 - o55  
Function  
Remarks  
Fundamental Functions  
Extension Terminal Functions  
Control Functions of Frequency  
Motor Parameters  
High Performance Functions  
Alternative Motor Parameters  
User Functions  
Optional Functions  
Can be selected only with an option connected  
>>  
∧
>>  
∨
To scroll “Function Select” screen rapidly , use  
alphabet.  
+
or  
+
to move the screen in a unit grouped by  
∨
>>  
∨
>>  
∧
+
+
F00DATA PRTC  
F01FREQ CMD 1  
F02OPR METHOD  
F03MAX Hz-1  
F00DATA PRTC  
F01FREQ CMD 1  
F02PPR METHOD  
F03MAX Hz-1  
F42TRQVECTOR1  
E01X1 FUNC  
E02X2 FUNC  
E03X3 FUNC  
A18SLIP COMP2  
F00DATA PRTC  
F01DATA PRTC  
F02OPR METHOD  
FUNC  
DATA  
Select the desired function and press  
to switch to the “data setting” screen.  
On the “data setting” screen, the data values on the LCD can be increased or decreased in the smallest  
∧
∨
∧
∨
possible unit by pressing  
or  
Holding down  
or  
expands the rate of change, thereby  
>>  
enabling values to be modified more rapidly. Otherwise, select the digit to be modified using  
, then set  
data directly. When data is modified, the value before modification will be displayed at the same time for  
FUNC  
DATA  
RESET  
reference purpose. To save the data, press  
. Pressing  
cancels the changes made and  
returns to the “Function Select” screen. The modified data will be effective in inverter operation after the  
FUNC  
DATA  
data is saved by  
. The inverter operation does not change only if data is modified. When data  
setting is disabled in the case of “Data protected” or “Data setting invalid during inverter running,” make  
necessary changes. Data cannot be modified for the following reasons :  
Table 4-3-2  
Display  
LINK ACTIVE  
Reason for no modification  
Currently writing from RS-485/link  
option to Function is being made.  
Release method  
Send a cancel command of function  
writing from RS-485.  
Stops  
a
“Write” operation from the link.  
NO SIGNAL(WE)  
The edit enabling command function Among functions E01 to E09, turn the  
is selected using a general-purpose terminal of data 19 (edit enabling  
input terminal.  
command selection) ON.  
DATA PRTCTD  
INV RUNNING  
Data protection is selected for function Change function F00 to 0.  
F00.  
An attempt is made to change a Stop inverter operation.  
function that cannot be changed  
during inverter operation.  
FWD/REV ON  
An attempt is made to change a Turn FWD/REV command off.  
function that cannot be changed  
with the FWD/REV command on.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3-6 Checking function data  
On the "Program menu" screen, select "2. DATA CHECK". The "Function Select" screen then appears with  
function codes and names.  
60.00  
60.00  
60.00  
60.00  
F00 0  
F01 *1  
F02 *1  
FUNC  
DATA  
1.DATA SETTING  
2.DATA CHECK  
3.OPR MNTR  
F00 DATA PRTC  
FUNC  
DATA  
PRG  
FWD  
RUN  
⇒
0
PRG  
F/D  
⇒
PRG MENU  
LED SHIFT  
0 - 1  
4.I/O CHECK  
F03 60Hz  
⇒
Function code Data changed from initial value Data  
FUNC  
DATA  
FUNC  
DATA  
Select the desired function and press  
to check the function data. By pressing  
, the screen  
switches to the "Data setting" screen, to modify data.  
4-3-7 Monitoring operating status  
On the "Program menu" screen, select "3. OPR MNTR" to display the present operating status of inverter.  
∧
∨
Use  
and  
to switch between the four operation monitor screens.  
60.00  
60.00  
60.00  
Output frequency  
Output current  
Output voltage  
1.DATA SETTING  
2.DATA CHECK  
3.OPR MNTR  
Fout=xxxx.xHz  
Iout= x.xxA  
FUNC  
DATA  
PRG  
FWD  
RUN  
Vout=  
TRQ=  
xxxV  
xxx%  
⇒
PRG  
F/D  
⇒
PRG MENU  
LED SHIFT  
Torque calculation method  
4.I/O CHECK  
⇒
∨
60.00  
60.00  
Setting frequency  
Synchronous rotation  
speed (r/min)  
Load speed (r/min)  
Line speed (m/min.)  
SYN=xxxxxx  
LOD=xxxxxx  
LIN=xxxxxx  
Fref=xxxx.xHz  
xxx xx xx xx  
∨
Operation status  
FWD/REV: Rotating direction  
IL: Current limiting  
VL: Voltage limiting  
LU: Under voltage  
∨
TL: Torque limiting  
60.00  
SV=xxxxx  
PV=xxxxx  
TLD= xxx%  
TLB= xxx%  
PID setting value  
PID feedback value  
Driving torque limiting setting value  
Braking torque limiting setting  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3-8 I/O check  
On the “Program menu” screen, select "4. I/O Check" to display analog and digital input/output signal status  
∧
∨
for the inverter and options. Use  
and  
to switch between the eight screens of data.  
60.00  
60.00  
□X2  
■FWD □X3  
□REV □X4  
60.00  
Input terminal status  
(terminals)  
REV  
□X6  
□X7  
□X8  
□X9  
1.DATA SETTING  
2.DATA CHECK  
3.OPR MNTR  
4.I/O CHECK  
FWD  
FUNC  
DATA  
RUN  
†:Signal OFF, „:Signal ON  
PRG  
PRG  
F/D  
⇒PRG MENU  
□X1  
□X5  
⇒
⇒
LED SHIFT  
∨
Input terminal status  
(via communication)  
Output terminal status  
60.00  
60.00  
COMM  
□X2  
□X6  
□X7  
□X8  
□X9  
□Y1 □Y5  
□Y2  
□Y3  
∨
□FWD □X3  
□REV □X4  
□X1  
†:Signal OFF, „:Signal ON  
†:Signal OFF, „:Signal ON  
□X5  
□Y4  
∨
Analog input signal  
Analog input signal  
60.00  
60.00  
Terminal 12 input voltage  
Terminal 22 input voltage  
(AIO option)  
Terminal 32 input voltage  
(AIO option)  
Terminal C1 input current  
Terminal C2 input current  
(AIO option)  
C1= xx.xmA  
C2= xx.xmA  
12=± xx.xV  
∨
22= xx.xV  
32=± xx.xV  
V2= xx.xV  
Terminal V2 input voltage  
∨
option input status  
Output for meter  
60.00  
60.00  
Terminal AO output voltage  
(AIO option)  
Terminal CS output current  
(AIO option)  
Digital input voltage  
(HEX indication)  
FMA output voltage  
FMP output voltage  
FMP output frequency  
FMA=xx.xV  
FMP=xx.xV  
FMP=xxxxp/s  
A0 =±xx.xV  
CS= xx.xmA  
DI = xxxxH  
D0= xxH  
∨
Digital output voltage  
(HEX indication)  
∨
PG/SY option input status  
60.00  
P1=±xxxxx0p/s  
Master-side A/B phase  
4x frequency  
Z1=  
0p/s  
Unused  
Slave-side A/B phase  
4x frequency  
P2=±xxxxx0p/s  
Z2= 0p/s  
Unused  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3-9 Maintenance information  
On the "Program menu" screen, select "5. Maintenance" to display information necessary for maintenance  
∧
∨
and inspection. Use  
and  
to switch between the five screens of data.  
60.00  
60.00  
60.00  
Cumulative operating time  
DC link circuit voltage  
Maximum temperature inside inverter  
(Maximum value in hour units)  
Maximum temperature of heat sink  
(Maximum value in hour units)  
FUNC  
DATA  
1.DATA SETTING  
2.DATA CHECK  
3.OPR MNTR  
TIME=xxxxxh  
EDC= xxxV  
TMPI=xxxx℃  
FWD  
PRG  
RUN  
PRG⇒PRG MENU  
4.I/O CHECK  
TMPF=xxxx℃  
F/D⇒  
LED SHIFT  
⇒
5.MAINTENANC  
∨
Capacitor on PC  
board  
accumulation time  
( ):Judgment level.  
60.00  
60.00  
Maximum current(ms)  
(Maximum value in hour units)  
Main capacitor capacity  
∨
TCAP=xxxxxh  
(61000h)  
TFAN=xxxxxh  
(25000h)  
Imax=x.xxA  
CAP=xxx.x%  
Cooling fan operating  
time  
( ):Judgment level.  
∨
ROM version: inverter  
(40HP or more: H xxxxx  
30HP or less:S xxxxx)  
ROM version: keypad panel  
ROM version: option  
60.00  
60.00  
No. of communication  
errors:keypad panel  
NRK=xxxxx  
NRR=xxxxx  
NRO=xxxxx  
INV=Hxxxx  
KEYPAD=Kxxxxx  
OPTION=Pxxxxx  
∨
No. of communication  
errors:RS-485  
No. of communication  
errors:option  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3-10 Load rate measurement  
On the "Program menu" screen, select "6. Load Rate Measurement". On the "Load rate measurement"  
screen, the maximum current, average current, and average breaking power during the set measuring time  
are measured and displayed.  
60.00  
60.00  
60.00  
Measuring time  
FWD  
1.DATA SETTING  
2.DATA CHECK  
3.OPR MNTR  
4.I/O CHECK  
T=360s  
FUNC  
DATA  
PRG  
RUN  
Imax=0.00A  
Iave=0.00A  
BPave= 0.0%  
PRG  
F/D  
⇒
PRG MENU  
LED SHIFT  
⇒
5.MAINTENANC  
⇒
6.LOAD FCTR  
Change measuring using  
>>  
∧
∨
and  
and  
.
Start measuring  
Set measuring time  
60.00  
60.00  
Displays the remaining  
measuring time, when  
reaches zero, ends the  
measurement.  
FUNC  
DATA  
T=150s  
T=600s  
Imax=0.00A  
Iave=0.00A  
BPave= 0.0%  
Imax=0.00A  
Iave= 0.00A  
BPave= 0.0%  
60.00  
Display returns to initial values.  
Maximum current  
Average current  
Average breaking power  
(Motor rated output/100%)  
T=3600s  
Imax=56.4A  
Iave=23.5A  
BPave= 10.4%  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3-11 Alarm information  
On the "Program menu" screen, select "7. Alarm Information". Various operating data when the latest  
∧
∨
alarm occurred is displayed. Use  
data.  
and  
to switch between the nine screens of alarm information  
Code of latest alarm  
(High speed blinking during alarm  
alarm mode only)  
60.00  
60.00  
OC1  
Output frequency at alarm occurrence  
FWD  
1.DATA SETTING  
2.DATA CHECK  
3.OPR MNTR  
4.I/O CHECK  
Fout=xxxx.xHz  
Iout= x.xxA  
FUNC  
DATA  
RUN  
PRG  
Output current at alarm occurrence  
Output voltage at alarm occurrence  
PRG  
F/D  
⇒
PRG MENU  
LED SHIFT  
Vout=  
TRQ=  
xxxV  
⇒
xxx%  
Torque calculation value at alarm  
occurrence  
5.MAINTENANC  
6.LOAD FCTR  
7.ALM INF  
∨
⇒
OC1  
Setting frequency at alarm  
occurrence  
OC1  
Fref=xxxx.xHz  
xxx xx xx xx  
∨
Cumulative operating hours  
at alarm occurrence  
DC link circuit voltage  
at alarm occurrence  
Temperature inside inverter  
at alarm occurrence  
TIME=xxxxxh  
EDC= xxxV  
Operating status at alarm  
occurrence  
FWD/REV:Rotating direction  
TMPI=xxxx℃  
TMPF=xxxx℃  
IL  
:Current limiting  
:Voltage limiting  
:Under voltage  
:Torque limiting  
VL  
LU  
TL  
Heat sink temperature  
at alarm occurrence  
OC1  
∨
No. of communication errors at  
alarm occurrence:keypad  
panel  
NRK=xxxxx  
NRR=xxxxx  
NRO=xxxxx  
∨
No. of communication errors at  
alarm occurrence:RS-485  
No. of communication errors at  
alarm occurrence:Options  
Input terminal status at alarm  
occurrence (terminals)  
OC1  
REM  
□X2 □X6  
□:Signal OFF, ■:Signal ON  
□FWD □X3 □X7  
□REV □X4 □X8  
Input terminal status at alarm  
occurrence (communication)  
□X1  
□X5 □X9  
OC1  
∨
COMM  
□X2 □X6  
Output terminal status  
at alarm occurrence  
□:Signal OFF, ■:Signal ON  
□FWD □X3 □X7  
□REV □X4 □X8  
□X1  
□X5 □X9  
□:Signal OFF, ■:Signal ON  
OC1  
∨
□Y1  
□Y2  
□Y3  
□Y4  
□Y5  
Latest alarm  
OC1  
∨
0/1=xxx  
-1=xxx  
-2=xxx  
-3=xxx  
xxx  
xxx  
xxx  
xxx  
No. of occurrences  
Alarm history  
Previous alarm  
Before previous alarm  
Two times before previous  
No. of occurrences  
Updated at alarm occurrence  
If the cause of alarm is the  
same as the same as the  
previous one, only the number  
of occurrences is incremented.  
∨
OC1  
5=xxx  
4=xxx  
3=xxx  
2=xxx  
Multiple alarms  
(Simultaneously occurring  
alarms)  
Alarm code  
Up to four alarm codes can be displayed simultaneously.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3-12 Alarm history and factors  
On the "Program menu" screen, select "8.Alarm Factors" to display the alarm history.  
FUNC  
DATA  
Press  
to display troubleshooting information for the alarm selected.  
60.00  
60.00  
60.00  
Latest alarm  
Alarm history  
FWD  
1.DATA SETTING  
2.DATA CHECK  
3.OPR MNTR  
4.I/O CHECK  
0/1=xxx  
xxx  
xxx  
xxx  
xxx  
FUNC  
DATA  
PRG  
RUN  
-1=xxx  
-2=xxx  
-3=xxx  
PRG  
F/D  
⇒
PRG MENU  
LED SHIFT  
⇒
5.MAINTENANC  
6.LOAD FCTR  
7.ALM INF  
⇒
8.ALM CAUSE  
60.00  
5=xxx  
4=xxx  
3=xxx  
2=xxx  
Multiple alarms  
(simultaneously occurring alarms)  
Move the cursor using  
FUNC  
DATA  
∧
∨
0/1=xxx  
-1=xxx  
-2=xxx  
-3=xxx  
xxx  
xxx  
xxx  
xxx  
and  
to select one  
OC1  
Alarm code of  
the selected alarm  
of the alarm occurred.  
xxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxx  
Alarm occurrence factors  
of the selected alarm.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3-13 Data copy  
On the "Program menu" screen, select "9. Data Copy" to display the data copy read screen. A copy  
operation is then performed in the following order;reading inverter function data, removing the keypad panel,  
attaching the keypad panel to another inverter, and writing the data to the inverter.  
The "verify" feature also makes it possible to compare and check differences in the data stored in the keypad  
panel and the data stored in the inverter.  
When WRITE to the type of the inverter (capacity,  
Read data  
Write data  
voltage and series) is same as the inverter type in  
copy origin, all of the function will be written. When  
the type of the inverter is different, the function  
except the following will be written. However, in both  
Attach keypad panel,  
Turn power ON.  
60.00  
cases, F00(Data protection), P02/A11(Motor capacity),  
P04/A13 (Motor tuning), H03(Data initializing), H31(RS-485  
address) and o26/AIO optional adjustment will NOT be  
written.  
RUN  
PRG  
PRG  
F/D  
⇒PRG MENU  
- The function which will NOT be copied when different inverter type  
⇒LED SHIFT  
FUNC.  
F03  
NAME  
Max. freq. 1  
FUNC.  
F26  
NAME  
Motor sound  
OL function  
60.00  
F04  
F05  
F06  
F09  
Base freq. 1  
E33  
E34  
E35  
E37  
(Mode select)  
OL function  
(Level)  
OL function  
(Timer)  
OL2 function  
(Level)  
Auto-restart  
(Holding DC  
voltage)  
PRG  
RUN  
PRG⇒PRG MENU  
Rated voltage 1  
Max. voltage 1  
Torque boost 1  
F/D  
⇒LED SHIFT  
60.00  
1.DATA SETTING  
2.DATA CHECK  
3.OPR MNTR  
4.I/O CHECK  
PRG  
Electronic  
thermal 1  
(Select)  
Electronic  
thermal 1  
F10  
F11  
H15  
60.00  
All of  
"P"  
Motor 1  
1.DATA SETTING  
2.DATA CHECK  
3.OPR MNTR  
4.I/O CHECK  
(Level) code  
5.MAINTENANC  
6.LOAD FCTR  
7.ALM INF  
Electronic  
thermal 1  
All of  
"A"  
code  
F12  
F13  
Motor 2  
(Thermal time  
constant)  
Electronic  
8.ALM CAUSE  
9.DATA COPY  
thermal  
5.MAINTENANC  
6.LOAD FCTR  
7.ALM INF  
overload relay  
⇒
In addition, when WRITE from inverter ROM No. is new one to old  
one, WRITE except F01(Freq. command 1) without ERROR display.  
FUNC  
DATA  
8.ALM CAUSE  
9.DATA COPY  
⇒
<DATA COPY>  
-----  
DATA copy screen  
Mode (read mode)  
WRITE to the inverter with different  
capacity, voltage and series.  
READ  
FUNC  
DATA  
<DATA COPY>  
040HP-4  
Inverter type of data  
stored by keypad panel  
<DATA COPY>  
040HP-4  
FUNC  
DATA  
WRITE  
READ  
MEMORY ERROR  
<DATA COPY>  
-----  
FUNC  
DATA  
∧
READ  
FUNC  
DATA  
„„„„  
Reading  
<DATA COPY>  
040HP-4  
<DATA COPY>  
040HP-4  
WRITE  
MEMORY ERROR  
„„„„  
WRITE  
Mode (write mode)  
<DATA COPY>  
040HP-4  
Data of inverter type  
read by keypad panel  
FUNC  
DATA  
READ  
COMPLETE  
Read complete  
„„„„„„„„„„„„„„  
<DATA COPY>  
040HP-4  
<DATA COPY>  
040HP-4  
WRITE  
WRITE  
COMPLETE  
Write  
complete  
„„„„„„„„„„„„„„„„  
Writing  
„„„„  
Remove keypad panel  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Data check  
(verify)  
Error processing  
60.00  
1) Change disabled during operation  
If a write operation is attempted during an inverter  
operation, or vice versa, the error message below will  
appear.  
RUN  
MENU  
PRG  
⇒PRG  
RESET  
After stopping the inverter and pressing  
write operation.  
, retry the  
F/D  
⇒LED SHIFT  
PRG  
<DATA COPY>  
040HP-4  
60.00  
WRITE  
INV RUNNING  
1.DATA SETTING  
2.DATA CHECK  
3.OPR MNTR  
4.I/O CHECK  
2) Memory error  
5.MAINTENANC  
6.LOAD FCTR  
7.ALM INF  
8.ALM CAUSE  
9.DATA COPY  
If a write operation is attempted while data has not been  
saved (i.e., no data) in the keypad panel data memory  
during the read mode, the following error message will  
appear:  
⇒
FUNC  
DATA  
<DATA COPY>  
WRITE  
<DATA COPY>  
040HP-4  
Inverter type of data  
stored in the keypad  
panel  
MEMORY ERROR  
READ  
∧
3) Verify error  
During a data check (verify) operation, if data stored in  
the keypad panel differs from data stored in the inverter,  
the following error message is displayed to indicate the  
function No. The data check is suspended.  
<DATA COPY>  
040HP-4  
WRITE  
To continue the data check and check for other  
FUNC  
DATA  
mismatching data, press  
.
To stop the data check  
∧
RESET  
and switch to another operation, press  
.
<DATA COPY>  
075HP-4  
<DATA COPY>  
040HP-4  
WRITE  
VERIFY  
Mode (data check)  
ERR:F25  
„„„„  
FUNC  
DATA  
<DATA COPY>  
4) Data protection  
040HP-4  
When WRITE to the inverter which is protected by  
"Data protection" function, the following error message  
will appear. After released the protection, write  
operation is attempted.  
VERIFY  
Data check in progress  
„„„„  
<DATA COPY>  
040HP-4  
WRITE  
<DATA COPY>  
040HP-4  
DATA PRTCTD  
VERIFY  
COMPLETE  
Data check complete  
„„„„„„„„„„„„„„„  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3-14 Alarm mode  
If an alarm occurs, the “Alarm screen” indicating the alarm contents is displayed. Use  
alarm history and multiple alarms (if more than two alarms occur simultaneously).  
∧
∨
and  
to display  
Alarm detection order  
Alarm code  
1.OC1  
No. of consecutive occurrences  
Alarm name  
1=xxx xxx  
xxxxxxxxxxxxx  
PRG  
RESET  
⇒
PRG MENU  
Operation guide  
⇒
RESET  
Alarm detection order  
Operation  
method  
LED  
display  
LCD  
display  
Description  
5.  
4.  
3.  
2.  
1.  
5
4
3
2
1
0
No. 5 alarm  
No. 4 alarm  
No. 3 alarm  
No. 2 alarm  
∧
∨
No. 1 alarm (more than two alarms occurred)  
Latest alarm (only one alarm occurred/alarm  
released)  
Blank  
Blank  
Blank  
Blank  
-1  
-2  
-3  
Previous alarm history  
Alarm history before previous alarm  
Alarm history two times before previous alarm  
Alarm code: See Table 6-1-1  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Function select  
5-1 Function select list  
F:Fundamental Functions  
Func  
NAME  
No.  
Min.  
Unit  
Change  
User  
Remark  
Factory setting  
-30HP 40HP-  
LCD Display  
Setting range  
Unit  
during op Set value  
F00 Data protection  
F00 DATA PRTC  
F01 FREQ CMD 1  
F02 OPR METHOD  
F03 MAX Hz-1  
0, 1  
-
-
-
-
0
0
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
F01 Frequency command 1  
F02 Operation method  
F03 Maximum frequency 1  
0 to 11  
0 to 4  
-
-
0
G11S: 50 to 400Hz  
P11S: 50 to 120Hz  
Hz  
1
60  
F04 Base frequency 1  
F05 Rated voltage 1  
F04 BASE Hz-1  
F05 RATED V-1  
G11S: 25 to 400Hz  
Hz  
V
1
1
60  
NA  
NA  
P11S: 25 to 120Hz  
0V: (Output voltage  
230:(230V class)  
460:(460V class)  
(at Base frequency 1)  
proportinal to sorce voltage)  
80 to 240V: (230V class)  
320 to 480V: (460V class)  
80 to 240V: (230V class)  
320 to 480V: (460V class)  
0.01 to 3600s  
F06 Maximum voltage 1  
F06 MAX V-1  
V
s
-
1
230:(230V class)  
460:(460V class)  
NA  
A
(at Maximum frequency 1)  
F07 Acceleration time 1  
F08 Deceleration time 1  
F09 Torque boost 1  
F07 ACC TIME1  
F08 DEC TIME1  
F09 TRQ BOOST1  
0.01  
0.1  
6.0  
20.0  
0.0, 0.1 to 20.0  
G11S:2.0  
P11S:2.0  
1
A
F10 Electronic  
F11 thermal 1  
F12  
(Select) F10 ELCTRN OL1  
(Level) F11 OL LEVEL1  
0, 1, 2  
-
A
-
0.01  
0.1  
-
A
A
A
INV rated current 20 to 135%  
0.5 to 75.0 min  
Motor rated current  
5.0 10.0  
(Thermal time constant) F12 TIME CNST1  
min  
-
F13 Electronic thermal overload relay  
(for braking resistor)  
F13 DBR OL  
G11  
[Up to 10[HP]]  
0, 1, 2  
1
0
0
A
[15[HP] and above ]  
0
P11  
[Up to 15[HP]]  
0, 2  
[020[HP] and above ]  
0
0
0
F14 Restart mode after  
momentary power failure  
F15 Frequency limiter  
F16  
F14 RESTART  
0 to 5  
-
-
NA  
(High) F15 H LIMITER  
(Low) F16 L LIMITER  
G11S: 0 to 400Hz  
P11S: 0 to 120Hz  
0.0 to 200.0%  
Hz  
1
70  
0
A
A
A
A
F17 Gain  
(for freq. set signal) F17 FREQ GAIN  
F18 FREQ BIAS  
%
0.1  
0.1  
100.0  
0.0  
F18 Bias frequency  
G11S: -400.0 to +400.0Hz  
P11S: -120.0 to +120.0Hz  
Hz  
F20 DC brake  
F21  
(Starting freq.) F20 DC BRK Hz  
(Braking level) F21 DC BRK LVL  
0.0 to 60.0Hz  
Hz  
%
0.1  
1
0.0  
0
A
A
G11S: 0 to 100%  
P11S: 0 to 80%  
F22  
(Braking time) F22 DC BRK t  
0.0s(Inactive)  
0.1 to 30.0s  
0.1 to 60.0Hz  
0.0 to 10.0s  
0.1 to 60.0Hz  
0.75 to 15kHz  
0 to 3  
s
0.1  
0.0  
A
F23 Starting frequency  
(Freq.) F23 START Hz  
(Holding time) F24 HOLDING t  
F25 STOP Hz  
Hz  
s
0.1  
0.1  
0.1  
1
0.5  
0.0  
0.2  
2
NA  
NA  
NA  
A
F24  
F25 Stop frequency  
Hz  
kHz  
-
F26 Motor sound  
(Carrier freq.) F26 MTR SOUND  
(Sound tone) F27 SOUND TONE  
(Voltage adjust) F30 FMA V-ADJ  
(Function) F31 FMA FUNC  
(Pulse rate) F33 FMP PULSES  
(Voltage adjust) F34 FMP V-ADJ  
(Function) F35 FMP FUNC  
F36 30RY MODE  
F27  
-
0
A
F30 FMA  
0 to 200%  
%
-
1
100  
0
A
F31  
0 to 11  
-
A
F33 FMP  
300 to 6000p/s (full scale)  
0%, 1 to 200%  
0 to 10  
p/s  
%
-
1
1440  
0
A
F34  
1
A
F35  
-
0
A
F36 30RY operation mode  
F40 Torque limiter 1  
0, 1  
-
-
0
NA  
A
(Driving) F40 DRV TRQ 1  
G11S: 20 to 200%, 999  
P11S: 20 to 150%, 999  
%
1
999  
F41  
(Braking) F41 BRK TRQ 1  
F42 TRQVECTOR1  
G11S: 0%, 20 to 200%, 999  
P11S: 0%, 20 to 150%, 999  
999  
0
A
F42 Torque vector control 1  
0, 1  
-
-
NA  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E:Extension Terminal Functions  
Func  
NAME  
No.  
Min.  
Unit  
-
Change  
User  
Remark  
Factory setting  
-30HP 40HP-  
LCD Display  
Setting range  
Unit  
-
during op Set value  
E01 X1 terminal function  
E02 X2 terminal function  
E03 X3 terminal function  
E04 X4 terminal function  
E05 X5 terminal function  
E06 X6 terminal function  
E07 X7 terminal function  
E08 X8 terminal function  
E09 X9 terminal function  
E10 Acceleration time 2  
E11 Deceleration time 2  
E12 Acceleration time 3  
E13 Deceleration time 3  
E14 Acceleration time 4  
E15 Deceleration time 4  
E01 X1 FUNC  
E02 X2 FUNC  
E03 X3 FUNC  
E04 X4 FUNC  
E05 X5 FUNC  
E06 X6 FUNC  
E07 X7 FUNC  
E08 X8 FUNC  
E09 X9 FUNC  
E10 ACC TIME2  
E11 DEC TIME2  
E12 ACC TIME3  
E13 DEC TIME3  
E14 ACC TIME4  
E15 DEC TIME4  
0 to 35  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
A
0.01 to 3600s  
s
0.01  
6.00  
6.00  
6.00  
6.00  
6.00  
6.00  
20.00  
20.00  
20.00  
20.00  
20.00  
20.00  
A
A
A
A
A
E16 Torque limiter 2  
(Driving) E16 DRV TRQ 2  
G11S: 20 to 200%, 999  
P11S: 20 to 150%, 999  
%
%
1
1
999  
999  
A
E17  
(Braking) E17 BRK TRQ 2  
G11S: 0%, 20 to 200%, 999  
G11S: 0%, 20 to 150%, 999  
0 to 37  
A
E20  
E21  
E22  
E23  
E24  
Y1 terminal function  
E20 Y1 FUNC  
E21 Y2 FUNC  
-
-
0
1
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
A
Y2 terminal function  
Y3 terminal function  
Y4 terminal function  
Y5A, Y5C terminal func.  
E22 Y3 FUNC  
2
E23 Y4 FUNC  
7
E24 Y5 FUNC  
10  
0
E25 Y5 RY operation mode  
E30 FAR function  
E25 Y5RY MODE  
(Hysteresis) E30 FAR HYSTR  
(Level) E31 FDT1 LEVEL  
0,1  
-
1
0.1  
1
0.0 to 10.0Hz  
Hz  
Hz  
2.5  
60  
E31 FDT function  
G11S: 0 to 400Hz  
P11S: 0 to 120Hz  
0.0 to 30.0Hz  
A
E32 signal  
(Hysteresis) E32 FDT1 HYSTR  
E33 OL1 WARNING  
Hz  
-
0.1  
-
1.0  
0
A
A
E33 OL1 function(Mode select)  
0: Thermal calculation  
1: Output current  
G11S: 5 to 200%  
P11S: 5 to 150%  
0.0 to 60.0s  
E34 signal  
(Level) E34 OL1 LEVEL  
A
0.01  
Motor rated current  
A
E35  
(Timer) E35 OL1 TIMER  
(Level) E36 FDT2 LEVEL  
s
0.1  
1
10.0  
60  
A
A
E36 FDT2 function  
G11S: 0 to 400Hz  
P11S: 0 to 120Hz  
Hz  
E37 OL2 function  
(Level) E37 OL2 LEVEL  
G11S: 5 to 200%  
G11S: 5 to 150%  
-999.00 to 999.00  
-999.00 to 999.00  
0.0 to 5.0s  
A
0.01  
Motor rated current  
A
E40  
E41  
Display coefficient A  
Display coefficient B  
E40 COEF A  
E41 COEF B  
-
-
s
-
-
-
-
-
0.01  
0.01  
0.00  
0.5  
0
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
0.01  
E42 LED Display filter  
E42 DISPLAY FL  
0.1  
E43 LED Monitor  
(Function) E43 LED MNTR  
(Display at STOP mode) E44 LED MNTR2  
(Function) E45 LCD MNTR  
(Language) E46 LANGUAGE  
(Contrast) E47 CONTRAST  
0 to 12  
-
-
-
-
-
E44  
0, 1  
0
E45 LCD Monitor  
0, 1  
0
E46  
E47  
0 to 5  
1
0(soft) to 10(hard)  
5
C:Control Functions of Frequency  
Func  
NAME  
No.  
Min.  
Unit  
1
Change  
User  
Remark  
Factory setting  
LCD Display  
Setting range  
Unit  
Hz  
during op Set value  
-30HP  
40HP-  
C01 Jump frequency  
(Jump freq. 1) C01 JUMP Hz 1  
(Jump freq. 2) C02 JUMP Hz 2  
(Jump freq. 3) C03 JUMP Hz 3  
(Hysteresis) C04 JUMP HYSTR  
(Freq. 1) C05 MULTI Hz-1  
(Freq. 2) C06 MULTI Hz-2  
(Freq. 3) C07 MULTI Hz-3  
(Freq. 4) C08 MULTI Hz-4  
(Freq. 5) C09 MULTI Hz-5  
(Freq. 6) C10 MULTI Hz-6  
(Freq. 7) C11 MULTI Hz-7  
(Freq. 8) C12 MULTI Hz-8  
(Freq. 9) C13 MULTI Hz-9  
(Freq. 10) C14 MULTI Hz-10  
(Freq. 11) C15 MULTI Hz-11  
(Freq. 12) C16 MULTI Hz-12  
(Freq. 13) C17 MULTI Hz-13  
(Freq. 14) C18 MULTI Hz-14  
(Freq. 15) C19 MULTI Hz-15  
G11S: 0 to 400Hz  
0
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
P11S：0 to 120Hz  
C02  
0
C03  
0
C04  
0 to 30Hz  
Hz  
Hz  
1
3
C05 Multistep frequency  
G11S: 0.00 to 400.00Hz  
P11S: 0.00 to 120.00Hz  
0.01  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
0.00  
C06 setting  
C07  
C08  
C09  
C10  
C11  
C12  
C13  
C14  
C15  
C16  
C17  
C18  
C19  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Func  
Min.  
Unit  
Change  
User  
Remark  
Factory setting  
-30HP 40HP-  
NAME  
LCD Display  
Setting range  
Unit  
No.  
during op Set value  
A
C20 JOG frequency  
C20 JOG Hz  
G11S:0.00 to 400.00Hz  
P11S:0.00 to 120.00Hz  
Hz 0.01  
5.00  
C21 PATTERN(Mode select)  
C21 PATTERN  
0,1,2  
-
-
0
NA  
operation  
C22  
(Stage 1) C22 STAGE 1  
(Stage 2) C23 STAGE 2  
(Stage 3) C24 STAGE 3  
(Stage 4) C25 STAGE 4  
(Stage 5) C26 STAGE 5  
(Stage 6) C27 STAGE 6  
(Stage 7) C28 STAGE 7  
C30 FREQ CMD 2  
Operation time:0.00 to 6000s  
F1 to F4 and R1 to R4  
s
0.01  
0.00 F1  
0.00 F1  
0.00 F1  
0.00 F1  
0.00 F1  
0.00 F1  
0.00 F1  
2
A
A
C23  
C24  
A
C25  
A
C26  
A
C27  
A
C28  
A
C30 Frequency command 2  
C31 Offset adjust(terminal[12])  
C32  
0 to 11  
-
-
NA  
A
C31 BIAS 12  
-100.0 to +100.0%  
0.0 to +200.0%  
0.00 to 5.00s  
%
%
s
0.1  
0.1  
0.01  
0.0  
C32 GAIN 12  
100.0  
0.05  
A
C33 Analog setting signal filter  
C33 REF FILTER  
A
P:Motor Parameters  
P01 Number of motor 1 poles  
P02 Motor 1  
P01 M1 POLES  
2 to 14  
-
2
4
NA  
NA  
(Capacity) P02 M1-CAP  
Up to 30[HP]: 0.01 to 60HP  
40[HP]and above: 0.01 to 800HP  
0.00 to 2000A  
HP 0.01  
Motor Capacity  
P03  
P04  
P05  
P06  
(Rated current) P03 M1-Ir  
(Tuning) P04 M1 TUN1  
A
-
0.01  
Motor rated current  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
0, 1, 2  
-
-
0
0
(On-line Tuning) P05 M1 TUN2  
(No-load current) P06 M1-Io  
0, 1  
-
0.00 to 2000A  
A
0.01 Fuji STANDARD RATED  
VALUE  
P07  
(%R1 setting) P07 M1-%R1  
(%X setting) P08 M1-%X  
P09 SLIP COMP1  
0.00 to 50.00%  
0.00 to 50.00%  
0.00 to 15.00Hz  
%
%
0.01 Fuji STANDARD RATED  
VALUE  
A
A
A
P08  
0.01 Fuji STANDARD RATED  
VALUE  
P09 Slip compensation control 1  
Hz 0.01  
0.00  
H:High Performance Functions  
H03 Data initializing  
H03 DATA INIT  
0, 1  
-
-
s
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
1
-
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
NA  
A
H04 Auto-reset  
(Times) H04 AUTO-RESET  
0, 1 to 10 times  
2 to 20s  
0, 1  
H05  
(Reset interval) H05 RESET INT  
H06 FAN STOP  
A
H06 Fan stop operation  
H07 ACC/DEC pattern  
H08 Rev. phase sequence lock  
H09 Start mode  
A
(Mode select) H07 ACC PTN  
H08 REV LOCK  
0,1,2,3  
0, 1  
-
NA  
NA  
NA  
A
-
H09 START MODE  
0, 1, 2  
0, 1  
-
H10 Energy-saving operation  
H10 ENERGY SAV  
-
G11S:0  
P11S:1  
0
H11 DEC mode  
H11 DEC MODE  
H12 INST CL  
0, 1  
-
-
-
-
A
NA  
NA  
A
H12 Instantaneous OC limiting  
0, 1  
1
H13 Auto-restart  
(Restart time) H13 RESTART t  
(Freq. fall rate) H14 FALL RATE  
(Holding DC voltage) H15 HOLD V  
0.1 to 10.0s  
0.00 to 100.00Hz/s  
s
0.1  
0.1  
H14  
H15  
Hz/s 0.01  
10.00  
3ph 230V class: 200 to 300V  
3ph 460V class: 400 to 600V  
0.0 to 30.0s, 999  
V
1
230V class:235V  
460V class:470V  
999  
A
H16  
(OPR command selfhold time) H16 SELFHOLD t  
H18 TRQ CTRL  
s
-
0.1  
-
NA  
NA  
A
H18 Torque control  
G11:0, 1, 2, P11:0  
0, 1  
0
0
H19 Active drive  
H19 AUT RED  
-
-
H20 PID control  
(Mode select) H20 PID MODE  
(Feedback signal) H21 FB SIGNAL  
(P-gain) H22 P-GAIN  
0, 1, 2  
-
-
0
NA  
NA  
A
H21  
0, 1, 2, 3  
-
-
1
H22  
0.01 to 10.00 times  
0.0 , 0.1 to 3600s  
0.00s , 0.01 to 10.0s  
0.0 to 60.0s  
-
0.01  
0.1  
0.01  
0.1  
0.1  
0.0  
0.00  
0.5  
0
H23  
(I-gain) H23 I-GAIN  
s
s
s
A
H24  
(D-gain) H24 D-GAIN  
A
H25  
(Feedback filter) H25 FB FILTER  
(Mode select) H26 PTC MODE  
(Level) H27 PTC LEVEL  
A
H26 PTC thermistor  
0, 1  
A
H27  
0.00 to 5.00V  
G11:-9.9 to 0.0Hz, P11:0.0 (Fixed.)  
0, 1, 2, 3  
V
Hz  
-
0.01  
1.60  
0.0  
0
A
H28 Droop operation  
H28 DROOP  
0.1  
A
H30 Serial link  
(Function select) H30 LINK FUNC  
(Address) H31 ADDRESS  
-
A
H31 Modbus-RTU  
0 (broadcast), 1 to 247  
0, 1, 2, 3  
-
1
1
NA  
A
H32  
H33  
H34  
H35  
H36  
H37  
H38  
H39  
(Mode select on no response error) H32 MODE ON ER  
(Timer) H33 TIMER  
-
-
0
0.0 to 60.0s  
s
-
0.1  
2.0  
1
A
(Baud rate) H34 BAUD RATE  
(Data length) H35 LENGTH  
(Parity check) H36 PARITY  
(Stop bits) H37 STOP BITS  
(No response error detection time) H38 NO RES t  
(Response interval) H39 INTERVAL  
0, 1, 2, 3  
-
A
0 (8-bit fixed)  
0, 1, 2  
-
-
0
A
-
-
-
0
A
0(2bit), 1(1bit)  
0 (No detection), 1 to 60s  
0.00 to 1.00s  
-
0
A
s
s
1
0
A
0.01  
0.01  
A
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A:Alternative Motor Parameters  
Func  
NAME  
No.  
Min.  
Unit  
1
Change  
User  
Remark  
Factory setting  
-30HP 40HP-  
LCD Display  
Setting range  
Unit  
during op Set value  
NA  
A01 Maximum frequency 2  
A02 Base frequency 2  
A01 MAX Hz-2  
A02 BASE Hz-2  
G11S: 50 to 400Hz  
Hz  
Hz  
60  
P11S: 50 to 120Hz  
G11S: 25 to 400Hz  
P11S: 25 to 120Hz  
1
1
60  
NA  
NA  
A03 Rated voltage 2  
A03 RATED V-2  
0:  
V
220:(230V class)  
380:(460V class)  
(at Base frequency 2 )  
80 to 240V:(230V class)  
320 to 480V:(460V class)  
80 to 240V:(230V class)  
320 to 480V:(460V class)  
A04 Maximum voltage 2  
A05 Torque boost2  
A04 MAX V-2  
V
-
1
-
220:(230V class)  
380:(460V class)  
NA  
A
(at Base frequency 2)  
A05 TRQ BOOST2  
0.0, 0.1 to 20.0  
G11S:2.0  
P11S:0.1  
1
A06 Electronic  
thermal  
(Select) A06 ELCTRN OL2  
0, 1, 2  
-
-
A
overload  
relay for  
motor 2  
A07  
(Level) A07 OL LEVEL2  
(Thermal time constant) A08 TIME CNST2  
A09 TRQVECTOR2  
INV rated current 20%to135%  
0.5 to 75.0 min  
0, 1  
A
min  
-
0.01  
0.1  
-
Motor rated current  
A
A08  
5.0  
10.0  
A
A09 Torque vector control 2  
A10 Number of motor-2 poles  
A11 Motor 2  
0
4
NA  
NA  
NA  
A10 M2 POLES  
2 to 14 poles  
ploes  
2
(Capacity) A11 M2-CAP  
Up to 30HP:0.01 to 60HP  
40HP and above:0.01to800HP  
0.00 to 2000A  
HP 0.01  
Motor capacity  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
(Rated current) A12 M2-Ir  
(Tuning) A13 M2 TUN1  
A
-
0.01  
Motor rated current  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
A
0, 1, 2  
-
-
0
0
(On-line Tuning) A14 M2 TUN2  
(No-load current) A15 M2-Io  
(%R1 setting) A16 M2-%R1  
(%X setting) A17 M2-%X  
0, 1  
-
0.00 to 2000A  
A
%
%
0.01 Fuji standard rated value  
0.01 Fuji standard rated value  
0.01 Fuji standard rated value  
0.00 to 50.00%  
0.00 to 50.00%  
0.00 to 15.00Hz  
A
A18  
(Slip compensation control 2) A18 SLIP COMP2  
Hz 0.01  
0.00  
A
U:User Functions  
U01 Maximum compensation frequency  
U01 USER 01  
0 to 65535  
75  
A
-
1
during braking torque limit  
U02 1st S-shape level at acceleration  
U03 2nd S-shape level at acceleration  
U04 1st S-shape level at deceleration  
U05 2nd S-shape level at deceleration  
U08 Main DC link capacitor  
U02 USER 02  
U03 USER 03  
1 to 50%  
%
%
%
%
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10  
10  
10  
10  
xxxx  
0
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
A
1 to 50%  
U04 USER 04  
1 to 50%  
U05 USER 05  
1 to 50%  
(Initial value) U08 USER 08  
(Measured value) U09 USER 09  
0 to 65535  
0 to 65535  
0 to 65535h  
0 to 65535h  
0 to 32767  
0 to 32767  
0 to 65535  
U09  
-
A
U10 PC board capacitor powered on time  
U11 Cooling fan operating time  
U13 Magnetize current vibration damping gain  
U15 Slip compensation filter time constant  
U23 Integral gain of continuous operation  
at power failure  
U10 USER 10  
U11 USER 11  
U13 USER 13  
U15 USER 15  
U23 USER 23  
h
h
-
0
A
0
A
819  
556  
410  
546  
A
-
A
1738  
1000  
A
-
-
-
1
1
-
U24 Proportional gain of continuous  
operation at power failure  
U24 USER 24  
U48 USER 48  
U49 USER 49  
0 to 65535  
0, 1, 2  
1024  
1000  
A
U48 Input phase loss protection  
-75HP  
0
100HP-  
1
NA  
U49 RS-485 protocol selection  
0, 1  
-
%
s
-
1
1
10  
0.5  
1
NA  
A
U56 Speed agreement  
U57 /PG error  
(Detection width) U56 USER 56  
(Detection timer) U57 USER 57  
U58 USER 58  
0 to 50%  
0.0 to 10.0s  
0, 1  
0.1  
-
U58 PG error selection  
-
NA  
NA  
U59 Braking-resistor function select(up to 30HP)  
Manufacturer's function(40HP or more)  
U59 USER 59  
U60 USER 60  
U61 USER 61  
U89 USER 89  
00 to A8(HEX)  
00  
-
-
1
-
U60 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration  
0, 1  
0
0
1
NA  
A
U61 Voltage detect offset and gain adjustment  
--30HP：0(Fixed.)  
40HP--：0, 1, 2  
0.1  
-
-
-
-
U89 Motor overload memory  
retention  
A
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table 5-1-1 The factory setting value (details)  
Function code  
*2  
*1 *2  
*1 *2  
*1  
*1  
F11:Electric  
P02:Motor1  
(Capacity)  
A11:Motor2  
(Capacity)  
P03:Motor1  
(Rated current)  
A12:Motor2  
(Rated current)  
P06:Motor1  
(No-load current)  
A15:Motor2  
P07:Motor1  
(%R1 setting)  
A16:Motor2  
(%R1 setting)  
P08:Motor1  
(%X setting)  
A17:Motor2  
(%X setting)  
thermal1(Level)  
E34:OL1  
function(Level)  
E37:OL2  
(No-load current)  
Inverter type  
function(Level)  
A07:Electric thermal  
overload relay  
for motor2  
(Level)  
[A]  
[HP]  
0.25  
0.50  
1.00  
2.00  
3.00  
5.00  
7.50  
[A]  
[A]  
[%]  
11.02  
6.15  
3.96  
4.29  
3.15  
3.34  
2.65  
2.43  
2.07  
2.09  
1.75  
1.90  
1.82  
1.92  
1.29  
1.37  
1.08  
1.05  
2.65  
2.43  
2.07  
2.09  
1.75  
1.90  
1.82  
1.92  
1.29  
1.37  
1.08  
1.05  
0.96  
[%]  
13.84  
8.80  
8.86  
7.74  
FRNF25G11S-2UX  
FRNF50G11S-2UX  
FRN001G11S-2UX  
FRN002G11S-2UX  
FRN003G11S-2UX  
FRN005G11S-2UX  
FRN007G11S-2UX  
FRN010G11S-2UX  
FRN015G11S-2UX  
FRN020G11S-2UX  
FRN025G11S-2UX  
FRN030G11S-2UX  
FRN040G11S-2UX  
FRN050G11S-2UX  
FRN060G11S-2UX  
FRN075G11S-2UX  
FRN100G11S-2UX  
FRN125G11S-2UX  
FRN007P11S-2UX  
FRN010P11S-2UX  
FRN015P11S-2UX  
FRN020P11S-2UX  
FRN025P11S-2UX  
FRN030P11S-2UX  
FRN040P11S-2UX  
FRN050P11S-2UX  
FRN060P11S-2UX  
FRN075P11S-2UX  
FRN100P11S-2UX  
FRN125P11S-2UX  
FRN150P11S-2UX  
1.40  
2.00  
3.00  
5.80  
7.90  
12.6  
18.6  
25.3  
37.3  
49.1  
60.0  
72.4  
91.0  
115.0  
137.0  
174.0  
226.0  
268.0  
18.6  
25.3  
37.3  
49.1  
60.0  
72.4  
91.0  
115.0  
137.0  
174.0  
226.0  
268.0  
337.0  
1.40  
2.00  
3.00  
5.80  
7.90  
12.6  
18.6  
25.3  
37.3  
49.1  
60.0  
72.4  
91.0  
115.0  
137.0  
174.0  
226.0  
268.0  
18.6  
25.3  
37.3  
49.1  
60.0  
72.4  
91.0  
115.0  
137.0  
174.0  
226.0  
268.0  
337.0  
1.12  
1.22  
1.54  
2.80  
3.57  
4.78  
6.23  
8.75  
12.7  
9.20  
16.7  
19.8  
13.6  
18.7  
20.8  
28.6  
37.4  
29.8  
6.23  
8.75  
12.7  
9.20  
16.7  
19.8  
13.6  
18.7  
20.8  
28.6  
37.4  
29.8  
90.4  
20.81  
23.57  
28.91  
30.78  
29.13  
29.53  
31.49  
32.55  
25.32  
24.87  
26.99  
27.09  
23.80  
22.90  
28.91  
30.78  
29.13  
29.53  
31.49  
32.55  
25.32  
24.87  
26.99  
27.09  
23.80  
22.90  
21.61  
10.00  
15.00  
20.00  
25.00  
30.00  
40.00  
50.00  
60.00  
75.00  
100.00  
125.00  
7.50  
10.00  
15.00  
20.00  
25.00  
30.00  
40.00  
50.00  
60.00  
75.00  
100.00  
125.00  
150.00  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function code  
*2  
*1 *2  
*1 *2  
*1  
*1  
F11:Electric  
thermal1(Level)  
E34:OL1  
function(Level)  
E37:OL2  
function(Level)  
P02:Motor1  
(Capacity)  
A11:Motor2  
(Capacity)  
P03:Motor1  
(Rated current)  
A12:Motor2  
(Rated current)  
P06:Motor1  
(No-load current)  
A15:Motor2  
P07:Motor1  
(%R1 setting)  
A16:Motor2  
(%R1 setting)  
P08:Motor1  
(%X setting)  
A17:Motor2  
(%X setting)  
(No-load current)  
Inverter type  
A07:Electric thermal  
overload relay  
for motor2  
(Level)  
[A]  
1.00  
[HP]  
0.50  
[A]  
1.00  
[A]  
0.61  
[%]  
[%]  
8.80  
FRNF50G11S-4UX  
FRN001G11S-4UX  
FRN002G11S-4UX  
FRN003G11S-4UX  
FRN005G11S-4UX  
FRN007G11S-4UX  
FRN010G11S-4UX  
FRN015G11S-4UX  
FRN020G11S-4UX  
FRN025G11S-4UX  
FRN030G11S-4UX  
FRN040G11S-4UX  
FRN050G11S-4UX  
FRN060G11S-4UX  
FRN075G11S-4UX  
FRN100G11S-4UX  
FRN125G11S-4UX  
FRN150G11S-4UX  
FRN200G11S-4UX  
FRN250G11S-4UX  
FRN300G11S-4UX  
FRN350G11S-4UX  
FRN400G11S-4UX  
FRN450G11S-4UX  
FRN500G11S-4UX  
FRN600G11S-4UX  
FRN007P11S-4UX  
FRN010P11S-4UX  
FRN015P11S-4UX  
FRN020P11S-4UX  
FRN025P11S-4UX  
FRN030P11S-4UX  
FRN040P11S-4UX  
FRN050P11S-4UX  
FRN060P11S-4UX  
FRN075P11S-4UX  
FRN100P11S-4UX  
FRN125P11S-4UX  
FRN150P11S-4UX  
FRN200P11S-4UX  
FRN250P11S-4UX  
FRN300P11S-4UX  
FRN350P11S-4UX  
FRN400P11S-4UX  
FRN450P11S-4UX  
FRN500P11S-4UX  
FRN600P11S-4UX  
FRN700P11S-4UX  
FRN800P11S-4UX  
6.15  
3.96  
4.29  
3.15  
3.34  
2.65  
2.43  
2.07  
2.09  
1.75  
1.90  
1.82  
1.92  
1.29  
1.37  
1.08  
1.05  
0.96  
0.72  
0.71  
0.53  
0.99  
1.11  
0.95  
1.05  
0.85  
2.65  
2.43  
2.07  
2.09  
1.75  
1.90  
1.82  
1.92  
1.29  
1.37  
1.08  
1.05  
0.96  
0.72  
0.71  
0.53  
0.99  
1.11  
0.95  
1.05  
0.85  
1.02  
1.17  
1.50  
2.90  
4.00  
6.30  
9.30  
12.7  
18.7  
24.6  
30.0  
36.2  
45.5  
57.5  
68.7  
86.9  
113.0  
134.0  
169.0  
231.0  
272.0  
323.0  
375.0  
429.0  
481.0  
534.0  
638.0  
9.30  
12.7  
18.7  
24.6  
30.0  
36.2  
45.5  
57.5  
68.7  
1.00  
2.00  
3.00  
5.00  
1.50  
2.90  
4.00  
6.30  
9.30  
12.7  
18.7  
24.6  
30.0  
36.2  
45.5  
57.5  
68.7  
86.9  
113.0  
134.0  
169.0  
231.0  
272.0  
323.0  
375.0  
429.0  
481.0  
534.0  
638.0  
9.30  
12.7  
18.7  
24.6  
30.0  
36.2  
45.5  
57.5  
68.7  
0.77  
1.40  
1.79  
2.39  
3.12  
4.37  
6.36  
4.60  
8.33  
9.88  
6.80  
9.33  
10.40  
14.30  
18.70  
14.90  
45.20  
81.80  
41.10  
45.10  
68.30  
80.70  
85.50  
99.20  
140.00  
3.12  
4.37  
6.36  
4.60  
8.33  
9.88  
6.80  
9.33  
10.40  
14.30  
18.70  
14.90  
45.20  
81.80  
41.10  
45.10  
68.30  
80.70  
85.50  
99.20  
140.00  
164.00  
209.00  
8.86  
7.74  
20.81  
23.57  
28.91  
30.78  
29.13  
29.53  
31.49  
32.55  
25.32  
24.87  
26.99  
27.09  
23.80  
22.90  
21.61  
20.84  
18.72  
18.44  
19.24  
18.92  
19.01  
18.39  
18.38  
28.91  
30.78  
29.13  
29.53  
31.49  
32.55  
25.32  
24.87  
26.99  
27.09  
23.80  
22.90  
21.61  
20.84  
18.72  
18.44  
19.24  
18.92  
19.01  
18.39  
18.38  
21.92  
21.69  
7.50  
10.00  
15.00  
20.00  
25.00  
30.00  
40.00  
50.00  
60.00  
75.00  
100.00  
125.00  
150.00  
200.00  
250.00  
300.00  
350.00  
400.00  
450.00  
500.00  
600.00  
7.50  
10.00  
15.00  
20.00  
25.00  
30.00  
40.00  
50.00  
60.00  
75.00  
100.00  
125.00  
150.00  
200.00  
250.00  
300.00  
350.00  
400.00  
450.00  
500.00  
600.00  
700.00  
800.00  
86.9  
86.9  
113.0  
134.0  
169.0  
231.0  
272.0  
323.0  
375.0  
429.0  
481.0  
534.0  
638.0  
756.0  
870.0  
113.0  
134.0  
169.0  
231.0  
272.0  
323.0  
375.0  
429.0  
481.0  
534.0  
638.0  
756.0  
870.0  
note 1) The factory setting described on *1 is the value of Fuji standard induction motor 460V/50Hz/4-poles.  
The factory setting described on *1 is NOT changed automatically even function code P01/A10 (motor poles) is  
changed to excluding 4-poles.  
note 2) The minimum units of the data *2 is as follows.  
Current value  
[A]  
Minimum units  
[A]  
0.00 to 9.99  
0.01  
10.0 to 99.9  
100 to 999  
0.1  
1
1000 to 9990  
10  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-2 Function Explanation  
Ｆ：Fundamental function  
F00  
Data protection  
‹Setting can be made so that a set value cannot be  
Forward / Inverse operation  
changed by keypad panel operation.  
Related functions  
E01 to E09  
(Set values 19)  
F 0  
0
D A  
T
A
P
R
T
C
Forward operation  
(set value: 1, 3, 4, 5)  
Frequency setting value  
Maximum frequency  
Setting range  
0 : The data can be changed.  
1 : The data cannot be changed.  
[Setting procedure ]  
Inverse operation  
(set value::6)  
STOP  
∧
0 to 1: Press the  
and  
keys simultaneously  
Set value:1,3  
to change the value from 0 to 1, then press the  
FUNC  
DATA  
to validate the change.  
-10  
0
+10 [V]  
STOP  
∨
1 to 0: Press the  
and  
keys simultaneously  
Analog input terminal  
[12] , [V2]  
to change the value from 1 to 0, then press the  
FUNC  
Related functions:  
key to validate the change.  
DATA  
Set value:4,5  
- Maximum frequency  
E01 to E09  
(Set value 21)  
F01  
Frequency command 1  
‹This function selects the frequency  
Related functions  
E01 to E09  
(Set values 17,18)  
C30  
setting method.  
Forward operation  
(set value: 2)  
Frequency setting value  
Maximum frequency  
F
0
1
F
R
E Q  
C M D  
1
0 : Setting by keypad panel operation (  
1 : Setting by voltage input (terminal [12 ](0 to +10V)  
key)  
∧
∨
Inverse operation  
(set value: 7)  
+ terminal [V2](0 to +10V) )  
2: Setting by current input (terminal [C1] (4 to 20mA)).  
3: Setting by voltage input + current input (terminal [12]  
+ terminal [C1] ) (-10 to +10V + 4 to 20mA).  
4: Reversible operation with polarity ( terminal [12]  
(-10 to +10V))  
0
0
4
20 [mA]  
Analog input terminal  
[C1]  
5: Reversible operation with polarity ( terminal [12]  
+[V2]+[V1](Option) (-10 to +10V))  
F02  
Operation method  
6: Inverse mode operation  
(terminal [12] +[V2] (+10V to 0 ))  
7: Inverse mode operation  
‹This function sets the operation command input  
Related functions:  
E01 to E09  
(Set value 21)  
method.  
F
0
2
O P  
R
M E  
T
H O D  
(terminal [C1] (20 to 4mA))  
8: Setting by UP/DOWN control mode 1  
Setting range 0: Key pad operation  
(initial value = 0) (terminals  
[
UP  
]
and  
[DOWN])  
Related functions:  
E01 to E09  
(Set value 17,18)  
9: Setting by UP/DOWN control mode 2  
(initial value =last final value)  
(terminals [UP] and [DOWN])  
See the function explanation of E01 to E09 for details.  
10: Setting by pattern operation  
FWD  
REV  
FWD  
STOP  
(
keys).  
Press the  
Press the  
Press the  
for forward operation.  
for reverse operation.  
for deceleration to a stop.  
REV  
Related functions:  
STOP  
C21to C28  
See the function explanation C21 to C28 for details.  
11: Setting by digital input or pulse train  
Input from terminals [FWD] and [REV] is  
ignored.  
(LOCAL)  
1: Terminal operation(  
2: Terminal operation(  
3: Terminal operation(  
* Optional. For details, see the instruction manual on options.  
STOP  
key active)  
key inactive)  
key active)  
STOP  
STOP  
with Fuji start software.  
STOP  
4: Terminal operation(  
with Fuji start software.  
key inactive)  
* - This function can only be changed when terminals FWD  
and REV are open.  
- REMOTE/LOCAL switching from the keypad panel  
automatically changes the set value of this function.  
STOP  
- REMOTE/LOCAL can be changed by pressing the  
RESET  
key and  
key simultaneously.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
[LE]  
Frequency setting  
F01  
C30  
Feedback  
selection  
[Hz2/Hz1]  
H21  
H25 Feedback filter  
Frequency setting by keypad panel  
#0  
∨
∧
Gain  
Bias  
#4  
#3  
#2  
#7  
[12]  
C31  
C32  
+
+
PID control  
Gain Bias frequency  
Forward/  
Reverse  
operation  
Negative polarity  
prevention  
[C1]  
[V2]  
Operation selection  
F17  
F18  
H20  
H22  
H23  
H24  
+
+
+
Inverse  
Proportional  
Integral  
#1,#2,#3,#6,#7  
#6  
Inverse  
#5  
#1,#5  
+
Option  
Limit signal  
Differential  
Analog input filter  
C33  
[IVS]  
[UP]  
#8,#9  
Limiter processing  
UP/DOWN control  
[DOWN]  
Maximum frequency  
F03  
A01  
#11  
#10  
D/I or pulse train (optional)  
Upper-limit frequency  
F15  
Multistep frequency  
switching  
Pattern operation control C21  
H30  
Jump frequency  
C01  
C12  
C22  
C23  
C24  
C25  
C26  
C27  
C28  
C05  
Set frequency value  
by Link function  
Set  
frequency  
value  
C13  
C14  
C15  
C16  
C17  
C18  
C19  
C02  
C06  
C07  
C08  
C09  
C10  
C11  
C03  
Multistep frequencies 1 to 15  
C04  
JOG frequency  
C20  
Lower-limit frequency  
F16  
[SS1]  
[SS2]  
[SS4]  
[SS8]  
Switching  
command  
[JOG]  
[Hz2/PID]  
note) The numbers marked "#" means the setting value of each functions.  
Frequency setting block diagram  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F07  
F08  
Acceleration time 1  
Deceleration time 1  
F03  
Maximum frequency 1  
‹This function sets the maximum output frequency for  
motor 1.  
‹This is a function for motor 1.  
‹This function sets the acceleration time for the output  
frequency from startup to maximum frequency and the  
deceleration time from maximum frequency to operation  
stop.  
F
0
3
M A X  
H
z
-
1
Setting range G11S: 50 to 400 Hz  
P11S: 50 to 120Hz  
Setting a value higher than the rated value of the device  
to be driven may damage the motor or machine.  
Match the rating of the device.  
F
F
0
0
7
8
A C C  
T
T
I
I
M
M
E
E
1
1
D
E
C
Setting range Acceleration time 1: 0.01 to 3,600 seconds  
Deceleration time 1: 0.01 to 3,600 seconds  
F04  
Base frequency 1  
Acceleration and deceleration times are represented by  
the three most significant digits, thereby the setting of  
three high-order digits can be set.  
‹This function sets the maximum output frequency in the  
constant-torque range of motor or the output  
1
frequency at the rated output voltage. Match the rating  
of the motor.  
‹This is a function for motor 1.  
Set acceleration and deceleration times with respect to  
maximum frequency. The relationship between the set  
frequency value and acceleration/deceleration times is  
as follows:  
F
0
4
B A S  
E
H
z
-
1
Setting range G11S: 25 to 400Hz  
P11S: 25 to 120Hz  
Set frequency = maximum frequency  
The actual operation time matches the set value.  
Note: When the set value of base frequency 1 is higher  
than that of maximum output frequency 1, the output  
voltage does not increase to the rated voltage because  
the maximum frequency limits the output frequency.  
FWD  
STOP  
Maximum frequency  
Output  
Set frequency  
Constant-torque range  
voltage  
F06 Maximum  
output voltage 1  
F05 Rated voltage 1  
Time  
Acceleration time  
Deceleration time  
Set frequency < maximum frequency  
Output frequency  
The actual operation time differs from the set value.  
Acceleration(deceleration) operation time = set value x  
(set frequency/maximum frequency)  
0
F04 Base  
F03 Maximum  
output frequency  
frequency 1  
STOP  
FWD  
F05  
Rated voltage 1  
Maximum frequency  
‹This function sets the rated value of the voltage output  
to motor 1. Note that a voltage greater than the supply  
(input) voltage cannot be output.  
Set frequency  
‹This is a function for motor 1.  
F
0
5
R A T E D  
V
-
1
Time  
Acceleration  
operation time  
Deceleration  
operation time  
Setting range 230 V series: 0, 80 to 240V  
460 V series: 0, 320 to 480V  
Value 0 terminates operation of the voltage regulation  
function, thereby resulting in the output of a voltage  
proportional to the supply voltage.  
Acceleration time  
Deceleration time  
Note: When the set value of rated voltage 1 exceeds  
maximum output voltage 1, the output voltage does not  
increase to the rated voltage because the maximum  
output voltage limits the output voltage.  
Note: If the set acceleration and deceleration times are  
too short even though the resistance torque and moment  
of inertia of the load are great, the torque limiting function  
or stall prevention function becomes activated, thereby  
prolonging the operation time beyond that stated above.  
F06  
Maximum voltage 1  
‹This function sets the maximum value of the voltage  
output for motor 1. Note that a voltage higher than the  
supply (input) voltage cannot be output.  
‹This is a function for motor 1.  
F
0
6
M A X  
V
-
1
Setting range  
230 V series: 80 to 240V  
460 V series: 320 to 480V  
Note: When the set value of rated voltage 1 (F05) to "0",  
this function is invalid.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Constant torque>  
F09  
Torque boost 1  
Output voltage V  
‹This is a function for motor 1. The following can be  
selected:  
Rated voltage 1  
100%  
F
0
9
T
R Q  
B O O S  
T
1
#20.0  
-- Selection of load characteristics such as automatic  
torque boost, square law reduction torque load,  
proportional torque load, constant torque load.  
-- Enhancement of torque (V/f characteristics), which is  
lowered during low-speed operation. Insufficient  
magnetic flux of the motor due to a voltage drop in the  
low-frequency range can be compensated.  
Base  
frequency 1  
#2.0  
10%  
0
Output frequency f  
Note: As a large torque boost value creates overexcitation  
in the low-speed range, continued operation may cause  
the motor to overheating. Check the characteristics of the  
driven motor.  
Setting range  
Characteristics selected  
Automatic torque boost characteristic  
where the torque boost value of a constant  
torque load (a linear change) is  
automatically adjusted.  
0.0  
F10  
F11  
F12  
Electric thermal O/L relay ( select)  
Electric thermal O/L relay (level)  
Electric thermal O/L relay (Thermal time constant)  
The motor tuning (P04 / A13) should be set  
to "2" for this function is valid.  
Square law reduction torque for fan and  
pump loads.  
Proportional torque for middle class loads  
between square law reduction torque and  
constant torque (linear change)  
0.1 to 0.9  
1.0 to 1.9  
The electronic thermal O/L relay manages the output  
frequency, output current, and operation time of the  
inverter to prevent the motor from overheating when  
150% of the set current value flows for the time set by  
F12 (thermal time constant).  
2.0 to 20.0  
Constant torque (linear change)  
‹Torque characteristics(30HP or less)  
<Square law reduction torque> <Proportional torque>  
‹This is a function for motor 1.  
‹This function specifies whether to operate the  
electronic thermal O/L relay and selects the target  
motor. When a general-purpose motor is selected,  
the operation level is lowered in the low speed range  
according to the cooling characteristics of the motor.  
Output voltage V  
Output voltage V  
Rated voltage 1  
Rated voltage 1  
100%  
100%  
F
1
0
E
L
C
T
R N  
O L  
1
Base  
frequency 1  
Base  
frequency 1  
#0.9  
#1.9  
Set value 0: Inactive  
17%  
0
17%  
0
#0.1  
#1.0  
1: Active (for general-purpose motor)  
2: Active (for inverter motor)  
Output frequency f  
Output frequency f  
‹This function sets the operation level (current value) of  
the electronic thermal. Enter a value from 1 to 1.1  
times the current rating value of the motor.  
‹The set value "2" is set for the inverter motor because  
there is no cooling effect decrease by the rotational  
speed.  
<Constant torque>  
Output voltage V  
Rated voltage 1  
100%  
#20.0  
F
1
1
O L  
L
E
V
E
L
1
Base  
frequency 1  
#2.0  
The setting range is 20 to 135% of the rated current of the  
inverter.  
23%  
0
Output frequency f  
(%)  
When F10 = 2  
‹Torque characteristics(40HP or above)  
<Square law reduction torque> <Proportional torque>  
100  
95  
90  
85  
Output voltage V  
Output voltage V  
Rated voltage 1  
Rated voltage 1  
69  
54  
40 to 60HP  
(When F10 = 1)  
100%  
100%  
0.25 to 30HP  
(When F10 = 1)  
fe= fb  
60Hz (fb≥60Hz)  
fb:Base frequency  
(fb<60Hz)  
Base  
frequency 1  
Base  
frequency 1  
#0.9  
#1.9  
18%  
0
18%  
0
#0.1  
#1.0  
Output frequency f  
Output frequency f  
Fe x 0.33  
Fe x 0.83  
fe  
Output frequency f0 (Hz)  
Operation level current and output frequency  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F13  
Electric thermal O/L relay (for breaking resistor)  
(%)  
100  
75HP to 125HP  
90  
85  
This function controls the frequent use and continuous  
operating time of the braking resistor to prevent the  
(When F10 = 1)  
resistor from overheating.  
Related functions:  
U59  
53  
F
1
3
D B R  
O
L
fe= fb  
(fb<60Hz)  
60Hz (fb≥60Hz)  
fb:Base frequency  
Inverter capacity  
Operation  
0: Inactive  
1: Active (built-in braking resistor)  
2: Active  
(DB***-2C/4C external braking resistor)  
G11S: 10HP or less  
Fe x 0.33  
Fe x 0.83  
fe  
Output frequency f0 (Hz)  
Operation level current and output frequency  
0: Inactive  
P11S: 15HP or less  
2: Active  
(DB***-2C/4C external braking resistor)  
(%)  
100  
150HP or above  
G11S: 15HP or more  
P11S: 20HP or more  
0: Inactive  
90  
85  
‹When the setting value is selected to "2", the type of  
braking resistor and connection circuit are set by U59.  
The details are referred to the function : U59.  
(When F10 = 1)  
53  
fe= fb  
(fb<60Hz)  
60Hz (fb≥60Hz)  
fb:Base frequency  
Fe x 0.33  
Fe x 0.83  
fe  
Output frequency f0 (Hz)  
Operation level current and output frequency  
‹The time from when 150% of the operation level  
current flows continuously to when he electronic  
thermal O/L relay activates can be set.  
The setting range is 0.5 to 75.0 minutes (in 0.1  
minute steps).  
F
1
2
T
I
M E  
C N  
S
T
1
Current-Operation time Characteristics  
20  
15  
10  
5
changed by F12  
F12=10  
F12=5  
F12=0.5  
0
0
50  
100  
150  
200  
(output current/operation level current)  
x 100(%)  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F14  
Restart mode after momentary power failure  
‹This function selects operation if a momentary power failure occurs.  
The function for detecting power failure and activating protective operation (i.e., alarm output, alarm display, inverter  
output cutoff) for undervoltage can be selected. The automatic restart function (for automatically restarting a coasting  
motor without stopping) when the supply voltage is recovered can also be selected.  
‹When setting value is selected "2" or "3", both integration constant and the proportional constant during operation  
ride-though can be adjusted by the function code : U23 and U24. The details are referred to the function code : U23 and  
U24.  
Related functions:  
F
1
4
R
E
S
T
A R  
T
U23, U24  
Setting range: 0 to 5  
The following table lists the function details.  
Set  
Function name  
value  
Operation at power failure  
Operation at power recovery  
Inactive  
(immediate inverter trip)  
If undervoltage is detected, the drive will immediately trip and The drive operation is not automatically  
an undervoltage fault (LU) is displayed. The drive output restarted. Input reset command and  
stops and the motor will coast to a stop. operation command to restart operation.  
０
a
Inactive  
(inverter trip at recovery)  
If undervoltage is detected, the drive output stops and the An undervoltage fault (LU) is activated at  
motor will immediately coast to a stop. A drive fault is not power recovery. Drive operation is not  
１
activated  
automatically restarted. Input  
command to restart operation.  
a
reset  
Inactive  
(inverter  
When the DC bus voltage reaches the continue operation The drive operation is not automatically  
voltage level (H15), a controlled deceleration to a stop occurs. restarted. Input reset command and  
deceleration to a stop at The inverter collects the inertia energy of the load to maintain operation command to restart operation.  
２
trip  
after  
a
power failure) Note1  
the DC bus voltage and controls the motor until it stops, then  
an undervoltage fault (LU) is activated.  
The drive will automatically decrease the deceleration time if  
necessary. If the amount of inertia energy from the load is  
small, and the undervoltage level is achieved before the motor  
stops, the undervoltage fault is immediately activated and the  
motor will coast to a stop.  
Active  
When the DC bus voltage reaches the continue operation Operation is automatically restarted.  
３
(operation ride through, voltage level (H15), energy is collected from the inertia of the For power recovery during ride-through the  
for high-inertia loads) Note1 load to maintain the DC bus voltage and extend the ride drive will accelerate directly to the original  
through time. The drive will automatically adjust the frequency. If undervoltage is detected,  
deceleration rate to maintain DC bus voltage level. If operation automatically restarts with the  
undervoltage is detected, the protective function is not frequency at the time that the undervoltage  
activated, but drive output stops and the motor coast to a stop. is detected.  
Active  
(restart  
frequency  
failure) Note1  
Active  
If undervoltage is detected, the protective function is not Operation is automatically restarted with  
the activated. The drive output stops and the motor will coast to a the frequency at power failure.  
power stop.  
４
５
with  
at  
If undervoltage is detected, the protective function is not Operation is automatically restarted with  
(restart with the start activated, but output stops.  
frequency, for low-inertia  
the frequency set by F23, "Starting  
frequency."  
loads) Note1  
Note1) When the function code H18(Torque control) is excluding "0" and Motor 1 is selected, the inverter will trip at power  
recovery if function code F14 is set to between "2" and "5". This operation is same as F14 is set to "1".  
Function codes H13 to H16 are provided to control a restarting operation after momentary power failure. These functions  
should be understood and used. The pick-up (speed search) function can also be selected as a method of restarting when  
power is recovered following a momentary failure. (For setting details, see function code H09.)  
The pick-up function searches for the speed of the coasting motor to restart the motor without subjecting it to excessive shock.  
In a high-inertia system, the reduction in motor speed is minimal even when the motor is coasting. A speed searching time is  
required when the pick-up function is active. In such a case, the original frequency may be recovered sooner when the function  
is inactive and the operation restarted with the frequency prior to the momentary power failure.  
The pick-up function works in the range of 5 to 100 Hz. If the detected speed is outside this range, restart the motor using the  
regular restart function.  
• Automatically restart could be provided at power recovered, if "Restart mode after  
momentary power failure" is valid.  
WARNING  
• The machine should be designed to securing the human safe even restarting.  
Accident may result.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power failure  
H15  
Power recovery  
Power failure  
Power recovery  
Set value : 3  
Operation continuation level  
Set value : 0  
Main circuit DC  
voltage  
Main circuit DC  
voltage  
Under voltage  
Time  
Output  
frequency  
Output  
frequency  
(motor speed)  
LV trip  
ON  
LV trip  
Output  
(terminals  
Y1 to Y5)  
Set value : 1  
Main circuit DC  
voltage  
Under voltage  
Set value : 4  
Time  
Main circuit DC  
voltage  
Output  
frequency  
Under voltage  
LV trip  
ON  
Synchroni-  
zation  
H13:Waiting time  
Output  
frequency  
H15  
Operation continuation level  
Set value : 2  
(motor speed)  
Main circuit DC  
voltage  
Acceleration  
LV trip  
Output  
(terminals  
Y1 to Y5)  
ON  
Time  
Output  
frequency  
Set value : 5  
Main circuit DC  
voltage  
Under voltage  
LV trip  
ON  
Output  
frequency  
H13:Waiting time  
(motor speed)  
LV trip  
Output  
(terminals  
Y1 to Y5)  
Note : Dotted-dashed lines indicate motor speed.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F15  
F16  
Frequency limiter  
Frequency limiter  
(High)  
(Low)  
F18  
Bias frequency  
‹This function adds a bias frequency to the set  
frequency value to analog input.  
‹This function sets the upper and lower limits for the  
setting frequency .  
F
1
8
F
R
E Q  
B
I
A S  
F
F
1
1
5
6
H
L
L
L
I
I
M
M
I
I
T
T
E
E
R
R
Setting range G11S: -400.0 to +400.0Hz  
P11S: -120.0 to +120.0Hz  
The operation follows the figure below.  
Setting range G11S: 0 to 400Hz  
P11S: 0 to 120Hz  
When the bias frequency is higher than the maximum  
frequency or lower than the - maximum frequency, it is  
limited to the maximum or - maximum frequency.  
Set frequency  
Bias frequency  
(when positive)  
Set frequency value  
+ Maximum frequency  
+Maximum  
frequency  
Upper limit value  
-100%  
Lower limit value  
Lower limit value  
+100%  
Analog input  
+10V terminal 12  
20mA terminal C1  
-10  
0
+10[V]  
20[mA]  
Upper limit value  
Set frequency  
4
Bias frequency  
(when negative)  
- Maximum frequency  
-Maximum  
frequency  
※ The inverter output starts with the start frequency when  
operation begins, and stops with the stop frequency  
when operation ends.  
※ If the upper limit value is less than the lower limit value,  
the upper limit value overrides the lower limit value.  
※ When lower limit value is set, the inverter operates with  
lower limit value at operation command is "ON" even  
frequency command is zero(0Hz).  
※ Reversible operation is valid if the function code  
F01/C30 is set to "4" or "5" only.  
※ This function is invalid if PID control is selected(H20 is  
"1" or "2").  
F20  
F21  
F22  
DC brake  
DC brake  
DC brake  
(starting frequency)  
(Braking level)  
F17  
Gain  
(Braking time)  
‹This function sets the rate of the set frequency value  
to analog input.  
‹Starting frequency: This function sets the frequency  
with which to start a DC injection brake to decelerate  
the motor to a stop.  
F
1
7
F
R
E Q  
G A  
I
N
Operation follows the figure below.  
Set frequency value  
F
2
0
D C  
B R K  
H
z
Setting range: 0 to 60Hz  
‹Operation level: This function sets the output current  
level when a DC injection brake is applied. Set a  
percentage of inverter rated output current in 1% steps.  
200%  
100%  
50%  
+Maximum  
frequency  
F
2
1
D
C
B R K  
L
V
L
Setting range G11S: 0 to 100%  
P11S: 0 to 80%  
‹Time: This function sets the time of a DC injection  
brake operation.  
Analog input  
+10V terminal 12  
20mA terminal C1  
-10  
0
+10[V]  
F
2
2
D C  
B R K  
t
4
20［mA］  
Setting range 0.0: Inactive  
0.1 to 30.0 seconds  
CAUTION  
Do not use the inverter brake function for  
mechanical holding.  
-Maximum  
frequency  
Injury may result.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting frequency  
Start frequency  
(frequency)  
F27  
Motor sound  
(sound tone)  
F23  
F24  
F25  
(Holding time)  
‹The tone of motor noise can be altered when the carrier  
frequency is 7kHz or lower. Use this function as  
required.  
Stop frequency  
The starting frequency can be set to reserve the torque at  
startup and can be sustained until the magnetic flux of the  
motor is being established.  
F
2
7
M T  
R
T
O N  
E
Setting range: 0 , 1, 2 , 3  
‹Frequency: This function sets the frequency at startup.  
F30  
F31  
FMA (voltage adjust)  
FMA (function)  
F
2
3
S
T
A R  
T
H z  
Setting range: 0.1 to 60Hz  
Monitor data (e.g.,output frequency, output current) can  
be output to terminal FMA as a DC voltage. The amplitude  
of the output can also be adjusted.  
‹This function adjusts the voltage value of the monitor  
item selected in F31 when the monitor amount is 100%.  
A value from 0 to 200 (%) can be set in 1% steps.  
‹Holding time: This function sets the holding time  
during which the start frequency is sustained at startup.  
F
2
4
H O  
L
D
I
N G  
t
Set values: 0.1 to 10.0 seconds  
F
3
0
F M A  
V
-
A
D
J
∗The holding time does not apply at the time of switching  
between forward and reverse.  
Setting range: 0 to 200%  
∗The holding time is not included in the acceleration time.  
∗The holding time also applies when pattern operation  
(C21) is selected. The holding time is included in the  
timer value.  
F30:200%  
F30:100%  
Higher than 10V  
10V  
‹This function sets the frequency at stop.  
F30:50%  
F30:0%  
5V  
F
2
5
S
T O P  
H
z
Setting range: 0.0 to 60.0Hz  
Output frequency  
Forward rotation  
50%  
100%  
‹This function selects the monitor item to be output to  
Holding time  
terminal FMA.  
F
3
1
F
M A  
F
U N  
C
Starting frequency  
Stopping frequency  
Set  
value  
0
Monitor item  
Output frequency 1  
Definition of 100% monitor amount  
Time  
Maximum output frequency  
(before slip compensation)  
The operation does not start when the starting frequency  
is less than the stopping frequency or when the setting  
frequency is less than the stopping frequency.  
1
2
3
Output frequency 2  
(after slip compensation)  
Output current  
Maximum output frequency  
Rated output current of  
inverter x 2  
230V series: 250V  
460V series: 500V  
Rated torque of motor x 2  
F26  
Motor sound  
(carrier frequency)  
Output voltage  
‹This function adjusts the carrier frequency, correct  
adjustment of which prevents resonance with the  
machine system, reduces motor and inverter noise, and  
also reduces leakage current from output circuit wiring.  
4
5
6
Output torque  
Load rate  
Power consumption  
Rated load of motor x 2  
Rated output of inverter x 2  
F
2
6
M T R  
S O U N D  
7
8
PID feedback amount  
PG feedback amount Synchronous  
(only when option is installed) maximum frequency  
Feedback amount of 100%  
Nominal applied motor  
75HP or less  
100HP or more  
30HP or less  
40HP to 100HP  
125HP or more  
Setting range  
0.75 to 15kHz  
0.75 to 10kHz  
0.75 to 15kHz  
0.75 to 10kHz  
0.75 to 6kHz  
speed  
at  
G11  
P11  
9
DC link circuit voltage  
Universal AO  
230V series: 500V  
460V series: 1,000V  
10  
0
to 10V output  
through  
communication and not related to  
inverter operation.  
※The power consumption shows "0" during regenerative load.  
Carrier frequency  
Motor noise  
Low  
High  
High  
Low  
Output current waveform  
Leakage current  
Noise occurrence  
Bad  
Small amount  
Extremely low  
Good  
Large amount  
High  
Notes:  
1. Reducing the set value adversely affects the output  
current waveform (i.e., higher harmonics), increases motor  
loss, and raises motor temperature. For example, at  
0.75kHz, reduce the motor torque by about15%.  
2 Increasing the set value increases inverter loss and raises  
inverter temperature.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F33  
F34  
F35  
FMP  
FMP  
(pulse rate)  
F36  
30Ry operation mode  
‹This function specifies whether to activate (excite) the  
alarm output relay (30Ry) for any fault at normal or  
alarm status.  
(voltage adjust)  
FMP terminal  
(function)  
F
3
6
3
0
R
Y
M O  
D
E
Monitor data (e.g.,output frequency, output current) can  
be output to terminal FMP as pulse voltage. Monitor  
data can also be sent to an analog meter as average  
voltage.  
When sending data to a digital counter or other instrument  
as pulse output, set the pulse rate in F33 to any value and  
the voltage in F34 to 0%.  
When data is sent to an analog meter or other instrument  
as average voltage, the voltage value set in F34  
determines the average voltage and the pulse rate in F33  
is fixed to 2670 (p/s).  
Set  
value  
Operation  
At normal 30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON  
At abnormal 30A - 30C: ON, 30B - 30C:OFF  
At normal 30A - 30C:ON, 30B - 30C: OFF  
At abnormal 30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON  
0
1
‹When the set value is 1, contacts 30A and 30C are  
connected when the inverter control voltage is  
established (about one second after power on).  
‹When the power is off, contacts 30A and 30C are OFF;  
30B and 30C are ON.  
‹This function sets the pulse frequency of the monitor  
item selected in F35 within a range of 300 to 6000 (p/s)  
in 1 p/s steps.  
30  
30A  
F
3
3
F M P  
P
U
L
S
E S  
30B  
30C  
Setting range: 300 to 6,000 p/s  
T1  
About 15.6V  
F40  
F41  
Torque limiter 1  
Torque limiter 1  
(driving)  
(braking)  
0V  
T
VL:0.5VMAX  
‹The torque limit operation calculates motor torque from  
the output voltage, current and the primary resistance  
value of the motor, and controls the frequency so the  
calculated value does not exceed the limit. This  
operation enables the inverter to continue operation  
under the limit even if a sudden change in load torque  
occurs.  
‹Select limit values for the driving torque and braking  
torque.  
‹When this function is activated, acceleration and  
deceleration operation times are longer than the set  
values.  
Pulse cycle time  
Pulse frequency (p/s) = 1/T  
Duty (%) = T1/T x 100  
Average voltage (V) = 15.6 x T1/T  
The output terminal of the FMP terminal is composed of  
the transistor, therefore there is a saturation voltage  
(0.5VMAX). When using in the analogue by the filter  
processing the pulse voltage, it should be make a 0V  
adjustment by external equipment.  
‹The motor tuning (P04 / A13) should be set to "2" for  
this function is valid.  
‹The increase frequency upper bound during torque limit  
operation is set by function code : U01.  
‹This function sets the average voltage of pulse output to  
terminal FMP.  
F
3
4
F M P  
V
-
A
D
J
Setting range  
0%:  
‹When the setting value is selected "0" (prevent OU trip),  
the operation mode is selected by function code : U60.  
The details are referred to the functions : U01, U60.  
The pulse rate varies depending on the  
monitor amount of the monitor item  
selected in F35. (The maximum value is  
the value set in F33. The pulse duty is fixed  
at 50%.)  
Related functions:  
U01, U60  
1 to 200%: Pulse rate is fixed at 2,670 p/s. The  
average voltage of the monitor item  
selected in F35 when the monitor amount is  
100% is adjusted in the 1 to 200% range  
(1% steps).  
F
F
4
4
0
1
D R  
B R K  
V
T
T
R Q  
R Q  
1
1
(The pulse duty varies.)  
‹This function selects the monitor item to be output to  
Function  
Torque  
limit  
Setting range  
G11S:20% to 200%  
P11S:20% to 150%  
Operation  
The torque is limited to the set  
value.  
terminal FMP.  
F
3
5
F M P  
F
U N  
C
(driving)  
The set value and monitor items are the same as those  
of F31.  
999  
Torque limiting inactive  
Torque  
limit  
G11S:20% to 200%  
P11S:20% to 150%  
The torque is limited to the set  
value.  
(braking)  
0
Prevents OU trip due to  
power regeneration effect  
automatically.  
999  
Torque limiting inactive  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
When the torque limit function is selected, an operation  
may not match the set acceleration and deceleration time  
or set speed. The machine should be so designed that  
safety is ensured even when operation does not match  
set values.  
Accident may result.  
WARNING  
The frequency may be stagnated / not decelerate when  
using the automatically OU trip prevention and set the  
frequency limit(Low) to the setting frequency or less.  
Accident may result.  
Torque vector control 1  
F42  
‹This is a function for motor 1.  
‹To obtain the motor torque most efficiently, the torque  
vector control calculates torque according to load, to  
adjust the voltage and current vectors to optimum  
values based on the calculated value.  
Related functions:  
P01, P09  
F
4
2
T
R Q V  
E
C
T
O R  
1
Set value  
Operation  
Inactive  
Active  
0
1
‹When 1 (Active) is set, the set values of the following  
functions differ from the written values:  
c F09 Torque boost 1  
Automatically set to 0.0 (automatic torque boosting).  
d P09 Slip compensation amount Slip compensation is  
automatically activated.  
When 0.0 is set, the amount of slip compensation for  
the FUJI standard 3-phase motor is applied. Otherwise,  
the written value is applied.  
‹Use the torque vector control function under the  
following conditions:  
c There must be only one motor.  
Connection of two or more motors makes accurate  
control difficult.  
dThe function data (rated current P03, no-load current  
P06, %R1 P07, and %X P08) of motor 1 must be  
correct.  
When the standard FUJI 3-phase motor is used, setting  
the capacity (function P02) ensures entry of the above  
data. An auto tuning operation should be performed for  
other motors.  
eThe rated current of the motor must not be significantly  
less than the rated current of the inverter. A motor two  
ranks lower in capacity than the nominal applied motor  
for the inverter should be used at the smallest  
(depending on the model).  
fTo prevent leakage current and ensure accurate control,  
the length of the cable between the inverter and motor  
should not exceed 164ft(50m).  
gWhen a reactor is connected between the inverter and  
the motor and the impedance of the wiring cannot be  
disregarded, use P04, "Auto tuning," to rewrite data.  
If these conditions are not satisfied, set 0 (Inactive).  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E:Extension Terminal Functions  
E01  
Multistep frequency selection [SS1][SS2][SS4][SS8]  
X1 Terminal function  
～
～
The frequency can be switched to a preset frequency in  
function codes C05 to C19 by switching the external digital  
input signal. Assign values 0 to 3 to the target digital input  
terminal. The combination of input signals determines the  
frequency.  
E09  
X9 Terminal function  
‹Each function of digital input terminals X1 to X9 can be  
set as codes.  
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
U N C  
U N C  
U N C  
U N C  
U N C  
U N C  
U N C  
U N C  
U N C  
Combination of set  
value input signals  
Frequency selected  
3
2
1
0
[SS8] [SS4] [SS2] [SS1]  
off off off off  
off off off on  
off off on off  
off off on on  
off on off off  
off on off on  
off on on off  
off on on on  
on off off off  
on off off on  
on off on off  
on off on on  
on on off off  
on on off on  
on on on off  
on on on on  
Assigned by F01 or C30  
C05 MULTI Hz-1  
C06 MULTI Hz-2  
C07 MULTI Hz-3  
C08 MULTI Hz-4  
C09 MULTI Hz-5  
C10 MULTI Hz-6  
Related function  
C05 to C19  
Setting range  
C11 MULTI Hz-7  
C12 MULTI Hz-8  
C13 MULTI Hz-9  
C14 MULTI Hz-10  
C15 MULTI Hz-11  
C16 MULTI Hz-12  
C17 MULTI Hz-13  
C18 MULTI Hz-14  
C19 MULTI Hz-15  
Set value  
Function  
Multistep frequency selection (1 to 15 steps) [SS1],[SS2],[SS4],[SS8]  
Acceleration and deceleration time selection (3 steps) [RT1],[RT2]  
Self-hold selection [HLD]  
0,1,2,3  
4,5  
6
G11S:0.00 to 400.00Hz  
P11S:0.00 to 120.00Hz  
Coast-to-stop command [BX]  
7
8
9
Alarm reset [RST]  
External alarm [THR]  
Jogging [JOG]  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
Frequency setting 2/frequency setting 1 [Hz2/Hz1]  
Motor 2/motor 1 [M2/M1]  
Acceleration and deceleration time selection [RT1][RT2]  
DC injection brake command [DCBRK]  
Torque limit 2/torque limit 1 [TL2/TL1]  
Switching operation from line to inverter (50Hz) [SW50]  
Switching operation from line to inverter (60Hz) [SW60]  
UP command [UP]  
The acceleration and deceleration time can be switched to  
a preset time in function codes E10 to E15 by switching the  
external digital input signal. Assign values 4 and 5 to the  
target digital input terminal. The combination of input  
signals determines the acceleration and deceleration times.  
Combination of  
set value input  
signals  
DOWN command [DOWN]  
Edit permission command (data change permission) [WE-KP]  
PID control cancellation [Hz/PID]  
Acceleration and deceleration times selected  
Forward/inverse switching (terminals 12 and C1) [IVS]  
Interlock (52-2) [IL]  
5
[RT2]  
4
[RT1]  
Torque control cancellation [Hz/TRQ]  
Link operation selection (Standard:RS-485, Option: BUS) [LE]  
Universal DI [U-DI]  
F07 ACC TIME1  
F08 DEC TIME1  
E10 ACC TIME2  
E11 DEC TIME2  
E12 ACC TIME3  
E13 DEC TIME3  
off  
off  
on  
on  
off  
on  
off  
on  
Setting range  
0.01 to 3600s  
Start characteristics selection [STM]  
PG-SY enable ( Option ) [PG/Hz]  
Related function  
F07～F08  
E10～E15  
Synchronization command ( Option ) [SYC]  
Zero speed command with PG option [ZERO]  
Forced stop command [STOP1]  
E14 ACC TIME4  
E15 DEC TIME4  
Forced stop command with Deceleration time 4 [STOP2]  
Pre-exiting command with PG option [EXITE]  
Line speed control Cancellation [Hz/LSC]  
Line speed frequency memory [LSC-HLD]  
Frequency setting 1 / Frequency setting 2 [Hz1/Hz2]  
3-wire operation stop command [HLD]  
This selection is used for 3-wire operation. The FWD or  
REV signal is self-held when [HLD] is on, and the self-hold  
is cleared when [HLD] is turned off. To use this [HLD]  
terminal function, assign 6 to the target digital input  
terminal.  
Note: Data numbers which are not set in the functions  
from E01 to E09, are assumed to be inactive.  
Forward  
rotation  
Reverse  
rotation  
Ignore  
ON  
ON  
FWD  
REV  
HLD  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Coast-to-stop command [BX]  
WARNING  
When BX and P24 are connected, inverter output is cut off  
immediately and the motor starts to coast-to-stop. An  
alarm signal is neither output nor self-held. If BX and  
P24 are disconnected when the operation command  
(FWD or REV) is on, operation starts at the start  
frequency. To use this BX terminal function, assign value  
"7" to the target digital input terminal.  
- When the JOG command and operation command  
(FWD/REV) are input at the same time, it can NOT be  
changed to the JOG operation. It operates with setting  
frequency.  
- When the JOG operation is used, it should be input the  
operation command after input the JOG command during  
the inverter is STOP.  
- When the JOG command and operation command are  
input at the same time, the JOG command is assigned to  
the "Multistep frequency selection (SS1 to SS8)" and used  
it.  
Forward  
rotation  
Forward  
rotation  
Forward  
rotation  
Output  
Frequency  
Ignored  
- The inverter can NOT be stopped and JOG operation is  
continued even JOG command is OFF during JOG  
operation. The inverter is deceleration to a stop if the  
operation command is OFF.  
ON  
ON  
ON  
FWD  
ON  
ON  
REV  
BX  
Accident may result.  
Alarm reset [RST]  
Frequency setting 2/frequency setting 1 [Hz1/Hz2]  
When an inverter trip occurs, connecting RST and P24  
clears the alarm output (for any fault) ; disconnecting  
them clears trip indication and restarts operation. To  
use this RST terminal function, assign value "8" to the  
target digital input terminal.  
This function switches the frequency setting method set in  
function codes F01 and C30 by an external digital input  
signal.  
Set value input signal  
Frequency setting method selected  
11  
External fault [THR]  
F01 FREQ CMD1  
C30 FREQ CMD2  
off  
on  
Disconnecting THR and P24 during operation cuts off  
inverter output (i.e., motor starts to coast-to-stop) and  
outputs alarm OH2, which is self-held internally and  
cleared by RST input. This function is used to protect an  
external brake resistor and other components from  
overheating. To use this THR terminal function, assign  
value "9" to the target digital input terminal. ON input is  
assumed when this terminal function is not set.  
Note: It can not be used with set value "35"  
simultaneously. When the set value "11" and "35" are  
selected, "Er6" is displayed.  
Motor 2/motor 1 [M1/M2]  
This function switches motor constants using an external  
digital input signal.  
Jogging operation[JOG]  
This input is effective only when the operation command  
to the inverter is off and operation has stopped and does  
not apply to the operation at 0Hz.  
This function is used for jogging (inching) operation to  
position a work piece.  
When JOG and P24 are  
connected, the operation is performed with the jogging  
frequency set in function code C20 while the operation  
command (FWD-P24 or REV-P24) is on. To use this  
JOG terminal function, assign value "10" to the target  
digital input terminal.  
Set value input signal  
Related function  
Motor selected  
12  
A01～A18  
Note: It is possible to change to the JOG operation by  
keypad panel when keypad panel operation.  
Motor 1  
Motor 2  
off  
on  
JOG  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
DC brake command [DCBRK]  
Input  
When the external digital input signal is on, DC injection  
braking starts when the inverter's output frequency drops  
below the frequency preset in function code F20 after the  
operation command goes off. (The operation command  
STOP  
Operation  
command  
(FWD/REV)  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
STOP  
OFF  
STOP  
OFF  
STOP  
OFF  
STOP  
RUN  
RUN  
RUN  
RUN  
goes off when the  
key is pressed at keypad panel  
Operation  
mode  
JOG  
JOG  
NOR.  
OPR.  
NOR.  
OPR.  
operation and when both terminals FWD and REV go on  
or off at terminal block operation.) The DC injection  
braking continues while the digital input signal is on. In  
this case, the longer time of the following is selected:  
OPR.  
OPR.  
-
-
The time set in function code F22.  
The time which the input signal is set on.  
Set value input signal  
Operation selected  
13  
off  
on  
No DC injection brake command is given.  
A DC injection brake command is given.  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Combination of set  
value input signals  
Function selected  
(when operation command is on)  
Torque limit 2/torque limit 1 [TL2/TL1]  
This function switches the torque limit value set in  
function codes F40 and F41, and E16 and E17 by an  
external digital input signal.  
18  
off  
off  
17  
off  
on  
Holds the output frequency.  
Increases the output frequency  
according to the acceleration time.  
Decreases the output frequency  
according to the deceleration time.  
Holds the output frequency.  
Set value input signal  
Related function  
Torque limit  
value selected  
14  
on  
off  
F40～F41  
E16～E17  
on  
on  
F40 DRV TRQ1  
F41 BRK TRQ1  
E16 DRV TRQ2  
E17 BRK TRQ2  
There are the two types of UP/DOWN operations as  
shown below. Set the desired type by setting the  
frequency (F01 or C30).  
‹The data "8: UP/DOWN 1" is valid only when the Motor  
2 is selected.  
Setting range  
DRV 20 to 200% ,999  
BRK 0, 20 to 200% ,999  
off  
on  
Switching operation between line and inverter (50Hz) [SW50]  
Frequency  
setting  
(F01 or C30)  
Initial value  
at power  
input on  
Operation command reentry  
during deceleration  
Motor operation can be switched from 50Hz commercial  
power operation to inverter operation without stopping the  
motor by switching the external digital input signal.  
Operates at the frequency at reentry.  
Frequency  
Set value  
input signal  
Function  
8
0Hz  
15  
(UP/DOWN1)  
FWD  
ON  
Inverter operation to line operation (50Hz)  
Line operation to inverter operation (50Hz)  
off→on  
on→off  
(REV)  
OFF  
Switching operation between line and inverter (60Hz) [SW60]  
Returns to the frequency before  
deceleration  
Motor operation can be switched from 60Hz commercial  
power operation to inverter operation without stopping the  
motor by switching the external digital input signal.  
Frequency  
9
Previous  
(UP/DOWN2)  
frequency  
FWD  
(REV)  
ON  
Set value  
input signal  
OFF  
Function  
16  
Inverter operation to line operation (60Hz)  
Line operation to inverter operation (60Hz)  
off→on  
on→off  
Write enable for KEYPAD [WE-KP]  
‹When the digital input signal goes off, 50 or 60 Hz is  
output according to the set value input signal after the  
restart waiting time following a momentary power failure  
(function code H13). The motor is then directed to  
inverter operation.  
This function allows the data to be changed only when an  
external signal is being input, thereby making it difficult to  
change the data.  
Function selected  
Inhibit data changes.  
Allow data changes.  
19  
off  
on  
WARNING  
Note:  
- After the LU(Low Voltage) trip is occurred and reset it,  
the inverter will automatically restart because the  
operation command is kept by internal sequence.  
Accident may result.  
If a terminal is set to value 19, the data becomes unable  
to be changed. To change the data, turn on the terminal  
and change the terminal setting to another number.  
PID control cancel [Hz/PID]  
UP command [UP]/DOWN command [DOWN]  
The PID control can be disabled by an external digital  
input signal.  
When an operation command is input (on), the output  
frequency can be increased or decreased by an external  
digital input signal.  
The change ranges from 0 to maximum frequency.  
Operation in the opposite direction of the operation  
command is not allowed.  
Set value  
input signal  
Related function  
Function selected  
H20～H25  
20  
off  
Enable PID control.  
Related function Related function  
Disable PID control  
(frequency setting from keypad panel).  
on  
F01, C30  
E01～E09  
(set value: 11, 35)  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Link enable (RS-485 standard, BUS) [LE]  
Inverse mode changeover [IVS]  
The analog input (terminals 12 and C1) can be switched  
between forward and inverse operations by an external  
digital input signal.  
Frequency and operation commands from the link can be  
enabled or disabled by switching the external digital input  
signal.  
Select the command source in H30, "Link  
function." Assign value "24" to the target digital input  
terminal and enable or disable commands in this input  
signal state.  
Set value  
input signal Function selected  
Related function  
F01, C30  
21  
Forward operation when forward  
operation is set and vice versa  
Inverse operation when forward  
operation is set and vice versa  
Set value  
input signal  
off  
Related function  
Function selected  
H30  
on  
24  
off  
on  
Link command disabled.  
Link command enabled.  
‹This function is invalid when the PID control is  
selected(H20: 1 or 2).  
Universal DI (U-DI)  
Interlock signal (52-2) [IL]  
When a contactor is installed on the output side of the  
inverter, the contactor opens at the time of a momentary  
power failure, which hinders the reduction of the DC  
circuit voltage and may prevent the detection of a power  
failure and the correct restart operation when power is  
recovered. The restart operation at momentary power  
failure can be performed effectively with power failure  
information provided by an external digital input signal.  
Assigning value "25" to a digital input terminal renders the  
terminal a universal DI terminal. The ON/OFF state of  
signal input to this terminal can be checked through the  
RS-485 and BUS option.  
This input terminal is only used to check for an incoming  
input signal through communication and does not affect  
inverter operation.  
Pick up start mode [STM]  
The start characteristics function (pick-up mode) in  
function code H09 can be enabled or disabled by  
switching the external digital input signal. Assign value  
"26" to the target digital input terminal and enable or  
disable the function in this input signal state.  
Set value  
input signal  
Related function  
Function selected  
F14  
22  
off  
No momentary power failure detection  
operation by digital input  
Momentary power failure detection  
operation by digital input  
Set value  
input signal  
on  
Related function  
Function selected  
H09  
26  
off  
on  
Torque control cancel [Hz/TRQ]  
Start characteristic function disabled  
Start characteristic function enabled  
When function code H18 (torque control function  
selection) is set to be active (value 1 or 2), this operation  
can be canceled externally  
PG-SY enable ( Option ) [PG/Hz]  
Assign value "23" to the target digital input terminal and  
switch between operation and no operation in this input  
signal state.  
Zero speed command with PG option [ZERO]  
Pre-exiting command with PG option [EXITE]  
Set value  
input signal Function selected  
Related function  
H18  
These functions are used for PG-Option or  
SY-Option card. Refer to each instruction manual.  
23  
Forced stop command with Deceleration [STOP1]  
Torque control function active  
Forced stop command with Deceleration time 4 [STOP2]  
The input voltage to terminal 12 is the  
torque command value.  
off  
on  
Normally this terminal should be “ON”, when this terminal  
goes off during motor running, the motor decelerates to  
stop, and outputs alarm “Er6 “. When the inverter is stop  
by STOP1/STOP2 signal, the signal should be kept on  
4ms or longer.  
Torque control function inactive  
The input voltage to terminal 12 is the  
frequency command value.  
PID feedback amount when PID control  
operation is selected (H20 = 1 or 2).  
In case of terminal [STOP2], the deceleration time is  
determined by E15( DEC TIME4).  
This function is prioritized under any operation (Terminal.  
Keypad, Communication...operation). However when the  
torque limiter/regeneration avoidance at deceleration is  
selected, the time which is set by deceleration time may  
be longer.  
WARNING  
- The motor speed may be changed quickly when the  
"Torque control cancel" is changed to ON or OFF  
because of changing the control.  
In case of [STOP2],  
time is fixed by E15  
(EDC TIME4)  
Accident may result.  
Output  
Frequency  
FWD or REV  
ON  
ON  
ON  
[STOP1] or  
[STOP2]  
ON  
Er6  
Alarm  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Related functions  
E01 to E09  
(Set values:14)  
Line speed control Cancellation [Hz/LSC]  
Line speed frequency memory [LSC-HLD]  
‹These functions are used for OPC-G11S-PG / PG2  
and PGA. Refer to each instruction manual.  
E
E
E
E
E
E
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
A C C  
E C  
A C C  
E C  
A C C  
E C  
T
T
T
T
T
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
M
M
M
M
M
M
E
E
E
E
E
E
2
D
2
3
3
4
4
Frequency setting 1 / Frequency setting 2 [Hz1/Hz2]  
D
‹This function switches the frequency setting method  
set in function codes F01 and C30 by an external  
digital input signal.  
D
This is the reverse-logic of setting value  
‹Example: When 4 and 5 are set to terminals X2 and X3:  
"11"(Frequency setting 2/Frequency setting  
[Hz2/Hz1]).  
1
Operation  
FWD  
Time  
ON  
Set value input signal  
(REV)  
Frequency setting method selected  
35  
ON  
C30 FREQ CMD2  
F01 FREQ CMD1  
off  
on  
X2  
ON  
Note: It can not be used with set value "11"  
simultaneously. When the set value "11" and "35" are  
selected, "Er6" is displayed.  
X3  
P24  
Maximum  
frequency  
Output  
frequency  
Settings when shipped from the factory  
Digital  
input  
Setting at factory shipment  
Description  
Accel Decel Accel Decel Accel Decel Accel  
Decel  
time  
4
Set  
value  
time  
1
time  
1
time  
2
time  
2
time  
3
time  
3
time  
4
Terminal X1  
Terminal X2  
Terminal X3  
Terminal X4  
Terminal X5  
Terminal X6  
Terminal X7  
Terminal X8  
Terminal X9  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Multistep frequency selection [SS1]  
Multistep frequency selection [SS2]  
Multistep frequency selection [SS4]  
Multistep frequency selection [SS8]  
Acceleration and deceleration selection [RT1]  
Acceleration and deceleration selection [RT2]  
Self-hold selection [HLD]  
Torque limiter 2 (driving)  
Torque limiter 2 (braking)  
E16  
E17  
‹This function is used to switch the torque limit level set  
in F40 and F41 by an external control signal. Input an  
external signal by selecting any of the control input  
terminals (X1 to X9) as torque limit 2/torque limit 1  
(value 14) in E01 to E09.  
Coast-to-stop command [BX]  
Alarm reset [RST]  
‹The motor tuning (P04 / A13) should be set to "2" for  
this function is valid.  
‹Maximum compensation frequency during braking torque limit  
E10  
E11  
E12  
E13  
E14  
E15  
Acceleration time 2  
Deceleration time 2  
Acceleration time 3  
Deceleration time 3  
Acceleration time 4  
Deceleration time 4  
is set by U01.  
Related functions  
U01  
U60  
‹The operation mode is set by U60 when the setting  
value is "0%: Regeneration avoidance at deceleration".  
The detail is referred to the U01, U60.  
Related functions  
E01～E09  
(Set value: 14)  
‹Acceleration time 1 (F07) and deceleration time 1 (F08)  
as well as three other types of acceleration and  
deceleration time can be selected.  
‹The operation and setting ranges are the same as those  
of acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1. See  
explanations for F07 and F08.  
E
E
1
1
6
7
D R  
V
T
T
R Q  
R Q  
2
2
B R K  
‹For switching acceleration and deceleration times, select  
any two terminals from terminal X1 (function selection) in  
E01 to terminal X9 (function selection) in E09 as  
switching signal input terminals. Set "4" (acceleration  
and deceleration time 1) and "5" (acceleration and  
deceleration time 2) to the selected terminals and input a  
signal to each terminal to switch acceleration and  
deceleration times.  
Switching is possible during  
acceleration, deceleration, or constant-speed operation.  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E20  
Y1 terminal function  
Inverter running [RUN]  
～
～
"Running" means that the inverter is outputting  
a
frequency. “RUN” signal is output as when there is output  
speed (frequency). When the DC injection brake  
Y5A and Y5C terminal function  
E24  
function is active, “RUN” signal is off.  
‹Some control and monitor signals can be selected and  
output from terminals [Y1] to [Y5]. Terminals [Y1] to  
[Y4] use transistor output; terminals[Y5A] and [Y5C]  
use relay contacts.  
Frequency equivalence signal [FAR]  
See the explanation of function code E30 (frequency  
arrival [detection width]).  
Frequency level detection [FDT1]  
See the explanation of function codes E31 and E32  
(frequency detection).  
E
E
E
E
E
2
2
2
2
2
0
1
2
3
4
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
2
3
4
5
F U N C  
F U N C  
F U N C  
F U N C  
F U N C  
Undervoltage detection signal [LV]  
If the undervoltage protective function activates, i.e.  
when the main circuit DC voltage falls below the  
undervoltage detection level, an ON signal is output. The  
signal goes off when the voltage recovers and increases  
above the detection level. The ON signal is retained  
while the undervoltage protective function is activating.  
Undervoltage detection level: 230V series: 200V, 460V  
series: 400V.  
Set  
value  
0
1
Output signal  
Operating [RUN]  
Frequency arrival [FAR]  
Frequency detection [FDT1]  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Stopping due to undervoltage [LV]  
Torque polarity detection [B/D]  
Torque limiting [TL]  
Restarting after momentary power failure [IPF]  
Overload early warning [OL1]  
During keypad panel operation [KP]  
Inverter stopping [STP]  
Torque polarity [B/D]  
This function determines the torque polarity calculated in  
the inverter and outputs a signal indicating driving or  
braking torque. An OFF signal is output for driving  
torque; an ON signal is output for braking torque.  
Torque limiting [TL]  
When the torque limiting activates, the stall prevention  
function is automatically activated to change the output  
frequency. The torque limiting signal is output to lighten  
the load, and also used to display overload conditions on  
the monitor device. This ON signal is output during the  
current or torque is limited or power regeneration is  
prevented.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
Ready for operation [RDY]  
Operation switching between line and inverter [SW88]  
Operation switching between line and inverter [SW52-2]  
Operation switching between line and inverter [SW52-1]  
Motor 2 switching [SWM2]  
Terminal AX function [AX]  
Pattern operation stage change [TU]  
Pattern operation cycle operation completed [TO]  
Pattern operation stage number [STG1]  
Pattern operation stage number [STG2]  
Pattern operation stage number [STG4]  
Alarm detail [AL1]  
Alarm detail [AL2]  
Alarm detail [AL4]  
Alarm detail [AL8]  
Cooling fan operating [FAN]  
Auto-restarting [IPF]  
Following a momentary power failure, this function  
reports the start of the restart mode, the occurrence of  
an automatic pull-in, and the completion of the recovery  
operation.  
Following a momentary power failure, an ON signal is  
output when power is recovered and a synchronization  
(pull-in) operation is performed. The signal goes off  
when the frequency (before power failure) is recovered.  
For 0Hz restart at power recovery, no signal is output  
because synchronization ends when power is recovered.  
The frequency is not recovered to the frequency before  
the power failure occurrence.  
Retry function operating [TRY]  
Universal DO [U-DO]  
∗
Heat sink overheat early warning [OH]  
Synchronization completed by synchronous operation card [SY]  
∗
Overload early warning [OL1]  
Life expectancy detection signal [LIFE]  
2nd Freq. level detection [FDT2]  
2nd OL level detection [OL2]  
Terminal C1 off signal [C1OFF]  
Speed existence signal [DNZS] ∗  
Before the motor stops by the trip operation of an  
electronic thermal O/L relay, this function outputs an ON  
signal when the load reaches the overload early warning  
level.  
Either the electronic thermal O/L relay early warning or  
output current overload early warning can be selected.  
For setting procedure, see “E33 Overload early warning  
(operation selection)”, and "E34 Overload early warning  
(operation level)."  
Speed agreement signal [DSAG]  
PG error signal [PG-ABN]  
Torque limiting (Signal with delay) [TL2]  
Note: For output signals marked " " are used for RS-485  
∗
∗
∗
communication, OPC-G11S-PG / PG2, PGA or  
OPC-G11S-SY. Refer to each instruction manual.  
Note: This function is effective for motor 1 only.  
Keypad operation mode [KP]  
An ON signal is output when operation command keys  
FWD  
REV  
STOP  
(
,
and  
) on the keypad panel can  
be used (i.e., 0 set in "F02 Operation") to issue operation  
and stop commands.  
This signal is OFF when the function H30(Serial link) is  
set to communication side.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inverter stopping [STOP]  
Alarm indication [AL1] [AL2] [AL4] [AL8]  
This function outputs an inverted signal to Running  
(RUN) to indicate zero speed. An ON signal is output  
when the DC injection brake function is operating.  
This function reports the operating status of the inverter  
protective function.  
Alarm detail  
(inverter protective function)  
Output terminal  
AL1  
AL2  
AL4  
AL8  
Ready output [RDY]  
Overcurrent, ground fault, fuse blown  
Overvoltage  
Undervoltage shortage, input phase failure  
Motors 1 and 2 overload  
Inverter overload  
Heat sink overheating, inverter inside overheating  
External alarm input, braking resistor overheating  
Memory error, CPU error  
Keypad panel communication error, option communication error  
Option error  
Output wiring error  
on off off off  
off on off off  
on on off off  
off off on off  
on off on off  
off on on off  
on on on off  
off off off on  
on off off on  
off on off on  
off off on on  
on off on on  
off on on on  
This function outputs an ON signal when the inverter is  
ready to operate. The inverter is ready to operate when  
the main circuit and control circuit power is established  
and the inverter protective function is not activating.  
About one second is required from power-on to ready for  
operation in normal condition.  
Line/Inv changeover [SW88] [SW52-2] [SW52-1]  
To perform switching operation between the line and the  
inverter, the sequence prepared in the inverter can be  
used to select and output signals for opening and closing  
the magnetic contactors connected to the inverter. As  
the operation is complex, refer to technical  
documentation for the FRENIC5000G11S series when  
using this function.  
As the sequence will operate automatically when SW88  
or SW52-2 is selected, do not select when not using the  
sequence.  
RS-485 communication error  
Overspeed, PG disconnection  
In normal operation terminals do not output a signal.  
Fan operation signal [FAN]  
When used with "H06 Cooling fan ON/OFF control," this  
function outputs a signal while the cooling fan is  
operating.  
Auto-resetting [TRY]  
Motor 2 /Motor 1 [SWM2]  
When a value of 1 or larger is set to "H04 Retry  
operating," the signal is output while retry operation is  
activating when the inverter protective function is  
activated.  
When a signal for switching to motor 2 is input from the  
terminal selected by terminals [X1] to [X9], this function  
selects and outputs the signal for switching the magnetic  
contactor for the motor. As this switching signal is not  
output during running including when the DC injection  
braking function is operating, a signal must be re-input  
after output stops.  
Universal DO [U-DO]  
Assigning value "27" to a transistor output terminal  
renders the terminal a universal DO terminal.  
This function enables ON/OFF through the RS-485 and  
BUS option.  
This function serves only to turn on and off the transistor  
output through communication and is not related to  
inverter operation.  
Auxiliary terminal [AX]  
When an operation (forward or reverse) command is  
entered, this function outputs an ON signal. When a  
stop command is entered, the signal goes off after  
inverter output stops. When a coast-to-stop command  
is entered and the inverter protective function operates,  
the signal goes off immediately.  
Overheat early warning [OH]  
This function outputs a early warning signal when heat  
sink temperature is (overheat detection level - 10℃) or  
higher.  
Time-up signal for pattern operation [TU]  
When the pattern operation stage changes, this function  
outputs a one-shot (100ms) ON signal to report a stage  
change.  
Life expectancy detection signal [LIFE]  
‹When either of data for the Life expectancy judgment  
of the function code:U09 to U11 reaches at the Life  
expectancy judgment level, the ON signal is output.  
However, the inverter does not do alarm.  
Moreover, the alarm output for any fault (30A, 30B,  
30C ) does not operate.  
Cycle completion signal for pattern operation [TO]  
When the seven stages of a pattern operation are  
completed, this function outputs a one-shot (100 ms) ON  
signal to report the completion of all stages.  
Stage No. indication for pattern operation [STG1] [STG2] [STG4]  
Function  
code  
Parts of  
Life expectancy judgment  
Life expectancy  
judgment level  
During pattern operation, this function reports the stage  
(operation process) being operated.  
U09  
U10  
U11  
U59  
Capacitor in main circuit  
Electrolytic capacitor on PCB  
Cooling fan  
DC fan broken for stir internal  
unit up  
85% or less of the initial value  
61,000 hours  
25,000 hours  
Pattern operation  
stage No.  
Output terminal  
STG1  
STG2  
ｏｆｆ  
STG4  
Stage 1  
Stage 2  
Stage 3  
Stage 4  
Stage 5  
Stage 6  
Stage 7  
ｏｎ  
ｏｆｆ  
ｏｎ  
ｏｆｆ  
ｏｎ  
ｏｆｆ  
ｏｎ  
ｏｆｆ  
ｏｆｆ  
ｏｆｆ  
ｏｎ  
ｏｎ  
ｏｎ  
ｏｎ  
DC fan is broken  
ｏｎ  
ｏｎ  
[40HP or more is corresponded.]  
ｏｆｆ  
ｏｆｆ  
ｏｎ  
ｏｎ  
When pattern operation is not activated (i.e., no stage is  
selected), the terminals do not output a signal.  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the following cases, normal life judgment of the  
capacitor in main circuit may not be able to be  
performed.  
1. When a power is turned off during inverter operation.  
2. When cooling fan ON/OFF control is operated.  
( function code : H 06= 1)  
E25  
Y5 Ry operation mode  
‹This function specifies whether to excite the Y5 relay at  
“ON signal mode” or “OFF signal mode”.  
E
2
5
Y
5
R
Y
M O D E  
3. When the power is supplied by the auxiliary input  
terminals (R0,T0).  
4. When the option card is operated .  
5. When RS-485 communication is operated .  
6. When the power supply is turned off with digital input  
(FWD, REV, X1-X9) of a control terminal being ON.  
In the case of "3", "4", "5" and "6", life judgment is  
enabled by adjusting the function both code:U08 and  
Set value  
0
Operation  
At “OFF signal mode” Y5A - Y5C: OFF  
At “ON signal mode” Y5A - Y5C: ON  
At “OFF signal mode” Y5A - Y5C: ON  
At “ON signal mode” Y5A - Y5C: OFF  
1
‹When the set value is "1", contacts Y5A and Y5C are  
connected when the inverter control voltage is  
established (about one second after power on).  
U09.  
Related functions  
U08～U11, U59  
E30  
FAR function signal (Hysteresis)  
‹This function adjusts the detection width when the output  
frequency is the same as the set frequency (operating  
frequency). The detection width can be adjusted from 0  
to ±10 Hz of the setting frequency.  
2nd Freq. level detection [FDT2]  
This function is same as Frequency detection [FDT1],  
the detection level of the output frequency and hysteresis  
width are determined by E36 and E32.  
E
3
0
F
A R  
H
Y
S
T
R
2nd OL level early warning [OL2]  
Setting range: 0.0 to 10.0 Hz  
When the frequency is within the detection width, an ON  
signal can be selected and output from terminals [Y1] to  
[Y5].  
This function outputs an ON signal when the output  
current exceeds “E37 OL2 LEVEL” for longer than “E35  
OL TIMER”.  
NOTE) This function is valid for both of Motor 1 and  
Motor 2.  
Output frequency  
+Detection width  
Set frequency  
Terminal C1 off signal [C1OFF]  
-Detection width  
This function outputs an ON signal when the input  
current of terminal C1 is less than 2mA.  
(When AIO option is connected, it can be detected the  
disconnection of C2 terminal.)  
+Detection width  
Set frequency  
-Detection width  
Synchronization completed by synchronous operation card [SY]  
Speed agreement signal [DSAG]  
Time  
Frequency  
detection  
signal  
(terminals  
Y1 to Y5)  
ON  
ON  
PG error signal [PG-ABN]  
‹The above functions are set for OPC-G11S-PG / PG2  
or PGA. Refer to each instruction manual.  
E31  
E32  
FDT1 function signal (Level)  
FDT1 function signal (Hysteresis)  
Torque limiting (Signal with delay) [TL2]  
‹This function determines the operation (detection) level  
of the output frequency and hysteresis width for  
operation release. When the output frequency exceeds  
the set operation level, an ON signal can be selected and  
output from terminals [Y1] to [Y5].  
‹The turning on signal is output by continuing the  
limiting action(Torque limit operation, regeneration  
avoidance operation and overcurrent limiting  
operation) of 20ms or more.  
E
E
3
3
1
2
F
F
D
D
T
T
1
L
H
E
Y
V
S
E
T
L
R
Settings when shipped from the factory  
Digital input  
Setting at factory shipment  
Set value Description  
Operating [RUN]  
Setting range(Operation level) : G11S: 0 to 400 Hz  
P11S: 0 to 120 Hz  
(Hysteresis width) : 0.0 to 30.0 Hz  
Terminal Y1  
Terminal Y2  
Terminal Y3  
Terminal Y4  
Terminal Y5  
0
1
Frequency arrival [FAR]  
Frequency detection [FDT]  
Overload early warning [OL1]  
Ready output [RDY]  
Output frequency  
2
7
10  
Hysteresis width  
Set frequency  
Operation level  
Release level  
Frequency  
detection  
signal  
Time  
(terminals  
ON  
Y1 to Y5)  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E33  
OL function signal (mode select)  
‹Select one of the following two types of overload early  
warning: early warning by electronic thermal O/L relay  
function or early warning by output current.  
Output current  
E37 OL2 LEVEL  
(E34 OL1 LEVEL)  
OL2 LEVEL x 90%  
(OL1 LEVEL x 90%)  
E
3
3
O
L
W A R N  
I
N G  
Set value 0: Electronic thermal O/L relay  
1: Output current  
E35  
OL TIMER  
Set  
value  
0
Function  
Description  
[OL2]  
ＯＮ  
Electronic  
thermal  
O/L relay  
Overload early warning by electronic  
thermal O/L relay (having inverse-time  
characteristics) to output current.  
The operation selection and thermal  
time constant for the inverse-time  
characteristics are the same as those  
of the electronic thermal O/L relay for  
motor protection (F10 and F12).  
E40  
E41  
Display coefficient A  
Display coefficient B  
‹These coefficients are conversion coefficients which are  
used to determine the load and line speed and the target  
value and feedback amount (process amount) of the PID  
controller displayed on the LED monitor.  
Output  
current  
1
An overload early warning is issued  
when output current exceeds the set  
current value for the set time.  
E
E
4
4
0
1
C O E  
C O E  
F
F
A
B
The figure of OL2(E37) is refferred.  
Setting range  
‹This function cannot be used when Motor 2 is selected.  
Display coefficient A:-999.00 to 0.00 to +999.00  
Display coefficient B:-999.00 to 0.00 to +999.00  
E34 OL function signal (Level)  
‹This function determines the operation level of the  
electronic thermal O/L relay or output current.  
‹Load and line speed  
Use the display coefficient A.  
Displayed value = output frequency x (0.01 to 200.00)  
Although the setting range is ±999.00, the effective  
value range of display data is 0.01 to 200.00. Therefore,  
values smaller or larger than this range are limited to a  
minimum value of 0.01 or a maximum value of 200.00.  
‹Target value and feedback amount of PID controller  
Set the maximum value of display data in E40, "Display  
coefficient A," and the minimum value in E41, "Display  
coefficient B."  
E
3
4
O
L
1
L
E
V
E
L
Setting range G11S:Inverter rated output current x (5 to 200%)  
P11S:Inverter rated output current x (5 to 150%)  
The operation release level is 90% of the set value.  
‹This function cannot be used when Motor 2 is selected.  
E35  
OL function signal (Timer)  
M E  
E
3
5
O
L
1
T
I
R
Displayed value = (target value or feedback amount)  
x (display coefficient A - B)+B  
‹This function is used when 1 (output current) is set to  
"E33 Overload early warning (operation selection)."  
Setting range: 0.1 to 60.0 seconds  
‹Set the time from when the operation level is attained  
until the overload early warning function is activated.  
Displayed value  
A
E36  
FDT2 function (Level)  
Target value or  
feedback amount  
B
‹This function determines the operation (detection) level  
of output frequency for “2nd Freq. level detection [FDT2]”.  
The hysteresis width for operation release is set by the  
function E32: FDT1 function signal (Hysteresis).  
100%  
0%  
E
3
6
F
D
T
2
L
E
V
E
L
Setting range(Operation level)  
:
G11S: 0 to 400 Hz  
P11S: 0 to 120 Hz  
E37  
OL2 function (Level)  
‹This function determines the operation level of the output  
current for “2nd OL level detection [OL2]”.  
E
3
7
O
L
2
L
E
V
E
L
Setting range G11S:Inverter rated output current x (5 to 200%)  
P11S:Inverter rated output current x (5 to 150%)  
The operation release level is 90% of the set value.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E43  
E44  
LED monitor (function)  
E45  
LCD monitor (function)  
‹This function selects the item to be displayed on the LCD  
monitor in the operation mode.  
LED monitor (display at stop mode)  
‹The data during inverter operation, during stopping, at  
frequency setting, and at PID setting is displayed on the  
LED.  
E
4
5
L
C D  
M
N
T
R
‹Display during running and stopping  
Set value  
Display item  
During running, the items selected in "E43 LED monitor  
(display selection)," are displayed. In "E44 LED monitor  
(display at stopping)," specify whether to display some  
items out of the set values or whether to display the  
same items as during running.  
Operation status, rotating direction, operation guide  
0
1
Output frequency (before slip compensation), output  
current, calculated torque value in bar graph  
Set value:  
0
E
E
4
4
3
4
L
L
E
E
D
D
M
M
N
N
T
T
R
R
During running  
When stopping  
2
60.00  
60.00  
Value  
set to  
E43  
E44＝0  
At stopping  
E44＝1  
FWD  
RUN  
During  
running  
At  
During  
STOP  
stopping  
running  
PRG  
⇒
PRG MENU  
LED SHIFT  
PRG  
⇒
PRG MENU  
0
Set frequency value  
(Hz)  
Output frequency  
(before slip compensation) (Hz)  
F/D  
⇒
F/D  
⇒LED SHIFT  
1
Set frequency value  
(Hz)  
Output frequency  
(after slip compensation) (Hz)  
Set value:  
1
2
3
4
5
Set frequency value (Hz)  
Output current (A)  
Output voltage (command value) (V)  
60.00  
Hz  
A
%
Synchronous speed  
set value (r/min)  
Synchronous speed (r/min)  
6
7
Line  
value (m/min.)  
speed  
set  
Line speed (m/min.)  
Load speed (r/min)  
Fout/Iout/TRQ  
Load speed set  
value (r/min)  
Full-scale value of bar graph  
Display item  
8
9
Calculated torque value (%)  
Output power (HP)  
Full-scale  
Output frequency  
Output current  
Calculated torque value  
Maximum frequency  
200% of inverter rated value  
200% of motor rated value  
10  
11  
12  
PID target value 1 (direct input from keypad panel)  
PID target value 2 (input from "F02 Frequency 1")  
PID feedback amount  
Note: For the values 10 to 12 set to E43, the data is  
displayed only when selected in "H20 PID control  
(operation selection)."  
Note: The scale cannot be adjusted.  
E46 Language  
‹This function selects the language for data display on the  
‹Display at frequency setting  
LCD monitor.  
When a set frequency is checked or changed by the  
keypad panel, the set value shown below is displayed.  
Select the display item by using "E43 LED monitor  
(display selection)." This display is not affected by "E44  
LED monitor (display at stopping)."  
E
4
6
L
A N G U A G E  
Set value  
Language  
displayed  
Set value  
Language  
displayed  
0
1
2
Japanese  
English  
German  
3
4
5
French  
Spanish  
Italian  
Value set to  
E43  
0,1,2,3,4  
Frequency setting  
Set value of frequency (Hz)  
Note: English language is used for all LCD screens in this  
manual. For other languages, refer to the relevant  
instruction manual.  
5
6
7
Set value of synchronous speed (r/min)  
Set value of line speed (m/min.)  
Set value of load speed (r/min)  
Set value of frequency (Hz)  
8,9  
E47  
LCD monitor (contrast)  
10,11,12  
Set value of frequency (Hz)  
‹This function adjusts the LCD contrast. Increase the set  
value to raise contrast and decrease to lower contrast.  
Note: For the values 10 to 12 set to E43, the data is  
displayed only when selected in "H20 PID control  
(operation selection)."  
E
4
7
C O N  
T
R A S  
T
Set value  
Screen  
0,1,2 • • • • • • 8,9,10  
Low High  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C：Control Functions of Frequency  
Internal set frequency (Hz)  
C01  
C02  
C03  
C04  
Jump frequency 1  
Jump frequency 2  
Jump frequency 3  
Actual  
jump width  
Jump frequency  
width  
Jump frequency (Hysteresis)  
Jump frequency 2  
‹This function makes the set frequency jump so that the  
inverter's output frequency does not match the  
mechanical resonance point of the load.  
Jump frequency 1  
‹Up to three jump points can be set.  
Set frequency (Hz)  
‹This function is ineffective when jump frequencies 1 to 3  
are set to 0Hz.  
‹A jump does not occur during acceleration or deceleration.  
When a jump frequency setting range overlaps another  
range, both ranges are added to determine the actual  
jump area.  
C05  
Multistep frequency 1  
～
～
C19  
Multistep frequency 15  
‹Multistep frequencies 1 to 15 can be switched by turning  
on and off terminal functions SS1, SS2, SS4, and SS8.  
(See E01 to E09 for terminal function definitions.)  
‹OFF input is assumed for any undefined terminal of SS1,  
SS2, SS4, and SS8.  
C
C
C
0
0
0
1
2
3
J
J
J
U M P  
U M P  
U M P  
H
H
H
z
z
z
1
2
3
Setting range  
G11S : 0 to 400Hz  
P11S : 0 to 120Hz  
In 1Hz steps (min.)  
Related functions  
E01 to E09  
(Set value:0 to 3  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
M U  
M U  
M U  
M U  
M U  
M U  
M U  
M U  
M U  
M U  
M U  
M U  
M U  
M U  
M U  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H z  
H z  
H z  
H z  
H z  
H z  
H z  
H z  
H z  
H z  
H z  
H z  
H z  
H z  
H z  
-
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
)
-
C
0
4
J
U M P  
H
Y
S
T R  
Setting range  
0 to 30Hz  
-
-
In 1Hz steps (min.)  
-
-
To avoid the resonance of the motor driving frequency to  
the peculiar vibration frequency of the machine, the jump  
frequency band can be set to the output frequency up to  
three point.  
-
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
‹During accelerating, an internal set frequency is kept  
constant by the lower frequency of the jump frequency  
band when a set frequency enters the jump frequency  
band. This means that the output frequency is kept  
constant according to an internal set frequency.  
When a set frequency exceeds the upper bound of the  
jump frequency band, an internal set frequency reaches  
the value of a set frequency. The output frequency  
accelerates up to a set frequency while passing the jump  
frequency band according to the acceleration time at this  
time.  
Setting range  
G11S: 0.00 to 400.00Hz  
P11S: 0.00 to 120.00Hz  
In 0.01Hz steps (min.)  
During decelerating, it has a relation opposite to  
accelerating. Refer to figure below.  
Output frequency  
(Hz)  
C13  
‹When two jump frequency bands or more come in  
succession mutually, the lowest and highest frequency  
become the lower bound and the upper bound frequency  
of an actual jump frequency band respectively among  
them. Refer to upper right figure.  
C12  
C11  
C10  
C09  
C14  
C15  
C16  
C17  
C18  
C19  
C08  
C07  
Internal set frequency (Hz)  
C06  
C05  
Jump frequency  
width  
Jump frequency  
FWD-P24  
SS1-P24  
ON  
width  
Jump frequency  
width  
Jump frequency 3  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Jump frequency 2  
Jump frequency 1  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
SS2-P24  
SS4-P24  
SS8-P24  
ON  
ON  
Set frequency (Hz)  
ON  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C20  
JOG frequency  
C22  
Pattern operation (stage 1)  
～
～
‹This function sets the frequency for jogging operation of  
motor, which is different from the normal operation.  
C28  
Pattern operation (stage 7)  
‹Seven stages are operated in order (of function codes)  
according to the values set in "C22 Pattern operation  
(stage 1)" to "C28 Pattern operation (stage 7)." Each  
function sets the operation time and the rotating direction  
for each stage and assigns set values of the acceleration  
and deceleration time.  
C
2
0
J
O G  
H
z
Setting range G11S : 0.00 to 400.00 Hz  
P11S : 0.00 to 120.00 Hz  
‹Starting with the jogging frequency is combined with  
jogging select signal input from the keypad panel or  
control terminal. For details, see the explanations of  
"E01 Terminal X1" to "E09 Terminal X9."  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
A G E  
A G E  
A G E  
A G E  
A G E  
A G E  
A G E  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C21  
Pattern operation (mode select)  
‹Pattern operation is an automatic operation according to  
preset operation time, direction of rotation, acceleration  
and deceleration time, and frequency.  
When using this function, set 10 (pattern operation) to  
"F01 Frequency setting."  
The following operation patterns can be selected.  
Related functions  
C
2
1
P
A
T
T
E R N  
F01, C30  
Set or  
assign item  
Value range  
(Set value:10)  
Operation time  
0
．00 to 6000s  
Rotation  
direction  
Acceleration  
and  
deceleration  
time  
F: Forward (counterclockwise)  
R: Reverse (clockwise)  
1: Acceleration time 1 (F07), deceleration time 1 (F08)  
2: Acceleration time 2 (E10), deceleration time 2 (E11)  
3: Acceleration time 3 (E12), deceleration time 3 (E13)  
4: Acceleration time 4 (E14), deceleration time 4 (E15)  
Set value  
Operation pattern  
0
1
Perform a pattern operation cycle, then stop operation.  
Perform pattern operation repeatedly. Stop operation  
using a stop command.  
pattern operation cycle, then continue  
operation with the last frequency set.  
2
Perform  
a
Note: The operation time is represented by the three most  
significant digits, hence, can be set with only three  
high-order digits.  
Set value:0  
Forward  
End of a cycle  
FWD  
‹Setting example  
Output  
frequency  
100  
F
3
0
Time  
Acceleration and deceleration  
time (code): 3  
Reverse  
Motor rotating direction:  
Forward (counterclockwise)  
Set value:1  
Forward  
End of a cycle  
FWD  
Output  
frequency  
Operation time: 100s  
0
Time  
Set the operation time to 0.00 for stages not used, which  
are skipped in operation.  
Reverse  
With regard to the set frequency value, the multistep  
frequency function is assigned as listed in the table below.  
Set frequencies to "C05 Multistep frequency 1," to "C11  
Multistep frequency 7."  
Set value:2  
Forward  
End of a cycle  
FWD  
Output  
frequency  
Stage No.  
Stage 1  
Stage 2  
Stage 3  
Stage 4  
Stage 5  
Stage 6  
Stage 7  
Operation frequency to be set  
Multistep frequency 1 (C05)  
Multistep frequency 2 (C06)  
Multistep frequency 3 (C07)  
Multistep frequency 4 (C08)  
Multistep frequency 5 (C09)  
Multistep frequency 6 (C10)  
Multistep frequency 7 (C11)  
0
Time  
Reverse  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‹Pattern operation setting example  
C30  
‹This function selects the frequency setting method.  
Related functions  
Frequency command 2  
Set value  
Function  
C21 (operation selection)  
C22 (stage 1)  
C23 (stage 2)  
C24 (stage 3)  
C25 (stage 4)  
C26 (stage 5)  
C27 (stage 6)  
C28 (stage 7)  
Operation frequency to be set  
-
1
60.0F2  
100F1  
65.5R4  
55.0R3  
50.0F2  
72.0F4  
35.0F2  
Multistep frequency 1 (C05)  
Multistep frequency 2 (C06)  
Multistep frequency 3 (C07)  
Multistep frequency 4 (C08)  
Multistep frequency 5 (C09)  
Multistep frequency 6 (C10)  
Multistep frequency 7 (C11)  
E01 to E09  
(Set value:11)  
F01  
C
3
0
F
R
E Q  
C M D  
2
For the setting method, see the explanation for F01.  
The following diagram shows this operation.  
C31  
C32  
Bias  
Gain  
(terminal[12])  
(terminal[12])  
Multistep  
frequency 7  
(Stage 7)  
Forward  
direction  
Multistep  
frequency 6  
Multistep  
frequency 2  
‹This function sets the Gain and Bias of the analog input  
(terminals [12] ).  
Multistep  
frequency 1  
(Stage 1)  
ACC4  
Multistep  
frequency 5  
C
C
3
3
1
2
B
I
A S  
1
1
2
2
FWD  
DEC1  
Time  
G A  
I
N
ACC2  
DEC4  
DEC2  
DEC2  
ACC1  
ACC4  
The setting range :  
BIAS: -100 to +100%  
GAIN:0.0 to 200%  
ACC2  
ACC3  
Multistep  
frequency 3  
Multistep  
frequency 4  
Reference  
voltage  
Terminal  
Gain  
Bias  
12  
Reverse  
direction  
55.0S  
35.0S  
50.0S 72.0S  
60.0S 100S 65.5S  
Output value of Gain 12  
Set  
value  
:16  
0.1S  
200%  
Output signals from terminals Y1 to Y5  
0.1S  
100%  
50%  
Set  
value  
:17  
+10V  
FWD  
‹Running and stopping are controlled by pressing the  
and  
STOP  
keys and by opening and closing the control  
-10  
0
+10[V]  
Analog input voltage  
[terminal 12]  
terminals.  
FWD  
-10V  
When using the keypad panel, pressing the  
starts operation. Pressing the  
key  
STOP  
key pauses stage  
FWD  
advance. Pressing the  
key again restarts operation  
from the stop point according to the stages. If an alarm  
RESET  
stop occurs, press the  
key to release operation  
FWD  
of the inverter protective function, then press the  
key to restart stage advance.  
Output value of Bias 12  
Bias setting  
(when positive)  
If required to start operation from the first stage "C22  
Pattern operation (stage 1)," enter a stop command and  
+10V  
(+100%)  
RESET  
press the  
key.  
RESET  
If an alarm stop occurs, press the  
key to release  
the protective function, then press the key again.  
Notes:  
1. The direction of rotation cannot be reversed by a  
-10  
0
+10[V]  
REV  
command issued from the  
key on the keypad panel  
or terminal [REV]. Any reverse rotation commands entered  
are canceled. Select forward or reverse rotation by the data  
in each stage. When the control terminals are used for  
operation, the self-hold function of operation command also  
does not work. Select an alternate type switch when using.  
2. At the end of a cycle, the motor decelerates-to-stop  
according to the value set to "F08 Deceleration time 1."  
Output value of Gain 12  
Bias setting  
(when negative)  
-10V  
(-100%)  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C33  
Analog setting signal filter  
‹Analog signals input from control terminal 12 or C1 may  
contain noise, which renders control unstable. This  
function adjusts the time constant of the input filter to  
remove the effects of noise.  
C
3
3
R
E
F
F
I
L
T
E
R
Setting range: 0.00 to 5.00 seconds  
‹An set value too large delays control response though  
stabilizing control. A set value too small speeds up  
control response but renders control unstable.  
If the optimum value is not known, change the setting when  
control is unstable or response is delayed.  
Note:  
The set value is commonly applied to terminals 12 and C1.  
For input of PID feedback amount, the PID control  
feedback filter (set in H25) is used.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor 1 (P: Motor Parameters)  
P01  
Number of motor 1 poles  
Set  
Operation  
value  
0
1
‹This function sets the number of poles of motor 1 to be  
driven. If this setting is not made, an incorrect motor  
speed (synchronous speed) is displayed on the LED.  
Inactive  
Measure the primary resistance (%R1) of the  
motor and leakage reactance (%X) of the base  
frequency when the motor is stopping and  
automatically write both values in P07 and  
P08.  
P
0
1
M 1  
P O  
L
E
S
Set values: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14  
Measure the primary resistance (%R1) of the  
motor and leakage reactance (%X) of the base  
frequency when the motor is stopping,  
measure the no-load current (lo) when the  
motor is running, and automatically write these  
values in P06, P07, and P08.  
Put the motor into the state unit separating  
from the machine for the tuning of the no-load  
current.  
In the state that the load is connected, cannot  
the tuning correctly. Execute the auto tuning of  
set value “1" after obtaining the test report etc.  
from the motor manufactures when not making  
it in the state of the motor unit, and setting P06  
(no-load current) beforehand.  
2
P02 Motor 1 (capacity)  
‹The nominal applied motor capacity is set at the factory.  
The setting should be changed when driving a motor with  
a different capacity.  
P
0
2
M
1
-
C A P  
Set value for models with nominal applied motor of 30HP or less  
0.01 to 60HP  
Models with nominal applied motor of 40HP or more  
0.01 to 800HP  
:
:
‹Set the nominal applied motor capacity listed in 9-1,  
"Standard Specifications." Also set a value in the range  
from two ranks lower to one rank higher than the nominal  
applied motor capacity. When a value outside this  
range is set, accurate control cannot be guaranteed. If  
a value between two nominal applied motor capacities is  
set, data for the lower capacity is automatically written for  
related function data.  
‹ When the setting of this function is changed, the values  
of the following related functions are automatically set to  
data of the FUJI 3-phase standard motor.  
-- P03 Motor 1 (rated current)  
‹Perform auto tuning when data written beforehand in  
"P06 No-load current," "P07 %R1," and "P08 %X," differs  
from actual motor data. Typical cases are listed below.  
Auto tuning improves control and calculation accuracy.  
・When a motor other than the FUJI standard 3-phase  
motor is used and accurate data is required for close  
control.  
・When output-side impedance cannot be ignored as  
when cable between the inverter and the motor is too  
long or when a reactor is connected.  
-- P06 Motor 1 (no-load current)  
-- P07 Motor 1 (% R1)  
-- P08 Motor 1 (% X1)  
・ When %R1 or %X is unknown as when a non-standard  
or special motor is used.  
Note:  
The set values for the FUJI 3-phase standard motor are  
230V, 50Hz, 4 poles for the 230V series; 460V, 50Hz, 4  
poles for the 460V series.  
Tuning procedure  
P03  
‹This function sets the rated current value of motor 1.  
M 1  
Setting range: 0.00 to 2,000A  
Motor 1 (rated current)  
1. Adjust the voltage and frequency according to motor  
characteristics. Adjust functions "F03 Maximum output  
frequency," "F04 Base frequency," "F05 Rated voltage,"  
and "F06 Maximum output voltage."  
P
0
3
-
I
r
2. Enter untunable motor constants first. Set functions  
"P02 Capacity," "P03 Rated current," and "P06 No-load  
current," (input of no-load current not required when  
P04=2, for running the motor at tuning, is selected).  
3. When tuning the no-load current, beware of motor rotation.  
P04  
Motor 1 (Tuning)  
‹This function measures and automatically writes motor  
data.  
P
0
4
M 1  
T
U N  
1
4. Set 1 (motor stop) or 2 (motor rotation) to function "P04  
FUNC  
DATA  
Auto tuning." Press the  
value and press the  
start tuning simultaneously.  
key to write the set  
key then  
key or  
FWD  
REV  
5. Tuning takes several seconds to several tens of seconds  
(when 2 is set. As the motor accelerates up to half the  
base frequency according to acceleration time, is tuned  
for the no-load current, and decelerates according to the  
deceleration time, the total tuning time varies depending  
on set acceleration and deceleration times.)  
STOP  
6. Press the  
key after the tuning is completed .  
7. End of procedure.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note1:  
P09  
Slip compensation control  
If REMOTE operation(F02: 1) is selected, operation signal is  
given from terminal [FWD] or [REV].  
Note2:  
Use function "A13 Motor 2 (auto tuning)," to tune motor 2. In  
this case, set values described in 1 and 2 above are for the  
function (A01 - ) of motor 2.  
‹Changes in load torque affect motor slippage, thus causing  
variations in motor speed. The slip compensation control  
adds a frequency (proportional to motor torque) to the  
inverter output frequency to minimize variations in motor  
speed due to torque changes.  
P
0
9
S
L
I
P
C O M P  
1
‹Auto tuning(P04/A13: 2) should be done to use this  
When the auto tuning value is set to 2,  
the motor rotates at a maximum of half  
function.  
Set value: 0.00 to 15.00Hz  
the base frequency. Beware of motor  
rotation.  
WARNING  
‹Calculate the amount of slip compensation using the  
following formula:  
Slip compenssation amount  
as injury may result.  
P05  
Motor 1 (On-line Tuning)  
Slippage［r/min］  
‹Long-time operation affects motor temperature and  
motor speed. Online tuning minimizes speed changes  
when motor temperature changes.  
‹Auto tuning(P04/A13: 2) should be done to use this  
function.  
＝Base frequency×  
［Hz］  
Synchronous speed［r/min］  
Slippage = Synchronous speed - Rated speed  
P
0
5
M 1  
T
U N  
2
Set value  
0
1
Operation  
Inactive  
Active  
P06  
Motor 1 (no-load current)  
‹This function sets the no-load current (exciting current)  
of motor 1.  
P
0
6
M 1 －  
I
O
Setting range: 0.00 to 2,000A  
P07  
P08  
Motor 1 (%R1 setting)  
Motor 1 (%X setting)  
‹Write this data when using a motor other than the FUJI  
standard 3-phase motor and when the motor constant  
and the impedance between the inverter and motor are  
known.  
P
P
0
0
7
8
M 1 － % R  
M 1 － % X  
1
‹Calculate %R1 using the following formula:  
R1＋Cable R  
%R1=  
×100［%］  
V/( 3・I  
)
R1 : Primary coil resistance value of the motor [Ω]  
Cable R : Output-side cable resistance value [Ω]  
V : Rated voltage [V] Ｉ: Motor rated current [A]  
‹Calculate %X using the following formula:  
X1＋X2・XM/ (X2＋XM )+ Cable X  
%X =  
×100［%］  
V/( 3・I)  
X1 : Primary leakage reactance of the motor [Ω]  
X2 : Secondary leakage reactance (converted to a  
primary value)of the motor [Ω]  
XM : Exciting reactance of the motor [Ω]  
Cable X : Output-side cable reactance [Ω]  
V : Rated voltage [V] I : Motor rated current[A]  
Note:  
For reactance, use a value in the data written in "F04  
Base frequency 1."  
‹When connecting a reactor or filter to the output circuit,  
add its value. Use value 0 for cable values that can be  
ignored.  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
High Performance functions (H:High Performance function)  
H03  
Data initializing  
When retry succeeded  
‹This function returns all function data changed by the  
customer to the factory setting data. (initialization).  
Occurrence Extinction  
H
0
3
D A  
Set value 0： Disabled.  
1： Initializing data.  
T
A
I
N
I
T
Alarm  
Time  
Automatic  
0.1S  
release  
command  
of  
protective  
function  
STOP  
∧
W aiting time  
(H05)  
‹To perform initialization, press the  
and  
keys  
FUNC  
DATA  
together to set 1, then press the  
key. The set  
values of all functions are initialized. The set value in  
H03 automatically returns to 0 following the end of  
initialization.  
Restart  
5min. after  
Output  
frequency  
RESET the times  
constant speed of auto-reset  
H04  
Auto-reset(Times)  
Output  
signals  
H05  
Auto-reset (Reset interval)  
ON  
terminals  
Y1 to Y5  
‹When the inverter protective function which invokes the  
retry operation is activated, this function releases  
operation of the protective function and restarts  
operation without issuing an alarm or terminating output.  
H
H
0
0
4
5
A U  
T
S
O
E
-
R
E
I
S
N
E T  
T
Alarm  
reset  
retry failed  
R
E
T
Extinction  
Occurrence  
Set the protective function release count and waiting  
time from its operation startup to release.  
Setting range (Count)  
Alarm  
: 0, 1 to 10  
(Waiting time) : 2 to 20 seconds  
To not use the retry function, set 0 to "H04 Retry (count)."  
‹Inverter protective functions that can invoke retry  
function.  
0.1S  
H05:  
W ait  
0.1S  
H05:  
W ait  
0.1S  
Automatic  
release  
command  
of  
protective  
function  
Output  
Retry  
end  
OC1,OC2,OC3  
: Overcurrent  
dBH  
time  
time  
: Braking resistor overheating  
Count set in  
H04 (count)  
OV1,OV2,OV3  
: Overvoltage  
OH1  
OL1  
First  
Second  
: Motor 1 overload  
OL2  
frequency  
: Heat sink overheating  
OH3  
: Motor 2 overload  
OLU  
Output  
signals  
terminals  
Y1 to Y5  
: Inverter inside overheating  
: Inverter overload  
ON  
‹When the value of "H04 Retry (count)," is set from 1 to  
10, an inverter run command is immediately entered  
following the wait time set in H05, "Retry (wait time),"  
and the startup of the retry operation. If the cause of  
the alarm has been removed at this time, the inverter  
starts without switching to alarm mode. If the cause of  
the alarm still remains, the protective function is  
reactivated according to the wait time set in "H05 Retry  
(waiting time)." This operation is repeated until the  
cause of the alarm is removed. The restart operation  
switches to alarm mode when the retry count exceeds  
the value set in "H04 Retry (count)."  
H06  
Fan stop operation  
‹This function specifies whether cooling fan ON/OFF  
control is automatic. While power is applied to the  
inverter, the automatic fan control detects the  
temperature of the cooling fan in the inverter and turns  
the fan on or off.  
When this control is not selected, the cooling fan rotates  
continually.  
H
0
6
F
A N  
S
T
O P  
Set value 0: ON/OFF control disabled.  
1: ON/OFF control enabled.  
The operation of the retry function can be monitored  
from terminals Y1 to Y5.  
The cooling fan operating status can be monitored from  
terminals Y1 to Y5.  
When the retry function is selected,  
operation automatically restarts depending  
on the cause of the trip stop. (The  
machine should be designed to ensure  
safety during a restart)  
WARNING  
as accident may result.  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output  
frequency  
H07  
ACC/DEC （Mode select） pattern  
‹This function selects the acceleration and deceleration  
pattern.  
Acceleration time  
Deceleration time  
Maximum  
output  
H
0
7
A C C  
P
T
N
frequency  
Set  
frequency  
Set value 0: Inactive (linear acceleration and deceleration)  
1: S-shape acceleration and deceleration (mild)  
2: S-shape acceleration and deceleration (*)  
Base  
frequency  
3: Curvilinear acceleration and deceleration  
Related functions  
U02 to U05  
t[sec]  
0
H08  
Rev. phase sequence lock  
* The S-shape range is set by the  
‹When accidental reversing is expected to cause a  
malfunction, this function can be set to prevent reversal.  
function: U02 to U05 when the set value "2" is selected.  
The detail is referred to the function: U02 to U05.  
[S-shape acceleration and deceleration]  
This pattern reduces shock by mitigating output frequency  
changes at the beginning/end of acceleration and  
deceleration.  
H 0  
8
R
E
V
L
O C K  
Set value 0: Inactive  
1: Active  
When reversible operation with polarity(set value: "4" or  
"5") is selected in frequency command: F01, C30, the  
inverter operates as follows.  
Output frequency  
Operation  
command  
0V to 10V input  
-10V to 0V input  
f[Hz]  
Mild S-shape ern  
Arbitrary S-shape  
Short FWD-CM The inverter operates.  
terminals or  
The frequency display  
is "0.00" Hz.  
α
FWD  
: ON  
Short REV-CM The frequency display The inverter operates.  
terminals or  
is "0.00" Hz.  
REV  
: ON  
α
0
t[s]  
βacc  
βacc  
βdec  
βdec  
This function prevents a reversing operation resulting from  
a connection between the REV and P24 terminals,  
REV  
<Pattern constants>  
inadvertent activation of the  
key, or negative analog  
When 1 is selected in H07  
(mild S-shape pattern)  
When 2 is selected in H07  
(arbitrary S-shape pattern)  
input from terminal 12 or V1. During this function is  
operating, "0.00Hz" is displayed on the LED monitor.  
This function cannot be prevented against H18: Torque  
control function. It may be reverse because of the torque  
signal and load.  
Range of  
S-shape(  
Time for  
S-shape at  
acceleration  
(U02 to U05) x max. output  
freq. (Hz)  
0.05 x max. output freq. (Hz)  
α)  
(U02, U03) x2 x  
acceleration time (s)  
0.10 x acceleration time (s)  
(β  
acc)  
Time for  
S-shape at  
deceleration  
U04, U05 x2 x  
deceleration time (s)  
0.10 x deceleration time (s)  
(β  
dec)  
∗ When acceleration and deceleration times are very  
long or short, acceleration and deceleration are rendered  
linear.  
It may be switched the acceleration and deceleration  
time during constant speed or stopping by the function  
"acceleration and deceleration time selection"(E01 to  
E09: 4, 5).  
The signal may be ignored switched during S-shape at  
acceleration.  
The linear deceleration time is corresponded if switched  
during S-shape at deceleration.  
It may be switched to the S-shape operation if output  
frequency is reached to the setting frequency or change  
to acceleration control.  
[ Curvilinear acceleration and deceleration ]  
This function is used to minimize motor acceleration and  
deceleration times in the range that includes  
constant-output range.  
a
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H10  
Energy-saving operation  
H09  
Start mode  
This function smoothly starts the motor which is coasting  
after a momentary power failure or after the motor has  
been subject to external force, without stopping motor.  
At startup, this function detects the motor speed and  
outputs the corresponding frequency, thereby enabling a  
shock-free motor startup. Although the normal startup  
method is used, when the coasting speed of the motor is  
120 Hz or more as an inverter frequency, when the value  
set to "F03 Maximum frequency," exceeds the value set to  
"F15 Frequency limiter (upper limit)." and when the  
coasting speed is less than 5 Hz as an inverter frequency.  
‹When the output frequency is fixed (constant-speed  
operation) at light loads and except for”0.0” is set to F09,  
"Torque boost 1," this function automatically reduces the  
output voltage, while minimizing the product (power) of  
voltage and current.  
‹Auto tuning(P04/A13: 2) should be done to use this  
function.  
‹The energy-saving operation does not be operated when  
set below.  
- Under Torque control  
- Selected the Automatic torque boost  
- Selected the Torque vector control  
- Under PG vector control  
H 0  
Set value  
Set value STM  
9
S
T
A R  
0,1,2  
T
M O D  
E
H
1
0
E
N
E
R G Y  
S
A V  
Restart after a  
momentary power  
failure or  
Other  
operation  
Set value 0: Inactive  
1: Active  
Note:  
-Use this function for square law reduction torque loads  
(e.g., fans, pumps). When used for a constant-torque  
load or rapidly changing load, this function causes a delay  
in control response.  
-The energy-saving operation automatically stops  
during acceleration and deceleration and when the  
torque limiting function is activated.  
Line-to-inverter  
switching  
0
1
OFF /  
not selected  
Inactive  
(normal starting)  
Active  
Inactive  
(smoothly starting)  
Active  
2
any value  
ON  
Active  
STM: Start characteristics selection signal(E01 to E09: 26)  
NOTE:  
-1: Automatically restart when overcurrent or overvoltage is  
detected during smoothly starts.  
-2: The coasting speed is used 100 Hz or less as an  
inverter frequency.  
-3: When H09:2 or STM:ON, it needs the time more than  
normal start even the motor is STOP because the motor  
speed is detected on ALL situation. And it may be  
rotated the motor when the load is too small.  
-4: Auto tuning(P04/A13: 2) should be done to use this  
function.  
-5: When the used motor slippage is too differ from FUJI  
motor, the "Slip compensation control (P09, A18)"  
should be set. The characteristics may not be satisfied.  
‹When the operation above is to be problem, this function  
is not used (inactive).  
H11  
DEC mode  
‹This function selects the inverter stopping method when  
a stop command is entered.  
H 1 1 D E C  
Set value 0: Deceleration-to-stop based on data set to  
"H07 Non-linear acceleration and  
M O D E  
deceleration"  
1: Coasting-to-stop  
Note:  
This function is effective only when a stop command is  
entered and, therefore, is ineffective when the motor is  
stopped by lowering the set frequency.  
H12  
Instantaneous overcurrent limiting  
‹An overcurrent trip generally occurs when current flows  
above the inverter protective level following a rapid  
change in motor load. The instantaneous overcurrent  
limiting function controls inverter output and prohibits the  
flow of a current exceeding the protective level even  
when the load changes.  
‹As the operation level of the instantaneous overcurrent  
limiting function cannot be adjusted, the torque limiting  
function must be used.  
‹This function may not be satisfied the characteristics  
because of the load condition, motor constant, operating  
frequency, coasting speed, wire length, momentary  
power failure time or external factor.  
0.1 s or  
longer  
0.2 s or  
longer  
P24  
As motor generation torque may be  
STM  
reduced  
when  
instantaneous  
Time  
ON  
overcurrent limiting is applied, set this  
function to be inactive for equipment  
such as elevators, which are  
adversely affected by reduced motor  
generation torque, in which case an  
overcurrent trip occurs when the  
current flow exceeds the inverter  
protective level. A mechanical brake  
should be used to ensure safety.  
FWD  
ON  
WARNING  
Output  
frequency  
(motor speed)  
as accident may result.  
Time  
H
1
2
I
N S  
T
C
L
Speed  
search  
Acceleration  
Set value 0: Inactive  
1: Active  
In this section, the output  
voltage is gradually increased  
in steps to minimize shock.  
Note: The dotted-dashed line indicates motor speed.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H13  
Auto-restart (Restart time)  
H18  
Torque control  
‹This function controls motor torque according to a  
‹Instantaneous switching to another power line (when the  
power of an operating motor is cut off or power failure  
occurs) creates a large phase difference between the  
line voltage and the voltage remaining in the motor,  
which may cause electrical or mechanical failure. To  
rapidly switch power lines, write the remaining voltage  
attenuation time to wait for the voltage remaining in the  
motor to attenuate. This function operates at restart  
after a momentary power failure.  
command value.  
Related functions  
E01toE09  
(Set value: 23)  
H
1
8
T
R Q  
C
T
R
L
Set value  
Operation  
0
1
Inactive (Operation by frequency command)  
Torque control active  
0 to +10V analog voltage input to terminal 12  
and the direction of rotation (FWD or REV) is  
used for the torque command value. 0 is  
used for 0 to -10V.  
H 1 3 R E S T A R T  
T
Setting range: 0.1 to 5.0 seconds  
‹When the momentary power failure time is shorter than  
the wait time value, a restart occurs following the wait  
time. When the power failure time is longer than the  
wait time value, a restart occurs when the inverter is  
ready to operate (after about 0.2 to 0.5 second).  
2
Torque control active  
-10 to +10V analog voltage input to terminal  
12 and the direction of rotation (FWD or  
REV) is used for the torque command value.  
Torque control block diagram  
H14  
Auto-restart (Freq. fall rate)  
Torque com m and value  
‹This function determines the reduction rate of the output  
frequency for synchronizing the inverter output frequency  
and the motor speed. This function is also used to  
reduce the frequency and thereby prevent stalling under  
a heavy load during normal operation.  
+
Voltage at  
term inal 12  
Torque  
lim itation  
O utput  
frequency  
R egulator  
x
-
Forward com m and  
Reverse com m and  
D etected torque  
current  
H 1 4 F A L L  
R A T E  
The torque command value is +200% when the voltage at  
terminal 12 is +10V and is -200% when the voltage is -10V.  
‹Auto tuning(P04/A13: 2) should be done to use this  
function.  
Setting range: 0.00, 0.01 to 100.00 Hz/s  
‹When 0.00 is set, the frequency is reduced according to  
the set deceleration time.  
Note:  
‹In torque control, the torque command value and motor  
load determine the speed and direction of rotation.  
‹When the torque is controlled, the upper limit of  
frequency refers to the minimum value among the  
maximum frequency , the frequency limiter (upper limiter)  
value, and 120 Hz. Maintain the frequency at least  
one-tenth of the base frequency because torque control  
performance deteriorates at lower frequencies.  
‹If the operation command goes off during a torque  
control operation, the operation is switched to speed  
control and the motor decelerates-to-stop. At this time,  
the torque control function does not operate.  
A too large frequency reduction rate is may temporarily  
increase the regeneration energy from the load and  
invoke the overvoltage protective function. Conversely,  
a rate that is too small extends the operation time of the  
current limiting function and may invoke the inverter  
overload protective function.  
H15  
Auto-restart (Holding DC voltage)  
‹This function is for when 2 (deceleration-to-stop at power  
failure) or 3 (operation continuation) is set to "F14  
Restart after momentary power failure (operation  
selection)." Either function starts a control operation if  
the main circuit DC voltage drops below the set operation  
continuation level.  
‹This function cannot be used when the motor 2 is  
selected.  
‹This function cannot be used for FRN-P11S.  
The malfunction may be occurred  
when the set torque is mistaken. (up  
H 1 5 H O L D  
Setting range 230 V series: 200 to 300V  
V
to  
upper  
frequency,  
maximum  
WARNING  
460 V series: 400 to 600V  
frequency or 120Hz)  
as accident may result.  
‹When power supply voltage to the inverter is high,  
control can be stabilized even under an excessive load  
by raising the operation continuation level. However,  
when the level is too high, this function activates during  
normal operation and causes unexpected motion.  
Please contact Fuji electric when changing the initial  
value.  
H19  
Active drive  
‹This function automatically extends accelerating time  
against acceleration operation of 60 seconds or longer to  
prevent an inverter trip resulting from a temperature rise  
in inverter due to overcurrent.  
H16  
Auto-restart (OPR command selfhold time)  
H
1
9
A U  
T
R
E
D
‹As the power to an external operation circuit (relay  
sequence) and the main power to the inverter is  
generally cut off at a power failure, the operation  
command issued to the inverter is also cut off. This  
function sets the time an operation command is to be  
held in the inverter. If a power failure lasts beyond the  
self-hold time, power-off is assumed, automatic restart  
mode is released, and the inverter starts operation at  
normal mode when power is applied again. (This time  
can be considered the allowable power failure time.)  
Set value 0: Inactive  
1: Active  
(When the active drive function is activated, the  
acceleration time is three times the selected time.)  
H
1
6
S
E
L
F
H
O
L
D
T
Setting range: 0.0 to 30.0 seconds, 999  
When "999" is set, an operation command is held (i.e.,  
considered a momentary power failure) while control power  
in the inverter is being established or until the main circuit  
DC voltage is about 100Vdc.  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H20  
PID control (Mode select)  
H21  
PID control (Feedback signal)  
～
～
This function selects the feedback amount input terminal  
and electrical specifications of the terminal. Select a value  
from the table below according to sensor specifications.  
H25  
PID control(Feedback filter)  
‹PID control detects the amount of control (feedback  
amount) from a sensor of the control target, then  
compares it with the target value (e.g., reference  
temperature). If the values differ, this function performs a  
control to eliminate the deviation. In other words, this  
control matches the feedback amount with the target  
value.  
This function can be used for flow control, pressure control,  
temperature control, and other process controls.  
Target  
value  
H
2
1
F
B
S
I
G N A  
L
Set value Descriptions  
0
1
2
3
Control terminal 12, forward operation (0 to  
10V voltage input)  
Control terminal C1, forward operation (4 to  
20mA current input)  
Control terminal 12, reverse operation (10  
to 0V voltage input)  
Control terminal C1, reverse operation (20  
to 4mA current input)  
Drive  
section  
Control  
target  
+
-
+
P
+
+
I
D
Feedback amount  
100%  
Feedback amount  
‹Forward or reverse operations can be selected for PID  
controller output. This enables motor revolutions to be  
faster or lower according to PID controller output  
‹This function cannot be used when the motor 2 is  
selected.  
H 2 0 P  
I
D
M O D E  
Set value 0: No operation  
1: Forward operation  
2: Reverse operation  
Inverter output  
0%  
0V  
4mA  
10V  
20mA  
Input  
Only positive values can be input for this feedback amount  
of PID control. Negative values (e.g., 0 to -10V, -10 to 0V)  
cannot be input, thereby the function cannot be used for a  
reverse operation by an analog signal.  
frequency  
Maximum  
frequency  
0
0%  
100%  
PID output  
‹The target value can be entered using F01, "Frequency  
setting 1," or directly from the keypad panel. Select any  
terminal of Terminals X1 (E01) to X9 (E09) and set value  
11 (frequency setting switching).  
For entry from F01, "Frequency setting 1," input an OFF  
signal to the selected terminal. For direct entry from the  
keypad panel, turn on the selected terminal.  
‹For the target value and feedback amount, the process  
amount can be displayed according to the values set in  
E40, "Display coefficient A," and E41, "Display  
coefficient B."  
Display  
Display coefficient A  
Display coefficient B  
Target value or  
feedback amount  
0%  
100%  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H22  
H23  
H24  
PID control (P-gain)  
PID control (I-gain)  
PID control (D-gain)  
‹D operation  
An operation where the operation amount (output  
frequency) is proportional to the deviation differential is  
called a D operation, which outputs an operation amount  
as the deviation differential and, therefore, is capable of  
responding to sudden changes.  
‹These functions are not generally used alone but are  
combined like P control, PI control, PD control, and PID  
control.  
‹P operation  
Operation using an operation amount (output frequency)  
proportional to deviation is called P operation, which  
outputs an operation amount proportional to deviation,  
Time  
though it cannot eliminate deviation alone.  
Deviation  
Time  
H
2
4
D
-
G A  
I
N
Operation  
amount  
Setting range: 0.00 (Inactive), 0.01 to 10.0 seconds  
"H24 D-gain" is used as a parameter to determine the  
effect of a D operation. A longer differentiation time  
causes vibration by P operation quickly attenuating at the  
occurrence of deviation. Excessive differentiation time  
could cause vibration. Shortening the differentiation  
time reduces attenuation at the occurrence of deviation.  
‹PI control  
P operation alone does not remove deviation completely.  
P + I control (where I operation is added to P operation)  
is normally used to remove the remaining deviation. PI  
control always operates to eliminate deviation even when  
the target value is changed or there is a constant  
H
2
2
P
-
G A  
I
N
Setting range: 0.01 to 10.0 times  
P (gain) is the parameter that determines the response  
level for the deviation of P operation. Although an  
increase in gain speeds up response, an excessive gain  
causes vibration, and a decrease in gain delays response.  
The value "1" is the P(gain) that is when the maximum  
frequency 100% at deviation 100%.  
Response  
disturbance.  
When  
I
operation is strengthened,  
however, the response for rapidly changing deviation  
deteriorates. P operation can also be used individually  
for loads containing an integral element.  
‹ PD control  
If deviation occurs under PD control, an operation  
amount larger than that of D operation alone occurs  
rapidly and prevents deviation from expanding. For a  
small deviation, P operation is restricted. When the  
load contains an integral element, P operation alone may  
allow responses to vibrate due to the effect of the integral  
element, in which case PD control is used to attenuate  
the vibration of P operation and stabilize responses. In  
other words, this control is applied to loads in processes  
without a braking function.  
Time  
‹ I operation  
An operation where the change speed of the operation  
amount (output frequency) is proportional to the  
deviation is called an I operation. An I operation  
outputs an operation amount as the integral of deviation  
and, therefore, has the effect of matching the control  
amount (feedback amount) to the target value (e.g., set  
frequency), though it deteriorates response for significant  
changes in deviation.  
‹PID control  
PID control combines the P operation, the I operation  
which removes deviation, and the D operation which  
suppresses vibration.  
This control achieves  
deviation-free, accurate, and stable responses.  
‹Adjusting PID set value  
Adjust the PID value while monitoring the response  
waveform on an oscilloscope or other instrument if  
possible. Proceed as follows:  
Time  
-Increase the value of "H22 P-gain" without generating  
vibration.  
- Decrease the value of "H23 I-gain" without generating  
vibration.  
H
2
3
I
-
G A  
I
N
- Increase the value of "H24 D-gain" without generating  
vibration.  
Setting range: 0.0 (Inactive), 0.1 to 3600 seconds  
"H23 I-gain" is used as a parameter to determine the effect  
of I operation. A longer integration time delays response  
and weakens resistance to external elements. A shorter  
integration time speeds up response, but an integration  
time that is too short causes vibration.  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Internal resistance of  
PTC thermistor  
-To suppress vibration with a frequency roughly equivalent  
to the value "H24 D-gain," decrease the value of H24. If  
there is residual vibration with 0.0, decrease the value of  
"H22 P-gain."  
Before  
Rp2  
adjustment  
Rp1  
After  
adjustment  
Alarm  
Temperature  
temperature  
Time  
The figure in "H26 PTC thermistor (Mode select)," shows  
that resistor 250Ω and the thermistor (resistance value  
Rp) are connected in parallel. Hence, voltage Vc1  
(Level) at terminal [C1] can be calculated by using the  
following formula.  
H25  
PID control (Feedback filter)  
‹This filter is for feedback signal input from terminal [12]  
or [C1]. This filter stabilizes operation of the PID control  
250・Rp  
250 + Rp  
system.  
deteriorates response.  
A set value that is too large, however,  
Vc1 =  
×1［0 V］  
250・Rp  
1000 +  
250 + Rp  
H
2
5
F
B
F
I
L
T
E
R
The operation level can be set by bringing Rp in the Vc1  
calculation formula into the following range.  
Rp1 < Rp < Rp2  
Setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 seconds  
H26 PTC thermistor (Mode select)  
To obtain Rp easily, use the following formula.  
Rp1 + Rp2  
Rp =  
［Ω］  
‹Set this function active when the motor has a PTC  
thermistor for overheat protection  
2
H
2
6
P
T
C
M O D  
E
H28  
Droop operation  
Set value 0: Inactive  
1: Active  
‹Connect the PTC thermistor as shown in the figure  
below.  
Turn on switch “PTC” on the control PCB.  
The trip mode is activated by “OH2:External thermal  
relay tripped.”  
When two or more motors drive a single machine, a higher  
load is placed on the motor rotating the fastest. Droop  
operation achieves a good load balance by applying  
drooping characteristics to speed against load variations.  
Auto tuning(P04: 2) should be done to use this function.  
This function cannot be used when the motor 2 is selected.  
The drooping speed at constant torque is set.  
Set value : -9.9Hz to 0.0Hz  
13  
DC10V  
PTC  
H
2
8
D R O O P  
ON OFF  
1k Ohom  
Characteristics of the motor  
When droop operation  
is active  
C1  
Setting value of |H28|  
OH2  
Comparator  
Torque  
When droop operation  
is inactive  
Resistor  
250 Ohom  
PTC  
thermistor  
H27  
(Level)  
Rated torque  
(drive)  
11  
Freq. setting  
Speed  
0V  
0
H27  
PTC thermistor (Level)  
Setting value of |H28|  
Rated torque  
(brake)  
‹The voltage input to terminal [C1] is compared to the set  
voltage (Level). When the input voltage is equal to or  
greater than the set voltage (Level), "H26 PTC thermistor  
(Mode select)," starts.  
Acc/Dec calculation  
Freq.  
setting  
value  
+
+
Output  
freq.  
H
2
7
P
T
C
L
E
V
E
L
+
+
Setting range: 0.00 to 5.00V  
‹The PTC thermistor has its own alarm temperature. The  
internal resistance value of the thermistor largely change  
at the alarm temperature. The operation (voltage) level  
is set using this change in the resistance value.  
H28 Droop freq.  
P09 Slip compensation freq.  
Torque calculation  
+ : drive  
- : brake  
τ
Feedback amount  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
‹This function sets data length.  
H30  
Serial link (Function select)  
H
3
5
L
E N G T H  
‹The link function (communication function) provides  
RS-485 (provided as standard) and bus connections  
(optional).  
Setting range:  
0
Set value  
Data length  
8 bit  
The serial link function includes:  
0
1) Monitoring (data monitoring, function data check)  
2) Frequency setting  
3) Operation command  
‹This function sets the parity bit.  
(FWD, REV, and other commands for digital input)  
4)Write function data  
H
3
6
P A R  
I
T
Y
Setting range: 0 to 2  
H
3
0
L
I
N K  
F U N C  
Set value  
Parity bit  
None  
Even  
Setting range: 0 to 3  
0
1
2
Communication can be enabled and disabled by a digital  
input. This function sets the serial link function when  
communication is enabled.  
Odd  
Set value  
Frequency  
command  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Operation  
command  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
‹This function sets the stop bit.  
T O P  
Setting range: 0, 1  
H
3
7
S
B
I
T
S
0
1
2
3
Set value  
Stop bit  
2 bit  
1 bit  
0
1
The data monitoring and function data write functions are  
always enabled. Disabling communication using digital  
input brings about the same result as when "0" is set to this  
function. When the bus option is installed, this setting  
selects the function of the option and the RS-485 interface  
is restricted to monitoring and writing function data.  
The stop bit is automatically configured by the value of the  
parity bit. For parity “NONE” the stop bit is 2bits. For  
parity “EVEN” or “ODD” the stop bit is 1 bit.  
‹In a system where the local station is always accessed  
within a specific time, this function detects that access  
was stopped due to an open-circuit or other fault and  
invokes an Er 8 trip.  
H31  
RS-485 (Address)  
～
～
H
3
8
N O  
R E S  
t
H39  
RS-485 (Response interval)  
Setting range: 0 (No detection)  
1 to 60 seconds  
These functions set the conditions of RS-485 Modbus-RTU  
communication.  
upstream device.  
protocol.  
Set the conditions according to the  
Refer to technical manual for the  
‹This function sets the time from when a request is issued  
from the upstream device to when a response is  
returned.  
‹This function sets the station address of RTU.  
H
3
1
4
8
5
A D R E S S  
H
3
9
I
N T E R V A L  
Setting range: 1 to 247  
Setting range: 0.00 to 1.00 second  
‹This function sets processing at communication error and  
sets the error processing timer value.  
H
3
2 M O D E  
O N  
E R  
Setting range: 0 to 3  
Set value  
0
Processing at communication error  
Immediate Er 8 trip (forced stop)  
Continue operation within timer time, Er8 trip  
after timer time.  
1
Continue operation and effect retry within timer  
time, then invoke an Er8 trip if  
a
2
3
communication error occurs. If an error does  
not occur, continue operation.  
Continue operation.  
H
3
3
T
I
M E R  
Setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 seconds  
‹This function sets the baud rate.  
H
3
4
B A U D  
R A T  
E
Setting range: 0 to 3  
Set value  
Baud rate  
0
1
2
3
19200 bit/s  
9600 bit/s  
4800 bit/s  
2400 bit/s  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Motor 2 (A:Altemative Motor Parameters)  
Maximum frequency2  
A11  
A01  
Motor 2 (Capacity)  
‹This function sets the capacity of motor 2. This function  
operates the same as "P02 Motor 1 (Capacity)." For  
details, see the explanation for P02. However, the  
related motor data functions change to "A12 Motor 2  
(Rated current)," "A15 Motor 2 (No-load current)," "A16  
Motor 2 (%R1 setting)," and "A17 Motor 2 (%X setting)."  
‹This function sets the maximum frequency for motor 2  
output by the inverter. This function operates the same  
as "F03 Maximum frequency 1." For details, see the  
explanation for F03.  
A
0
1
M A X  
H
z
-
2
A02  
Base frequency 2  
A
1
1
M 2  
-
C
A P  
‹This function sets the maximum output frequency in the  
constant-torque area of motor 2 (i.e., output frequency at  
rated output voltage). This function operates the same  
as "F04 Base frequency 1." For details, see the  
explanation for F04.  
A12  
Motor 2 (Rated current)  
‹This function sets the rated current of motor 2. This  
function operates the same as "P03 Motor 1 (Rated  
current)." For details, see the explanation for P03.  
A
1
2
M 2  
-
I
r
A
0
2
B A S  
E
H
z
-
2
A13  
Motor 2 (Tuning)  
A03  
Rated voltage 2  
‹This function sets the auto tuning of motor 2. This  
function operates the same as "P04 Motor 1 (Tuning)."  
For details, see the explanation for P04.  
‹This function sets the rated value of voltage output to  
motor 2. This function operates the same as "F05  
Rated voltage 1." For details, see the explanation for  
F05.  
A
1
3
M 2  
T
U N  
1
A
0
3
R A  
T
E
D
V
2
A14  
Motor 2 (On-line tuning)  
A04  
Maximum voltage 2  
‹This function sets the online tuning of motor 2. This  
function operates the same as "P05 Motor 1 (On-line  
tuning)." For details, see the explanation for P05.  
‹This function sets the maximum value of the inverter  
output voltage of motor 2. This function operates the  
same as "F06 Maximum voltage 1." For details, see the  
explanation for F06.  
A
1
4
M 2  
T
U N  
2
A15  
Motor 2 (No-load current)  
A
0
4
M A X  
V
-
2
‹This function sets the no-load current of motor 2. This  
function operates the same as "P06 Motor 1 (No-load  
current)." For details, see the explanation for P06.  
A05  
Torque boost 2  
‹This function sets the torque boost function of motor 2.  
This function operates the same as "F09 Torque boost  
1." For details, see the explanation for F09.  
A
1
5
M 2  
-
I
o
A16  
A17  
Motor 2 (%R1 setting)  
Motor 2 (%X setting)  
A
0
5
T
R Q  
B O O  
S
T
2
A06  
A07  
A08  
Electronic thermal overload relay 2 (Select)  
Electronic thermal overload relay 2 (Level)  
Electronic thermal overload relay 2 (Thermal time constant)  
‹This function sets %R1 and %X of motor 2. This  
function operates the same as "P07 Motor 1 (%R1  
setting)," and "P08 Motor 1 (%X setting)." For details,  
see the explanations for P07 and P08.  
‹This function sets the function of the electronic thermal  
overload relay for motor 2. This function operates the  
same as F10 to F12, "Electronic thermal overload relay  
1." For details, see the explanations for F10 to F12.  
A
A
1
1
6
7
M 2  
M 2  
-
-
% R  
% X  
1
A18  
Slip compensation control 2  
A
A
A
0
0
0
6
7
8
E
O
T
L C  
L
T
L
R N  
O L  
2
‹This function sets the amount of slip compensation for  
motor 2. This function operates the same as "P09 Slip  
compensation control." For details, see the explanation  
for P09.  
E
V
E
L
S
2
T
I
M E  
C N  
2
A09  
Torque vector control 2  
A
1
8
S
L
I
P
C O M P  
2
‹This function sets the torque vector function of motor 2.  
This function operates the same as "F42 Torque vector  
control 1." For details, see the explanation for F42.  
Set value : 0.00Hz to 15.00Hz  
‹Calculate the amount of slip compensation using the  
following formula:  
Slip compenssation amount  
A
0
9
T
R Q V  
E
C
T
O R  
2
Slippage[r / min]  
A10  
Number of motor-2 poles  
= Base frequency×  
［Hz］  
Synchronous speed[r / min]  
Slippage = Synchronous speed-Rated speed  
‹This function sets the number of poles of motor 2 to be  
driven. This function operates the same as "P01 Number  
of motor-1 poles." For details, see the explanation for P01.  
A
1
0
M 2  
P
O L  
E
S
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U : User function  
U01  
Maximum compensation frequency during braking torque limit  
- At acceleration,  
U02 + U03  
‹This function becomes effective, when the torque limit  
(brake) is used. The inverter controls to increase the  
output frequency so that torque calculations do not  
exceed the torque limit (brake) setting ( F41 or E17).  
(When F41 or E17 is set to 999, it becomes invalid.)  
This function sets the increment of upper limit for  
output frequency.  
When the regeneration avoidance is selected, the  
resurrection ability can be improved by raising the  
increment of upper limit. However, the output frequency  
of the inverter is limited at the frequency limit(high):  
F15.  
or,  
| f 1 − f 0 |≥ f max×  
100  
- At deceleration,  
U04 + U05  
| f 1 − f 0 |≥ f max×  
100  
f 1 − f 0 U02 + U03  
tacc = (  
+
)×Ta  
)×Td  
f max  
100  
U04 + U05  
100  
f 1− f 0  
f max  
tdec = (  
+
U 0 1 U S E R  
0 1  
linear Acceleration and  
deceleration clause  
S-shape clause  
Setting range : 0 to 65535  
- At acceleration,  
The set value "15" becomes 1Hz.  
(The set value "1" becomes 1/15Hz)  
U02 + U03  
or,  
| f 1 − f 0 |< f max×  
100  
U02  
1st S-shape level at acceleration (start)  
2nd S-shape level at acceleration (stop)  
1st S-shape level at deceleration (start)  
2nd S-shape level at deceleration (stop)  
- At deceleration,  
U04 + U05  
U03  
U04  
U05  
| f 1 − f 0 |< f max ×  
100  
⎧
⎨
⎩
⎫
⎬
⎭
f 1 − f 0  
f max  
100  
U02 + U03  
⎛
⎜
⎞
⎟
tacc = 2 ×  
tdec = 2 ×  
×
×
×
×
×Ta  
× Td  
U02 + U03  
100  
⎝
⎠
‹When "2" is set in the function code: H07, both  
curvilinear acceleration and deceleration ranges of  
S-shape can be set up arbitrarily.  
The range is the ratio for maximum output frequency 1  
(F03) or 2 (A01) .  
⎧
⎪
⎫
⎪
f 1 − f 0  
f max  
100  
U04 + U05  
⎛
⎜
⎞
⎟
⎨
⎬
U04 + U05  
100  
⎪
⎩
⎪
⎭
⎝
⎠
U08  
U09  
Initial value of main DC link capacitor  
U 0 2 U S E R  
U 0 3 U S E R  
U 0 4 U S E R  
0 2  
0 3  
0 4  
0 5  
Measured value of main DC link capacitor  
‹Data for the life expectancy judgment of the capacitor  
in main circuit is stored in this function. The electrical  
discharge time of the capacitor can be measured  
automatically, and the time of part replacement can be  
confirmed according to the decrement rate from the  
factory shipment.  
U 0 5 U S E R  
Setting range : 1 to 50%  
U 0 8 U S E R  
0 8  
0 9  
Output frequency  
f[Hz]  
U 0 9 U S E R  
Setting range : 0 to 65535  
f1  
‹The electrical discharge time which is measured in the  
factory shipment is set to function code U08 as a initial  
value. This value is different in each inverter.  
‹The electrical discharge time of the capacitor is  
measured automatically, when the power supply is  
turned off. And, the result is stored in function code  
U09.  
When the power supply is turned off under the  
conditions as follows, decrement rate (%) to the factory  
shipment can be measured.  
U03  
U04  
U02  
U05  
f0  
0
t[s]  
tacc  
tdec  
‹100% value of this function means maximum  
frequency (fmax) .  
Conditions: which has been described to "*Estimation  
of life expectancy based on  
maintenance  
Acceleration time “tacc” and deceleration time “tdec”  
of upper figure become longer than the linear  
acceleration time and deceleration time. When the set  
acceleration time(F07，E10，E12，E14) is assumed to  
be “Ta” and deceleration time(F08，E11，E13，E15) is  
assumed to be “Td”, “tacc” and “tdec” can be  
calculated by the following expressions.  
information" of the instruction manual "8-2 periodical  
inspection".  
U09  
The result of  
is displayed in CAP=xxx.x%  
× 100  
U08  
of maintenance information. 85% becomes a standard  
at the part replacement time.  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
influenced significantly by the temperature. Refer to  
the manual "8-2 regular check" for the maintenance.  
◆When you make measurement of capacity and life  
expectancy judgment of capacitor with an actual  
operating condition, set the value “30” to the function  
code “E20 to E24”. And write the measurement result  
U09 with an actual operating condition to the function  
code U08 as an initial value as early as possible since  
inverter operation starts.  
However, life judgment by the measurement result  
cannot be performed in case of 1 and 2 as below.  
1. During inverter operation, a power supply is turned  
off and it stops.  
U 1 1 U S E R  
1 1  
Setting range : 0 to 65535 hours  
◆ Clear integrated operating time to 0 hour after  
replacing the cooling fan.  
Related Functions  
E20 to E24  
(Set value：30)  
2. Cooling fan ON/OFF control is used.  
(function code : H 06= 1)  
U13  
Magnetize current vibration damping gain  
Turn off the power supply of inverter, on the conditions  
at which the inverter has stopped, and a cooling fan is  
operated. It is not necessary to remove an option card  
and the connection with a control terminal.  
As for this "measurement with an actual operating  
condition", carry out this measurement about 10 times  
to minimize the error of a measurement result, and  
make the average value into an initial value.  
Moreover, when there is 10% or more of change from  
the last measured value, measurement is disregarded  
in order to prevent incorrect measurement. Renewal of  
a display is not carried out.  
◆Adjust if Magnetize current vibration was occurred in  
the inverter output current .  
U 1 3 U S E R  
1 3  
Setting range: 0 to 32767  
◆Adjust the value from 0 to 2048 as a standard value.  
Vibration damping gain becomes 100% in set value  
4096.  
U15  
Slip compensation filter time constant  
◆The filter time constant of Slip compensation is set.  
◆Set measured value U09 to the initial value U08 after  
exchanging capacitors.  
U 1 5 U S E R  
1 5  
Setting range : 0 to 32767  
Related Functions  
E20 to E24  
(Set value：30)  
◆Calculate the filter time constant using the following  
formula.  
216  
U10  
PC board capacitor powered on time  
Filter time constant =  
[ms]  
"U15" set value  
◆The accumulation time of the capacitor on PC board  
are displayed. The accumulation time of the control  
power supply multiplied by the life expectancy  
coefficient defined by the temperature inside the  
inverter are displayed. Hence, the hours displayed  
may not agree with the actual operating hours. Since  
the accumulation time are counted by unit hours,  
power input for less than one hour will be disregarded.  
The accumulation time are displayed in TCAP=xxxxxh  
of maintenance information. The standard at the  
replacement time is 61,000h. Refer to the manual "8-2  
regular check" for the maintenance.  
◆The response time of the control slows because the  
filter time constant is enlarged when a value is set to  
smaller. However, system becomes steady.  
◆The response time of the control quickens because the  
filter time constant becomes smaller, when a set value  
is enlarged.  
Note ： Response time quickens when a set value is  
enlarged. Therefore, there is a possibility that the  
output frequency becomes unstable. Please adjust  
a set value to smaller than factory setting value.  
U23  
Integral gain of continuous operation at power failure  
U 1 0 U S E R  
1 0  
U24  
Proportional gain of continuous operation at power failure  
Setting range： 0 to 65535 hours  
◆This function becomes effective, when function code  
F14 (Restart mode after momentary power failure) set  
value is 2 or 3.  
◆Clear the accumulation time to 0 hour, after replacing  
the PC board on which capacitors are equipped with.  
There is also PC Board without the capacitor  
(ex :Control circuit board) not to be cleared the  
accumulation time. For details, contact Fuji Electric.  
Related Functions  
U 2 3 U S E R  
2 3  
2 4  
U 2 4 U S E R  
Setting range : 0～65535  
E20 to E24  
(Set value：30)  
◆In case of F14 set value : 2.  
When the operation continuation level (H15) is  
reached, deceleration to a stop occurs. The DC  
voltage of the main circuit sharpens the deceleration  
slope, and the inverter collects the inertia energy of the  
load to maintain the DC bus voltage and controls the  
motor until it stops, so that the undervoltage protective  
function is not activated.  
The deceleration slope is adjusted with U23 and U24.  
However, the deceleration operation time never  
becomes longer than the set deceleration time.  
U11  
Cooling fan operating time  
◆The integrated operating hours of the cooling fan are  
displayed. Since the integrated hours are counted by  
unit hours, power input for less than one hour will be  
disregarded. The integrated hours are displayed in  
TFAN=xxxxxh of maintenance information.  
The standard at the replacement time is 40,000h in the  
inverter of 5HP or less. The standard at the  
replacement time is 25,000h in the inverter of 7.5HP or  
more. (Estimated life expectancy of a cooling-fan at  
inverter ambient temperature of 40 degree.)  
The displayed value should be considered as a rough  
estimate because the actual life of a cooling fan is  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
◆In case of F14 set value : 3.  
Braking - resistor function select  
[30HP or less is corresponded]  
U59  
The output frequency is lowered by the control by  
which the DC voltage of the main circuit is kept  
constant from the regeneration energy, so that the  
inverter may continue operation when momentary  
power failure occurs.  
The response is adjusted with U23 and U24 at this  
time.  
◆Calculate the integral gain using the following formula.  
◆When function code F13 (electronic thermal)is set to 2,  
both the type of the braking resistor and connection  
circuit are set. Factory setting is set to nominal applied  
resistor and the number of resistor is one. When the  
power load capacities of resistor are increased, set the  
factory setting properly  
U 5 9 U S E R  
5 9  
216  
Integral gain =  
Setting range : 0 to A8 (HEX)  
[ms]  
"U 23" set value  
Setting of ten’s digit ( type selection )  
Output frequency  
command  
Output frequency  
command  
Duty  
|ｆ＊＊  
|
|ｆ＊  
|
Resistance  
Set  
Capacity cycle  
[
Ω
]
value  
Type braking resistor  
[W]  
[%ED]  
|ｆ＊  
|
PI  
H15  
Set value  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
Standard applied resistor  
DB0.75-2C  
DB2.2-2C  
DB3.7-2C  
DB5.5-2C  
DB7.5-2C  
DB0.75-4C  
DB2.2-4C  
DB3.7-4C  
DB5.5-4C  
-
-
10%  
calculator  
0
100  
40  
33  
20  
15  
200  
160  
130  
80  
200  
400  
400  
800  
900  
200  
400  
400  
800  
900  
I gain：U23  
P gain：U24  
DC voltage of the  
main circuit  
U48  
Input phase loss protection  
◆This function selects operation of input phase loss or  
power supply unbalance protection.  
U 4 8 U S E R  
4
8
Setting range : 0 to 2  
DB7.5-4C  
60  
Set value  
Operation  
Setting of unit’s digit (connection circuit selection)  
0
1
2
Active (without reactor (ACR/DCR))  
Active (with reactor (ACR/DCR))  
Inactive  
*1)  
Duty  
cycle  
Power  
consumption per  
resistance  
Braking-resistor  
Synthetic  
resistance  
Use  
number  
[
Ω
]
Connection circuit  
[%ED]  
[comparatively]  
When "2" is set to U48, protection  
operation of the inverter to input phase  
loss or power supply voltage unbalance  
does not work. If you use it as it is,  
there is a possibility of damaging an  
inverter.  
0
1
1
10%  
R
100%  
Ｐ
ＤＢ  
2
20%  
2R  
50%  
Ｐ
Ｐ
Ｐ
Ｐ
Ｐ
Ｐ
Ｐ
ＤＢ  
ＤＢ  
ＤＢ  
ＤＢ  
ＤＢ  
ＤＢ  
！
△
CAUTION  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
4
3
6
9
4
8
20% (1/2)R  
50%  
25%  
33%  
17%  
11%  
25%  
12.5%  
Failure may result.  
40%  
30%  
R
U49  
RS-485 protocol selection  
◆The protocol of RS-485 communication is changed.  
3R  
U 4 9 U S E R  
4
9
50% (3/2)R  
Set value : 0, 1  
Set value  
Operation  
50%  
40%  
50%  
R
0
1
FGI-bus  
Modbus-RTU  
4R  
2R  
ＤＢ  
ＤＢ  
Instruction manual and specifications are prepared  
about communicative details. Contact Fuji Electric.  
Ｐ
U56  
Speed agreement /PG error(Detection width)  
Speed agreement /PG error (Detection timer)  
PG error selection  
1) It is limited by the %ED value of the braking transistor  
inside the inverter.  
U57  
U58  
◆These functions are effective for the option card  
( OPC-G11S-PG，-PG2，-PGA ).  
Refer to each manual.  
U 5 6 U S E R  
U 5 7 U S E R  
U 5 8 U S E R  
5 6  
5 7  
5 8  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
◆If function code U60 is set to “0”, braking torque is kept  
to about “0%” under acceleration, deceleration,  
constant speed state. Output frequency is controlled in  
correspond to the rapid change in motor load to  
prevent OU alarm. Deceleration time becomes longer  
than the set deceleration time (F08).  
◆In case of setting value U60:1, Compared with setting  
value "0", it controls not to perform torque limit  
operation only at the deceleration time, but to prevent  
the rise of the DC voltage of the main circuit, and  
avoid OU alarm.  
CAUTION  
！
△
◆Set the function code both “ F13” and “U59 ” before  
operating the inverter, and don’t change the functions  
during operation. The integrated thermal data are  
cleared immediately, when function code “ F13” or  
“U59 ” are changed. The overheat protection of  
resistor becomes invalid. When the function code  
“ F13” or “U59 ” are changed in the state where  
temperature rose, the overheat protection of resistor  
becomes invalid, too.  
At this time, although deceleration time becomes  
longer than a setting value of F08, it becomes shorter  
than setting value"0" of U60. It may occur OU alarm, if  
load changes rapidly during deceleration.  
◆As there is a possibility of damaging the inverter, the  
resistor value less than standard applied value should  
not be available.  
U61  
Voltage detect offset and gain adjustment  
◆Make into one kind the resistor used as combination  
conditions for a braking resistor, and connect it so that  
the electric power is consumed equally in each  
resistor.  
◆When the resistor which is instead of DB***-2C/4C are  
used as External braking resistor, function code F13  
should be set to “0”.  
◆40HP or more :  
It adjusts, only when a print board is replaced by  
maintenance, etc. If not necessary, do not use this  
function.  
U 6 1 U S E R  
6 1  
Set value : 0, 1, 2  
◆When resistor values less than Standard applied  
resistor value is set to the function code, regeneration  
operation is invalid. OU alarm will be occurred.  
◆If connection of resistor and setting value of resistor is  
not corresponded, there is a possibility of damaging  
the resistor and the inverter.  
Inverter  
capacity  
30HP or less  
Operation  
0 : Inactive(fixed)  
0 : Inactive  
40HP or more  
1 : Voltage detect offset adjustment  
2 : Voltage detect gain adjustment  
Failure may result.  
Function for manufacturer  
U59  
[40HP or more is corresponded]  
◆Set the function code in the following procedure.  
If the inverter are operated without this adjustment  
after replacing the PC board, normal operation may  
not be able to be performed.  
This function is available to release the overheating alarm  
(OH1) at the DC fan broken.  
U 5 9 U S E R  
5 9  
Set value : 00, 01  
(Offset adjustment)  
1) Confirm that the main power supply is turned ON,  
the motor wiring are connected and the motor has  
stopped (inverter operation command is OFF).  
2) When the data of U61 is changed to "1", and the  
FUNC/DATA key is ON, the offset self adjustment is  
started. The display of “storing" of the keypad  
panel disappears several seconds later. When the  
set value returns to "0", adjustment is completed.  
If the main power supply is turned OFF, while  
outputting alarm, motor is driving, coast-to-stop  
command(BX) is ON and this adjustment is started,  
the inverter becomes “Er7:TUNING ERROR".  
In this case, start the adjustment after removing the  
above-mentioned factor.  
Set value  
Operation  
OH1 alarm at DC fan broken  
No alarm at DC fan broken  
00  
01  
CAUTION  
！
△
◆It causes overheating trip (OH1,OH3) in the inverter,  
and the life time decrease such as electrolytic  
capacitors on the PCB in the unit by a partial rise  
temperature, and there is a possibility to the worst unit  
damage when left with the DC fan for an internal stir  
stops.  
Be sure that set it to the fan exchange and the factory  
setting value again promptly after the DC fan for an  
internal stir stops. (Contact the fan exchange  
procedure Fuji Electric.)  
(Gain adjustment)  
1) Drive the motor in an arbitrary frequency of about  
10 to 60Hz(However, constant speed) after  
Failure may result.  
executing  
the  
above-mentioned  
offset  
adjustment.(U61:1)  
At this time, gain adjustment is available unrelated  
to the load state.  
U60  
Regeneration avoidance at deceleration  
◆This function is available, when torque limit (brake) of  
F41( or E17) is set to “0%”.  
2) When the data of U61 is changed to "2", and the  
FUNC/DATA key is ON, the gain self adjustment is  
started. The display of “storing" of the keypad  
panel disappears several seconds to 30 seconds  
later. When the set value returns to "0", adjustment  
is completed.  
U 6 0 U S E R  
6 0  
Set value : 0, 1  
Set value  
Operation  
Torque limit operation  
（for high response use）  
OU alarm avoidance operation  
If inverter is not operated, this adjustment is not  
available.  
0
1
（
for only deceleration or Large inertia use  
）
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U89  
Motor overload memory retention  
◆This is Motor overload memory (Electrical thermal O/L  
relay) retention selection at power up.  
U 8 9 U S E R  
8 9  
Setting range : 0, 1  
Set value  
Inactive  
Operation  
0
When power up the drive, Motor  
overload data is reset.  
Active.  
When power is down, the drive stores  
Motor overload data and use this data  
at next power up.  
1
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Protective Operation  
6-1 List of Protective Operations  
In the event of an abnormality in the inverter, the protective function will activate immediately to trip the inverter, display the  
alarm name on the LED monitor, and the motor coasts-to-a stop. For alarm contents, see Section 6.1.1.  
Table 6.6.1 List of alarm displays and protective functions  
Keypad panel display  
Alarm Name  
Contents of operation  
LED LCD  
OC DURING ACC  
During  
acceleration  
During  
deceleration  
Running at  
constant speed  
If the inverter output current momentarily exceeds the overcurrent  
detection level due to an overcurrent in the motor, or a short-circuit  
or a ground fault in the output circuit, the protective function is  
activated.  
OC1  
OC2  
OC3  
EF  
OC DURING DEC  
OC AT SET SPD  
GROUND FAULT  
Over current  
If a ground fault in the inverter output circuit is detected, the protective function is  
activated (for 40HP or more only). If a ground fault occurs in an inverter rated at  
30HP or less, the inverter is protected by the overcurrent protection. If protection  
against personal injury or property damage is required, install a ground-fault  
protective relay or earth-leakage circuit breaker separately.  
Ground fault  
During  
acceleration  
OV DURING ACC  
OV DURING DEC  
OV AT SET SPD  
UNDERVOLTAGE  
If the DC link circuit voltage of the main circuit exceeds the  
OU1  
OU2  
OU3  
LU  
overvoltage detection level (230V series: 400V DC,460V series:  
800V DC) due to an increase in the regenerating current from the  
motor, the output is shut down.  
However, protection against inadvertent overvoltage apply (e.g.,  
high-voltage line) may not be provided.  
During  
deceleration  
Overvoltage  
Running at  
constant speed  
Undervoltage  
If the DC link circuit voltage of the main circuit falls below the undervoltage detection  
level (230V series: 200V DC,460V series: 400V DC) due to a lowered power supply,  
the output is shut down. If function code F14 (Restart after momentary power failure)  
is selected, an alarm is not displayed. In addition, if the supply voltage falls to a  
level unable to maintain control power, an alarm may not be displayed.  
Input open-phase  
PHASE LOSS  
If the inverter is driven with any one of the three phases connected to L1/R, L2/S and  
L3/T of the main circuit power supply "open", the rectifying diodes or smoothing  
capacitors may be damaged, at such time an alarm is issued and the inverter is  
tripped.  
Lin  
FIN OVERHEAT  
EXT ALARM  
Overheating of heat  
sink  
External alarm  
If the temperature of the heat sink rises due to a cooling fan failure, etc., the  
protective function is activated.  
OH1  
OH2  
If the external alarm contacts of the braking unit, braking resistor or external thermal  
O/L relay are connected to the control circuit terminals (THR), this alarm will be  
actuated according to contact off signal.  
When the PCT thermal protection is activated(H26:1), it operates when the detected  
temperature is increased.  
Inverter internal  
overheating  
OH3 HIGH AMB TEMP  
If the temperature inside the inverter rises due to poor ventilation, etc., the protective  
function is activated.  
Overcurrent of the terminal 13(20mA or more) due to the short circuit between the  
terminal 13 and 11, etc., the protective function is activated.  
Overheating of  
braking resistor  
DBR OVERHEAT  
dbH  
If electronic thermal O/L relay (for braking resistor) function code F13 is selected, the  
protective function is activated to prevent the resistor from burning due to overheating  
following frequent use of the braking resistor.  
Motor 1 overload  
Motor 2 overload  
MOTOR1 OL  
OL1  
The protective function is activated if the motor current exceeds the preset level,  
provided that electronic thermal O/L relay 1 function code F10 has been selected.  
MOTOR2 OL  
OL2  
If the second motor current exceeds the preset level when the operation is switched  
to drive the second motor, the protective function is activated, provided that  
electronic thermal O/L relay 2 of function code A04 is selected.  
Inverter overload  
INVERTER OL  
OLU  
If the output current exceeds the rated overload current, the protective function is  
activated to provide thermal protection against semiconductor element overheating in  
the inverter main circuit.  
Blown fuse  
DC FUSE OPEN  
FUS  
If the fuse in the inverter is blown out following a short-circuit or damage to the  
internal circuit, the protective function is activated (for 40HP or more only).  
MEMORY ERROR  
Er1  
Memory error  
If a memory error occurs, such as missing or invalid data, the protective function is  
activated.  
KEYPD COM ERR  
Er2  
Keypad panel  
communication  
error  
If a communication error or interrupt between the keypad panel and control circuit is  
detected, the protective function is activated.  
CPU error  
CPU ERROR  
Er3  
OPTN COM ERR  
Er4  
If an CPU error occurs due to noise, etc., the protective function is activated.  
Error when using an optional unit  
Option error  
OPTION ERROR  
OPR PROCD ERR  
TUNING ERROR  
Er5  
Er6  
Er7  
Forced stop  
Error when using the forced stop command  
Output wiring error  
If there is an open circuit or a connection error in the inverter output wiring during  
performing auto-tuning, the protective function is activated.  
RS-485  
communication error  
RS-485 COM ERR  
Er8  
If an error occurs when using RS-485, the protective function is activated.  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10ms  
or  
6-2 Alarm Reset  
To release the trip status, enter the reset command  
RESET  
by pressing the  
key on the keypad panel or  
Reset command  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
inputting signal from the terminal (RST) of the control  
terminals after removing the cause of the trip. Since  
the reset command is an edge operation, input a  
command such as !!OFF-ON-OFF!! as shown in  
Fig.6-2-1.  
When releasing the trip status, set the operation  
command to OFF. If the operation command is set  
to ON, inverter will start operation after resetting.  
Keypad panel display  
Normal  
display  
Alarm display  
(Operable)  
ON  
OFF  
Alarm output  
OFF  
Trip  
Fig.6-2-1  
If the alarm reset is activated with the operation signal ON, the inverter will restart suddenly, which  
may be dangerous. To ensure safety, disable the operating signal when releasing the trip status.  
as accident may result.  
！
WARNING  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.Trouble shooting  
7.1 Protective function activation  
(1) Overcurrent  
Overcurrent  
during acceleration  
OC1  
Overcurrent  
during deceleration  
OC2  
Overcurrent  
running at constant speed  
OC3  
Remove the short-circuit  
and ground fault.  
YES  
Are the motor connecting terminals (U, V, W) short-circuited or grounded?  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Reduce the load or increase YES  
the inverter capacity.  
Is the load excessive?  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Can the torque boost  
amount be reduced?  
NO  
Is the torque boost  
correct?  
YES  
YES  
Reduce the torque boost.  
Is the acceleration time  
setting too short  
NO  
compared with the load?  
YES  
Is the deceleration time  
setting too short compared  
with the load?  
NO  
Faulty inverter or error  
due to noise.  
Consult with Fuji Electric.  
YES  
NO  
Has the load changed  
suddenly?  
YES  
YES Can the acceleration time  
setting be prolonged?  
NO  
YES  
Can the deceleration time  
setting be prolonged?  
Prolong time settings.  
NO  
The braking method  
requires inspection.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
Reduce the load or increase  
the inverter capacity.  
Reduce the load or increase  
the inverter capacity.  
(2) Ground fault  
Remove the grounded part.  
YES  
Faulty inverter or error due to noise.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
Is a part in the inverter output  
circuit (cable, motor) grounded?  
Ground fault  
EF  
NO  
Note:The ground fault protective function is provided only for inverter for nominal applied motors rated at 40HP or more.  
(3) Fuse brown  
Possible short-circuit  
within the inverter.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
Fuse brown  
FUS  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(4) Overvoltage  
Overvoltage  
during acceleration  
OU1  
Overvoltage  
during deceleration  
OU2  
Overvoltage  
running at constant speed  
OU3  
Reduce the supply voltage  
to less than the specified  
upper limit.  
NO  
Is the power supply voltage within the specified value?  
YES YES  
YES  
Check the motor and /or  
the terminal(U, V, W)  
is shorted or ground fault.  
YES  
NO  
Is start mode(H09) activated and its start-mode?  
NO  
NO  
Is restart mode after momentary power failure or  
operation switching between line and inverter?  
YES  
NO  
Restart time(H13) is  
set longer.  
NO  
NO  
YES  
Does OU activated when the load is suddenly removed?  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Does the main circuit DC link circuit  
voltage exceed the protection level?  
Faulty inverter  
or error due to noise.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Does OU alarm activate  
when acceleration  
is completed?  
NO  
Can the acceleration  
time be prolonged?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
YES  
YES  
Can the deceleration time be prolonged?  
NO  
Prolong.  
YES  
Reduce.  
Can the moment of load inertia be reduced?  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Consider using  
a braking system  
or DC brake function.  
NO  
Is the braking device or DC brake function in use?  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Inspect the braking method. Contact Fuji Electric.  
(5) Low voltage  
Low voltage  
LU  
Has a (momentary) power YES  
Reset and restart  
operation.  
failure occurred?  
Faulty of inverter control  
circuit or error due  
to noise, etc.  
NO  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
Faulty parts or loose  
connection in the  
power circuit?  
NO  
YES  
NO  
Replace the faulty part  
and repair the connection.  
YES  
Is there a load requiring  
a large starting current  
within the same power  
distribution group?  
Does LU activate when  
the circuit breaker or  
magnetic contactor is  
switched on?  
Is the main circuit DC voltage  
(between P-N) higher than  
the detection level specified  
in Section 6.1.1?  
Is the power supply  
voltage within the  
specified value?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
YES  
YES  
NO  
The inverter may be faulty.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
Modify power distribution system  
to satisfy the specified value.  
Is power transformer  
capacity adequate?  
YES  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(6) Overtemperature at inside air  
(7) External thermal relay tripped  
and overheating at heatsink.  
Overtemperature  
at inside air OH3  
Overheating  
at heatsink OH1  
External thermal relay tripped  
OH2  
YES  
YES  
Is between the control  
Is between the control  
terminals 13-11 closed?  
terminals 13-11 closed?  
NO  
NO  
Is PTC MODE  
H26 enabled?  
Check the temperature of  
Remove the short circuit.  
NO  
the heatsinkusingthealar
information displayed  
YES  
on the keypad panel.  
Is the cooling fan  
for mixing inside air  
rotating?  
NO  
Incorrect motor load or  
inadequate cooling.  
Check the motor side.  
YES  
NO  
Is PTC operating?  
NO  
Check the keypad panel display.  
Display limit or not?  
(40HP or more)  
YES  
30HP or less: 20 degrees C.  
YES(30HPor less)  
(40HP or more: 50 degrees C)  
Faultydetection
NO  
circuit on PCB.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
Is PTC level  
H27 set correctly?  
Set to correct  
value.  
Is the peripheral  
YES  
temperature of the  
inverter –10 degrees C  
Make peripheral  
temperature of the  
inverter to meet  
the specification.  
NO  
or less ?  
Is the external circuit  
(including constants)  
regular?  
NO  
Change to regular  
external circuit.  
YES
YES  
Reduce the load.  
Is the load excessive?  
YES  
NO  
Is the cooling  
NO  
Replace the cooling fan.  
fan rotating?  
Faulty inverter or error  
due to noise, etc.  
YES  
Is the cooling fan  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
for mixing inside air.  
NO  
for mixing inside air  
Replace the cooling fan  
rotating?  
(40HP or more)  
YES(30HP or less)  
passage blocked?  
Remove obstacles.  
YES  
Is the cooling air  
Is data input to  
the control terminals  
THR-X1 to X9?  
Are alarm signals from  
external equipment  
input to the terminals  
and the CM?  
Faulty inverter or error  
due to noise, etc.  
NO  
Is the ambient  
temperature within  
YES  
NO Connect the alarm  
signal contact.  
Contract Fuji Electric.  
the specification ?  
no  
Arrange peripheral  
conditionstomeet
the specification.  
YES  
(8) Inverter unit overload and motor overload  
Is the alarm function  
of the external  
equipment operating  
correctly?  
Remove the cause  
NO  
of alarm function  
Inverter unit  
Motor overload  
OL1, OL2  
activation.  
overload OLU  
YES  
Faulty inverter or error  
due to noise, etc.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
Do the characteristics  
of the electronic thermal NO Connect a thermal  
O/L relay and motor  
overload match?  
O/L relay externally.  
YES  
Is the electronic thermal  
O/L relay setting correct?  
NO  
Set to the correct level  
YES  
Faulty inverter or error  
due to noise, etc.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
NO  
Is the load excessive?  
YES  
Reduce the load or  
increase inverter  
capacity  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(9) Memory error Er1,  
(10) Output wiring error  
Keypad panel communication error Er2,  
CPU error Er3  
Er1,2,3 indicated. Abnormal  
display or indication goes out.  
Output wiring  
error Er7  
Are the braking unit and  
braking resistor connected  
incorrectly?  
Connect  
correctly  
the cable.  
YES  
NO  
Turn the power off then on  
again after the CHARGE lamp  
(CRG) goes off.  
YES  
Is Er7 displayed?  
Is the wiring of CNRXTX(RED)  
correct on the power PCB?  
NO  
Connect  
correctly  
the cable.  
(When DC power supply, connect it to the YES  
R0-T0 side and AC power input is  
connected to the auxilialy power  
input terminal.)  
The trouble part is  
improvement.  
YES  
Did the error occur  
during tuning?  
Is disappeared an  
NO  
error code on  
the LED monitor?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
YES  
NO  
Is there noise  
source around?  
Is Er1 displayed?  
Connect  
YES correctly  
or replace  
Are the braking unit and  
braking resistor connected  
incorrectly?  
YES  
NO  
the cable.  
NO  
Is the auxiliary  
control power input  
terminal used?  
NO  
Faulty inverter or error  
due to noise, etc.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
Faulty inverter or error  
due to noise, etc.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
YES  
Did the power off  
when the function data  
was writing?  
NO  
Connect  
YES correctly  
or replace  
Is the U,V,W terminal  
YES  
wiring not connected  
or is there an open  
circuit?  
the cable.  
Is it possible to  
reset the alarm after  
the initialize by H03?  
NO  
NO  
YES  
Is the keypad panel  
connector loose?  
YES  
Secure  
the connector.  
Inverter is normal.  
Continue operation.  
Inverter may be faulty.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
NO  
Is the operation signal  
YES Do not operation signal OFF  
OFF during  
(11) Input phase loss  
until finishing the auto tuning.  
auto-tuning?  
NO  
Input phase loss  
Lin  
Is it overcurrent limiting  
because of small value of  
acceleration/deceleration  
time (F07/F08)?  
YES Acceleration/Deceleration  
time is longer.  
NO  
Is the inverter ROM No.  
S09000 or more?  
NO  
YES  
Is the coast-to-stop YES  
signal(BX) ON?  
It is OFF.  
Is the setting value of  
input phase loss protection  
(U48) is correct?  
NO  
Set it correct value.  
NO  
YES  
Faulty inverter or  
error due to noise, etc.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
Are all main circuit power  
supply terminals L1/R, L2/S  
and L3/T connected to  
the power supply?  
NO Connect all  
three phases.  
YES  
Are there loose screws  
on the terminal block?  
YES  
YES  
Tightenen the screws  
on the terminal block.  
NO  
Is there a significant  
imbalance voltage  
between phases?  
The power supply is incorrect.  
The inspection of the power supply  
is needed including the wiring.  
NO  
Faulty inverter or error  
due to noise, etc.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
(12) Charging circuit error  
Charging circuit error  
Er7  
Is circuit power supply terminals  
L1/R,L2/S and L3/T supplied the power  
voltage?  
NO  
Input the voltage.  
YES  
Faulty inverter or error  
due to noise, etc.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2 Abnormal motor rotation  
(1) If motor does not rotate  
Charge lamp (CRG)  
lights and LCD monitor  
lights up?  
Are the circuit breaker and  
magnetic contactor on the  
power supply side switched on?  
NO  
NO  
Motor does not rotate.  
Turn on.  
YES  
YES  
Check for problems  
(low voltage,  
an open-phase,  
a loose connection,  
poor contact) and  
remedy accordingly.  
Remove the cause of  
alarm function activation  
and reset the alarm,  
then run the motor.  
Is the LCD monitor  
displaying an alarm  
mode screen?  
Are the voltages  
on the power terminals  
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) normal?  
NO  
NO  
YES  
NO  
YES  
Is operation method  
the keypad panel or  
control terminal input?  
Is a jumper or DC reactor  
connected between  
terminals P1 and P(+)?  
Connect.  
Keypad  
panel  
Control  
terminals  
YES  
If no error is detected,  
continue operation.  
Inverter may be faulty.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
YES  
Are external wiring between  
Does the motor run  
if FWD or REV is  
pressed?  
Was the forward or  
reverse operation  
command given?  
control  
circuit  
terminals  
NO  
NO  
NO
YES Replace the faulty  
switch or relay.  
FWD, REV-CM connected  
correctly?  
NO  
YES  
YES  
NO  
∧
Press the !
key and set  
Has the frequency NO  
been set?  
Is the external wiring  
between control terminals  
13, 12, 11, C1and V2 or  
between X1-X9 and  
CM for the multistep  
frequency selection  
the frequency.  
Correct the wiring error.  
YES  
YES  
NO  
YES  
Does the motor start  
∧
when the ! key  
connected correctly?  
is pressed?  
NO  
Are the frequency limiter  
(High) and the frequency  
YES  
Replace the faulty  
frequency setting POT (VR),  
YES setting lower than  
the starting frequency?  
signal converter, switch,  
or relay contacts as required.  
NO  
Set the frequency  
correctly.  
Are the inverter output  
terminals (U,V,W) provided  
with the proper voltage?  
NO  
Inverter may be faulty.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
Faulty motor  
YES  
NO  
Excessive load?  
YES  
Are the cables to  
YES  
NO  
the motor connected  
Correct the wiring error.  
correctly?  
Note: Monitor the operation  
The load is excessive,  
resulting in motor lock.  
Reduce the load and check  
that the brake is released  
(if a mechanical brake is used).  
Is the torque boost YES  
set correctly?  
command or frequency setting  
values, etc., on the LED or LCD  
monitor after selecting  
the respective functions.  
NO  
Raise the torque boost.  
The motor does not rotate if the following commands are issued.  
An operation command is issued while the coast-to-stop or DC braking command is output  
A reverse operation command is issued with the “H08 Rev. phase sequence lock” value set to 1.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(2) If the motor rotates but the speed does not change  
Is the maximum  
The motor rotates but  
the speed does not change.  
setting too low?  
YES  
frequency  
Increase the setting.  
NO  
Is the higher or lower  
YES  
Set the frequency.  
Change the setting.  
frequency limiter  
activating?  
YES  
NO  
Keypad panel  
operation  
Does the speed change  
when the ∧ or  
NO  
∨
key is pressed?  
Which frequency setting  
methodis used: keypad  
panel, analog signal,  
multistep frequency,  
or UP/DOWN control?  
Is the pattern operation  
activated?  
Pattern  
operation  
YES  
Is the timer  
timing too long?  
Can the frequency  
setting signal(0 to  
±10V,  
Analog signal  
YES  
NO  
4 to 20 mA)  
YES  
be changed?  
Is the pattern  
operation complete?  
Multistep frequency  
UP/DOWN  
NO  
NO  
Are the external  
connections  
between control  
Are the external  
connections between  
X1-X9 and CM correct?  
NO Correct the  
connection error.  
NO  
Are all acceleration  
and deceleration  
times identical?  
YES  
terminals 13, 12, 11,  
,V2 and C1 correct?  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Are the frequencies  
for each multistep  
frequency different?  
Replace the faulty  
frequency setting  
POT (VR) or signal  
converter as required.  
NO  
Change the  
frequency setting.  
YES  
Faulty inverter or error  
due to noise, etc.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
Is the acceleration  
or deceleration time  
set too long?  
NO  
YES  
Change the time setting  
to conform to load values.  
In the following cases, changing the motor speed is also restricted:  
Signals are input from control terminals both 12 and C1 when “F01 Frequency command 1”and “C30  
Frequency command 2” are set to 3, and there is no significant change in the added value  
The load is excessive, and the torque limiting and current limiting functions are activated  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(3) If the motor stalls during acceleration  
The motor stalls  
during acceleration.  
Is the acceleration  
time too short?  
YES  
Prolong the time.  
NO  
Is the inertia moment  
of the motor or  
the load excessive?  
YES  
YES  
Is a special motor used?  
NO  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
NO  
Use a thicker cable  
between the inverter  
and the motor or  
shorten the cable length.  
YES Has the motor terminal  
voltage dropped?  
Reduce the inertia moment  
of the load or increase  
the inverter capacity.  
NO  
Reduce the torque of  
the load or increase  
the inverter capacity.  
YES  
Is the torque of  
the load excessive?  
NO  
Faulty inverter or error  
due to noise, etc.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
Is the torque boost  
set correctly?  
YES  
NO  
Increase the torque boost.  
(4) If the motor generates abnormal heat  
The motor generates  
abnormal heat.  
Is the torque  
boost excessive?  
YES  
Reduce the torque boost.  
NO  
Has the motor been  
operated continuously  
at a very low speed?  
YES Use a motor exclusive  
to the inverter.  
NO  
YES Reduce the load or  
increase motor capacity.  
Is the load excessive?  
NO  
Is the inverter output  
voltage (at terminals  
U, V, W) balanced?  
YES  
Faulty motor  
NO  
Note: Motor overheating following a higher frequency  
setting is likely the result of current waveform.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
Faulty inverter or error  
due to noise, etc.  
Contact Fuji Electric.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Maintenance and Inspection  
Proceed with daily inspection and periodic inspection to prevent malfunction and ensure long-term  
reliability. Note the following:  
8-1 Daily Inspection  
During operation, a visual inspection for abnormal operation is completed externally without  
removing the covers  
The inspections usually cover the following:  
(1) The performance (satisfying the standard specification) is as expected.  
(2) The environment satisfies standard specifications.  
(3) The keypad panel display is normal.  
(4) There are no abnormal sounds, vibrations, or odors.  
(5) There are no indications of overheating or no discoloration.  
8-2 Periodical Inspection  
Periodic inspections must be completed after stopping operations, cutting off the power source,  
and removing the surface cover.  
Note that after turning off the power, the smoothing capacitors in the DC section in the main circuit  
take time to discharge. To prevent electric shock, confirm using a multimeter that the voltage has  
dropped below the safety value (25 V DC or below) after the charge lamp (CRG) goes off.  
• Start the inspection at least five minutes after turning off the power supply for  
inverter rated at 30HP or less, and ten minutes for inverter rated at 40HP or  
more. (Check that the charge lamp (CRG) goes off, and that the voltage is 25V  
DC or less between terminals P(+) and N(-). Electric shock may result.  
• Only authorized personnel should perform maintenance and component  
！
WARNING  
replacement operations. (Remove metal jewelry such as watches and rings.)  
(Use insulated tools.))  
• Never modify the inverter.  
Electric shock or injury may result.  
Table 8-2-1 Periodical inspection list  
Check parts  
Check items  
How to inspect  
Evaluation Criteria  
1) Check the ambient temperature, humidity,  
vibration, atmosphere (dust, gas, oil mist,  
water drops).  
2) Is the area surrounding the equipment clear  
of foreign objects.  
1) The specified  
standard value  
must be satisfied.  
2) The area is clear.  
Environment  
1) Conduct visual  
inspection and use  
the meter.  
2) Visual inspection  
Keypad panel  
1) Is the display hard to read?  
2) Are the characters complete?  
1),2) Visual inspection 1),2) The display can  
be read and is not  
abnormal.  
Structure such as a 1) Is there abnormal sound or vibration?  
1) Visual and aural  
inspection  
2) Tighten.  
3),4),5) Visual  
inspection  
1), 2), 3), 4), 5) Not  
abnormal  
frame or cover  
2) Are nuts or bolts loose?  
3) Is there deformation or damage?  
4) Is there discoloration as a result of  
overheating?  
5) Are there stains or dust?  
Common  
1) Are there loose or missing nuts or bolts?  
2) Are there deformation, cracks, damage, and  
1) Tighten.  
2),3) Visual inspection  
1), 2), 3) Not  
abnormal  
discoloration  
deterioration in the equipment and insulation?  
3) Are there stains and dust?  
due  
to  
overheating  
or  
Note: Discoloration  
of the bus bar does  
not indicate a  
problem.  
Conductor and 1) Is there discoloration or distortion of a  
1),2) Visual inspection 1), 2) Not abnormal  
wire  
conductor due to overheating?  
2) Are there cracks, crazing or discoloration of  
the cable sheath?  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Terminal block  
Smoothing  
capacitor  
Is there damage?  
Visual inspection  
Not abnormal  
1) Is there electrolyte leakage, discoloration,  
crazing, or swelling of the case?  
2) Is the safety valve not protruding or are  
valves protruding too far?  
1), 2) Not abnormal  
3) Capacitance ≧  
initial value x 0.85  
1), 2) Visual inspection  
3) * Estimate life  
expectancy from  
maintenance  
information and from  
measurements using  
capacitance  
3) Measure the capacitance if necessary.  
measuring  
equipment.  
Resistor  
1) Is there unusual odor or damage to the 1) Visual and  
1) Not abnormal  
2) Less than about  
±10% of the  
insulation by overheating?  
2) Is there an open circuit?  
olfactory inspection  
2) Conduct a visual  
Inspection or use  
a multimeter by  
removing the  
indicated  
resistance value  
connection on one  
side.  
Transformer  
and reactor  
Is there abnormal buzzing or an unpleasant Aural, olfactory, and  
Not abnormal  
smell?  
visual inspection  
Magnetic  
conductor and  
relay  
1) Is there rattling during operation?  
2) Are the contacts rough?  
1) Aural inspection  
2) Visual inspection  
1),2)Not abnormal  
Control PC  
board and  
connector  
1) Are there any loose screws or connectors?  
2) Is there an unusual odor or discoloration?  
3) Are there cracks, damage, deformation, or  
excessive rust?  
4) Is there electrolyte leakage or damage to  
the capacitor?  
1) Tighten.  
2) Visual and olfactory  
inspection  
3) Visual inspection  
4) * Estimate life  
expectancy by visual  
inspection and  
maintenance  
1),2),3),4)Not  
abnormal  
information  
Cooling fan  
1) Is there abnormal sound or vibration?  
2) Are nuts or bolts loose?  
3) Is there discoloration due to overheating?  
1) Aural and visual  
inspection. Turn  
manually (confirm the  
power is off).  
1) The fan must  
rotate smoothly.  
2), 3) Not abnormal  
2) Tighten.  
3) Visual inspection  
4) * Estimate life  
expectancy by  
maintenance  
information  
Ventilation  
Is there foreign matter on the heat sink or intake Visual inspection  
and exhaust ports?  
Not abnormal  
Note: If equipment is stained, wipe with a clean cloth. Vacuum the dust.  
∗Estimation of life expectancy based on maintenance information  
The maintenance information is stored in the inverter keypad panel and indicates the  
electrostatic capacitance of the main circuit capacitors and the life expectancy of the electrolytic  
capacitors on the control PC board and of the cooling fans. Use this data as the basis to  
estimate the life expectancy of parts.  
1) Determination of the capacitance of the main circuit capacitors  
This inverter is equipped with a function to automatically indicate the capacitance of the  
capacitors installed in the main circuit when powering up the inverter again after disconnecting  
the power according to the prescribed conditions.  
The initial capacitance values are set in the inverter when shipped from the factory, and the  
decrease ratio (%) to those values can be displayed.  
Use this function as follows:  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(1) Remove any optional cards from the inverter. Also disconnect the DC bus connections to the  
main circuit P(+) and N(-) terminals from the braking unit or other inverters if connected. The  
existing power-factor correcting reactor (DC reactor) need not be disconnected.  
A power supply introduced to the auxiliary input terminals (R0, T0) that provides control power  
should be isolated.  
(2) Disable all the digital inputs (FWD, REV, X1-X9) on the control terminals. Also disconnect  
RS-485 communication if used.  
Turn on the main power supply. Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and that the inverter is not  
operating. (There is no problem if the "OH2 External thermal relay tripped" trip function is  
activated due to the digital input terminal setting off.)  
(3) Turn the main power off.  
(4) Turn on the main power again after verifying that the charge lamp is completely off.  
(5) Open the maintenance information on the keypad panel and confirm the capacitance values of  
the built-in capacitors.  
2) Life expectancy of the control PC board  
The actual capacitance of a capacitor is not measured in this case. However, the integrated  
operating hours of the control power supply multiplied by the life expectancy coefficient defined  
by the temperature inside the inverter will be displayed. Hence, the hours displayed may not  
agree with the actual operating hours depending on the operational environment.  
Since the integrated hours are counted by unit hours, power input for less than one hour will be  
disregarded.  
3) Life expectancy of cooling fan  
The integrated operating hours of the cooling fan are displayed. Since the integrated hours  
are counted by unit hours, power input for less than one hour will be disregarded.  
The displayed value should be considered as a rough estimate because the actual life of a  
cooling fan is influenced significantly by the temperature.  
Table 8-2-2 Rough estimate of life expectancy using maintenance information  
Parts  
Level of judgment  
Capacitor in main circuit  
85% or less of the initial value  
Electrolytic capacitor on  
control PC board  
61,000 hours  
Cooling fan  
40,000 hours (5HP or less), 25,000 hours (Over 7.5HP) (*1)  
*1 Estimated life expectancy of a ventilation-fan at inverter ambient temperature of 40°C (104°F)  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-3 Measurement of Main Circuit Electrical Quantity  
The indicated values depend on the type of meter because the harmonic component is included  
in the voltage and current of the main circuit power (input) and the output (motor) side of the  
inverter. When measuring with a meter for commercial power frequency use, use the meters  
shown in Table 8.3.1.  
The power-factor cannot be measured using power-factor meters currently available on the  
market, which measure the phase difference between voltage and current. When power-factors  
must be measured, measure the power, voltage, and current on the input side and output side,  
then calculate the power-factor using the following formula:  
Power[W]  
Power − factor =  
× 100[%]  
3 × Voltage[V] × Current[A]  
Table 8-3-1 Meters for measuring main circuit  
Input (power supply) side  
Output (motor) side  
Current  
DC link circuit  
voltage  
(P(+) - N(-))  
Voltage  
Current*  
Voltage  
Item  
Meter  
name  
Ammeter  
AR,S,T  
Voltmeter  
VR,S,T  
Powermeter  
WR,S,T  
Ammeter  
AU,V,W  
Voltmeter  
VU,V,W  
Powermeter  
WU,V,W  
DC voltmeter  
V
Rectifier or  
moving-iron  
type  
Meter  
type  
Moving-iron  
type  
Digital  
power meter  
Moving-iron  
type  
Digital power  
meter  
Moving-coil  
type  
Rectifier type  
Symbol  
Note: When measuring the output voltage using a rectifier type meter, an error may occur.  
Use a digital AC power meter to ensure accuracy.  
Fig 8-3-1 Connection of the meters  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-4 Insulation Test  
Avoid testing an inverter with a megger because an insulation test is completed at the factory. If a  
megger test must be completed, proceed as described below. Use of an incorrect testing method  
may result in product damage.  
If the specifications for the dielectric strength test are not followed, the inverter may be damaged.  
If a dielectric strength test must be completed, contact your local distributor or nearest Fuji Electric  
sales office.  
(1) Megger test for the main circuit  
① Use a 500V DC type megger and isolate the main power before commencing measurement.  
② If the test voltage is connected to the control circuit, remove all connection cables to the control  
circuit.  
③ Connect the main circuit terminals using common cables as shown in Fig. 8-4-1.  
④ Execute the megger test only between the common cables connected to the main circuit and the  
ground (terminal  
G).  
⑤ A megger indicating 5MΩ or more is normal. (This is the value measured with an inverter only.)  
Fig. 8-4-1  
Megger test  
(2) Insulation test in the control circuit  
A megger test and a dielectric strength test must not be performed in the control circuit. Prepare a high  
resistance range multimeter for the control circuit.  
① Remove all external cables from the control circuit terminals.  
② Conduct a continuity test between grounds. A result of 1MΩ or more is normal.  
(3) Exterior main circuit and sequence control circuit  
Remove all cables from inverter terminals to ensure the test voltage is not applied to the inverter.  
Table 8-5-1 Part replacement  
8-5 Parts Replacement  
Part name  
Standard  
period for  
replacement  
3 years  
Comments  
The life expectancy of a part depends  
on the type of part, the environment,  
and usage conditions. Parts should  
be replaced as shown in Table 8-5-1.  
Cooling fan  
Exchange for a new part.  
Smoothing  
capacitor  
5 years  
Exchange for  
a
new part  
(determine after checking).  
Electrolytic  
capacitor on the  
PC board  
7 years  
Exchange for a new PC board  
(determine after checking).  
Fuse  
Other parts  
10 years  
－
Exchange for a new part.  
Determine after checking.  
8-6 Inquiries about Products and Product Guarantee  
(1) Inquiries  
If there is damage, a fault in the product, or questions concerning the product, contact your local distributor  
or nearest Fuji Electric sales office:  
a) Inverter type  
b) Serial No. (equipment serial number)  
c) Purchase date  
d) Inquiry details (e.g., damaged part, extent of damage, questions, status of fault)  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(2) Product guarantee --- Please take the following items into consideration when placing your order.  
When requesting an estimate and placing your orders for the products included in these materials, please be aware that any items  
such as specifications which are not specifically mentioned in the contract, catalog, specifications or other materials will be as  
mentioned below.  
In addition, the products included in these materials are limited in the use they are put to and the place where they can be used,  
etc., and may require periodic inspection. Please confirm these points with your sales representative or directly with this company.  
Furthermore, regarding purchased products and delivered products, we request that you take adequate consideration of the  
necessity of rapid receiving inspections and of product management and maintenance even before receiving your products.  
1. Free of Charge Warranty Period and Warranty Range  
1-1 Free of charge warranty period  
(1) The product warranty period is "1 year from the date of purchase" or 24 month from the manufacturing  
date imprinted on the name place, whichever date is earlier.  
(2) However in cases where the use environment, conditions of use, use frequency and times, etc., have an  
effect on product life, this warranty period may not apply.  
(3) Furthermore, the warranty period for parts restored by Fuji Electric's Service Department is "6 month from  
the date that repairs are completed."  
1-2 Warranty range  
(1) In the event that breakdown occurs during the product's warranty period which is the responsibility of Fuji  
Electric, Fuji Electric will replace or repair the part of the product that has broken down free of charge at  
the place where the product was purchased or where it was delivered. However, if the following cases  
are applicable, the terms of this warranty may not apply.  
1) The breakdown was caused by inappropriate conditions, environment, handling or use methods, etc. which are not  
specified in the catalog, operation manual, specifications or other relevant documents.  
2) The breakdown was caused by the product other than the purchased or delivered Fuji's product.  
3) The breakdown was caused by the product other than Fuji's product, such as the customer's equipment or software  
design etc.  
4) Concerning the Fuji's programmable products, the breakdown was caused by a program other than a program supplied  
by this company, or the results from using such a program.  
5) The breakdown was caused by modifications or repairs affected by a party other than Fuji Electric.  
6) The breakdown was caused by improper maintenance or replacement using consumables, etc. specified in the operation  
manual or catalog, etc.  
7) The breakdown was caused by a chemical or technical problem that was not foreseen when making practical application  
of the product at the time it was purchased or delivered.  
8) The product was not used in the manner the product was originally intended to be used.  
9) The breakdown was caused by a reason which is not this company's responsibility, such as lightning or other disaster.  
(2) Furthermore, the warranty specified herein shall be limited to the purchased or delivered product alone.  
(3) The upper limit for the warranty range shall be as specified in item (1) above and any damages  
(damage to or loss of machinery or equipment, or lost profits from the same, etc.) consequent to or  
resulting from breakdown of the purchased or delivered product shall be excluded from coverage by this  
warranty.  
1-3. Trouble diagnosis  
As a rule, the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diagnosis. However, at the customer's request, this company or  
its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis on a chargeable basis. In this case, the customer is asked to assume the burden  
for charges levied in accordance with this company's fee schedule.  
2. Exclusion of Liability for Loss of Opportunity, etc.  
Regardless of whether a breakdown occurs during or after the free of charge warranty period, this company shall not be liable for any  
loss of opportunity, loss of profits, or damages arising from special circumstances, secondary damages, accident compensation to  
another company, or damages to products other than this company's products, whether foreseen or not by this company, which this  
company is not be responsible for causing.  
3. Repair Period after Production Stop, Spare Parts Supply Period (Holding Period)  
Concerning models (products) which have gone out of production, this company will perform repairs for a period of 7 years after  
production stop, counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs. In addition, we will continue to supply the spare  
parts required for repairs for a period of 7 years, counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs. However, if it is  
estimated that the life cycle of certain electronic and other parts is short and it will be difficult to produce or produce those parts, there  
may be causes where it is difficult to provide repairs or supply spare parts even within this 7-year period. For details, please confirm at  
our company's business office or our service office.  
4. Transfer Rights  
In the case of standard products which do not include settings or adjustments in an application program, the products shall be  
transported to and transferred to the customer and this company shall not be responsible for local adjustments or trial operation.  
5. Service Contents  
The cost of purchased and delivered products does not include the cost of dispatching engineers or service costs. Depending on the  
request, these can be discussed separately.  
6. Applicable Scope of Service  
Above contents shall be assumed to apply to transactions and use of the country where you purchased the products. Consult the local  
supplier or Fuji for detail separately.  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Specifications  
9-1 Standard Specifications  
(1) Three-phase 230V series  
Nominal applied motor  
[HP]  
0.25 0.5  
1
2
3
5
7.5  
10  
15  
20  
25  
30  
40  
50  
60  
75  
100  
125 150  
Type  
F25 F50 001 002 003 005 007 010 015 020 025 030 040 050 060 075  
100  
113  
283  
125  
138  
346  
-
-
-
FRN[][][]G11S-2UX  
Rated output  
capacity (*1) [kVA]  
Rated output  
current (*2) [A]  
Overload  
0.6  
1.5  
1.2  
3.0  
2.0  
5.0  
3.2  
8.0  
4.4  
11  
6.8  
17  
10  
25  
13  
33  
18  
46  
24  
59  
29  
74  
35  
87  
46  
58  
72  
86  
115 145 180 215  
150% of rated output current for 1 min.  
200% of rated output current for 0.5 s  
150% of rated output current for 1 min.  
180% of rated output current for 0.5 s  
capability  
G11  
Starting torque  
Braking torque  
(*3) [%]  
200% or more (under torque vector control)  
180% or more (under torque vector control)  
Approx. 10 to 15%  
150% or more  
100% or more  
Approx. 20%  
Braking time [s]  
Braking duty  
cycle [%ED]  
10  
10  
5
5
No limit  
No limit  
5
3
5
3
2
3
2
Mass [lbs (kg)]  
4.9  
4.9  
5.5  
8.4  
8.4  
8.4  
13  
13  
22  
22  
23  
23  
64  
79  
97  
101  
154  
254  
-
(2.2) (2.2) (2.5) (3.8) (3.8) (3.8) (6.1) (6.1) (10) (10) (10.5) (10.5) (29) (36) (44) (46) (70) (115)  
Type  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
007 010 015 020 025 030 040 050 060 075  
100  
113  
283  
125 150  
138 165  
346 415  
FRN[][][]P11S-2UX  
Rated capacity (*1)  
[kVA]  
8.8  
22  
12  
29  
17  
42  
22  
55  
27  
67  
31  
78  
46  
58  
72  
86  
Rated output  
current (*2) [A]  
Overload  
115 145 180 215  
110% of rated output current for 1 min.  
capability  
P11  
Starting torque  
Braking torque  
(*3) [%]  
50% or more  
Approx. 20%  
Approx. 10 to 15%  
Braking time [s]  
Braking duty  
cycle [%ED]  
Mass [lbs (kg)]  
No limit  
No limit  
13  
-
13  
13  
22  
22  
23  
64  
64  
79  
97  
101 154 254  
-
-
-
-
-
(5.7) (5.7) (5.7) (10) (10) (10.5) (29) (29) (36) (44) (46) (70) (115)  
Rated output  
voltage (*4) [V]  
3-phase, 200V/50Hz, 200V,220V,230V/60Hz  
50,60Hz  
Rated output  
frequency [Hz]  
Phases, voltage,  
frequency  
3-phase, 200 to 220V, 220 to 230V/50Hz  
3-phase, 200 to 230V/60Hz  
3-phase, 200 to 230V, 50/60Hz  
Voltage/frequency  
variations  
Voltage: +10% to -15% (Imbalance rate between phases: 2% or less (*6) , Frequency: +5% to -5%  
Momentary voltage  
dip capability (*7)  
Required power  
supply  
Operation will continue with 165V or more. If voltage drops below 165V, operation will continue for up to 15 ms.  
If "Continuous operation" is selected, the output frequency will be lowered to withstand the load until normal voltage is resumed.  
0.4  
0.7  
1.3  
2.2  
3.1  
5.0  
7.2  
9.7  
15  
20  
24  
29  
38  
47  
56  
69  
93  
111 134  
capacity (*8)[kVA]  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(2) Three-phase 460V series  
Nominal applied  
motor [HP]  
0.5  
1
2
3
5
7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800  
Type  
FRN[][][]G11S-4UX  
F50 001 002 003 005 007 010 015 020 025 030 040 050 060 075 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600  
1.2 2.0 2.9 4.4 7.2 10 14 19 24 31 36 48 60 73 89 120 140 167 202 242 300 331 414 466 518 590  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Rated output  
capacity (*1) [kVA]  
Rated output  
current (*2) [A]  
Overload  
1.5 2.5 3.7 5.5  
9
13 18 24 30 39 45 60 75 91 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 520 585 650 740  
150% of rated output current for 1 min.  
200% of rated output current for 0.5 s  
200% or more (under torque vector control)  
150% of rated output current for 1 min.  
180% of rated output current for 0.5 s  
180% or more (under torque vector control)  
10 to 15%  
capability  
G11  
Starting torque  
Braking torque  
(*3) [%]  
50% or more  
100% or more  
20% or more  
Braking time [s]  
Braking duty  
cycle [%ED]  
5
5
No limit  
No limit  
5
3
5
3
2
3
2
Mass [lbs (kg)]  
4.9  
5.5  
8.4  
8.4  
8.4  
14  
14  
22  
22  
23  
23  
64  
75  
86  
88  
106 154 154 220 220 309 309 705 705 904 904  
-
-
(2.2) (2.5) (3.8) (3.8) (3.8) (6.5) (6.5) (10) (10) (10.5) (10.5) (29) (34) (39) (40) (48) (70) (70) (100) (100) (140) (140) (320) (320) (410) (410)  
Type  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
007 010 015 020 025 030 040 050 060 075 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800  
10 13 18 24 29 35 48 60 73 89 120 140 167 202 242 300 331 386 414 518 590 669 765  
12.5 16.5 23 30 37 44 60 75 91 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 485 520 650 740 840 960  
FRN[][][]P11S-4UX  
Rated capacity (*1)  
[kVA]  
Rated output  
current (*2) [A]  
Overload  
110% of rated output current for 1 min.  
capability  
P11  
Starting torque  
Braking torque  
(*3) [%]  
50% or more  
Approx. 20%  
Approx. 10 to 15%  
Braking time [s]  
Braking duty  
cycle [%ED]  
Mass [lbs (kg)]  
No limit  
No limit  
13  
13  
13  
22  
22  
23  
64  
64  
75  
86  
88  
106 154 154 220 220 309 309 309 705 705 904  
904  
-
-
-
-
-
(6.1) (6.1) (6.1) (10) (10) (10.5) (29) (29) (34) (39) (40) (48) (70) (70) (100) (100) (140) (140) (140) (320) (320) (410) (410)  
Rated output  
voltage(*4) [V]  
Rated output  
frequency [Hz]  
3-phase, 380V, 400V, 415V(440V)/50Hz, 380V, 400V, 440V, 460V/60Hz  
50,60Hz  
Phases, voltage,  
frequency  
3-phase,380 to 480V,50/60Hz  
3-phase, 380 to 440V/50Hz  
3-phase, 380 to 480V/60Hz  
*5)  
Voltage/frequency  
variations  
Voltage: +10% to -15% (Imbalance rate between phases: 2% or less (*6) , Frequency: +5% to -5%  
Momentary voltage  
dip capability (*7)  
Required power  
supply  
Operation will continue with 310V or more. If voltage drops below 310V, operation will continue for up to 15 ms.  
If "Continuous operation" is selected, the output frequency will be lowered to withstand the load until normal voltage is resumed.  
0.7 1.2 2.2 3.1 5.0 7.2 9.7 15 20 24 29 38 47 57 70 93 111 136 161 196 244 267 341 383 433 488 549 610  
capacity (*8)[kVA]  
(*1) Indicated capacities are at the rated output voltage 230V for the 230V series and 460V for the 460V series. The rated capacity will  
be lowered if the supply voltage is lowered.  
(*2) In the case of a low impedance load, such as a high-frequency motor, the current may drop below the rated current.  
(*3) Indicates when a nominal applied motor is used (the average torque when decelerated to stoppage from 60 Hz, which varies  
depending on motor loss).  
(*4) An output voltage exceeding the supply voltage cannot be generated.  
(*5) The taps within the inverter must be changed for a power supply rated at 380 to 398V/50 Hz or 380 to 430V/60 Hz.  
(*6) If the imbalance between phases exceeds 2%, use a power-factor correcting DC reactor (DCR).  
( Max. Voltage [V] - Min. Voltage [V] )  
Imbalance rate between phases [%] =  
x 67[%]  
3-phase average voltage [V]  
(*7) Test was conducted under the standard load conditions stipulated by the JEMA committee (at the load equivalent to 85% of the  
nominal applied motor).  
(*8) Indicates the values required when using a power-factor correcting DC reactor (DCR) (optional for inverters of 75HP or less) with a  
loaded nominal applied motor.  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-2 Common Specifications  
Item  
Explanation  
Control method  
Maximum  
frequency  
Base  
Sinusoidal wave PWM control (with V/F control, torque vector control, PG feedback vector control (option))  
G11S: 50 to 400Hz variable setting P11S: 50-120Hz variable setting  
G11S: 25 to 400Hz variable setting P11S: 25-120Hz variable setting  
0.1 to 60Hz variable setting Holding time: 0.0 to 10.0 s  
frequency  
Starting  
frequency  
Carrier  
G11: 0.75 to 15kHz (75HP or less) 0.75 to 10kHz (100HP or more)  
frequency  
Accuracy  
(stability)  
P11: 0.75 to 15kHz (30HP or less) 0.75 to 10kHz (40 to 100HP) 0.75 to 6kHz (125HP or more)  
Analog setting: +/- 0.2% or less of the max. Frequency (at 25℃ (77°F) +/- 10℃ (50°F))  
Digital setting: +/- 0.01% or less of the max. Frequency (-10℃ (14°F) to +5℃ (122°F))  
Setting  
resolution  
Analog setting: 1/1000 of max. frequency (30HP or less) 1/3000 of max. frequency (40HP or more)  
Digital setting: 0.01Hz (99.99Hz or less), 0.1Hz (100.0Hz or more)  
Voltage/frequency  
characteristics  
Output voltage at base frequency can be adjusted separately, such as 80 to 240V (230V series) or 320 to 480V  
(460V series).  
Output voltage at max. frequency can be adjusted separately, such as 80 to 240V (230V series) or 320 to 480V  
(460V series).  
Torque boost  
Auto: Optimum control corresponding to the load torque.  
Manual: 0.1 to 20.0 code setting (energy saving reduced torque, constant torque (strong), etc.)  
Accelerating/decelerating  
time  
0.01 to 3600s  
Four accelerating and decelerating time settings are possible independent of each other by selecting digital input  
signals.  
In addition to linear acceleration and deceleration, either S-shaped acceleration/deceleration (weak/strong) or  
curvilinear acceleration/deceleration can be selected.  
DC injection braking  
Function equipped  
Starting frequency: 0.0 to 60.0Hz, braking time: 0.0 to 30.0s,  
Braking level: 0 to 100% (G11S), 0-80% (P11S)  
Frequency upper and lower limiter, bias frequency, frequency gain, jump frequency, pick-up operation, restart  
after momentary power failure, switching operation from line to inverter, slip compensation control, automatic  
energy saving operation, regeneration avoiding control, droop control, torque limiting (2-step), torque control, PID  
control, second motor switching, cooling fan ON/OFF control.  
Operation method  
Frequency setting  
Keypad panel: Run by  
Terminal input:  
,
keys, stop by  
key  
STOP  
FWD  
Forward/stop command, reverse/stop command, coast-to-stop command, alarm reset,  
acceleration/deceleration selection, multistep frequency selection, etc.  
REV  
Keypad panel: Setting by keys  
,
External potentiometer: External freq.setting POT (VR) (1 to 5kΩ)  
Analog input: 0 to +10V (0 to +5V), 4 to 20mA, 0 to +/- 10V (FWD/REV operation)  
+10 V to 0 (reverse operation), 20 to 4mA (reverse operation)  
UP/DOWN control: Frequency increases or decreases as long as the digital input signal is turned on.  
Multistep frequency selection: Up to 15 steps are selectable by a combination of digital input signals (four kinds).  
Link operation: Operation by RS-485 (standard).  
Program operation: Pattern operation by program  
Jogging operation: Jogging operation by  
,
key or digital input signals  
FWD REV  
Operation status signal  
Transistor output (4 signals): Running, frequency arrival, frequency detection, overload early warning, etc.  
Relay output (2 signals): Alarm output (for any fault), multi-purpose relay output signals  
Analog output (1 signal): Output frequency, output current, output voltage, output torque, power consumption, etc.  
Pulse output (1 signal): Output frequency, output current, output power, output torque, power consumption, etc.  
Digital display (LED)  
Output frequency, setting frequency, output current, output voltage, motor synchronous speed, line speed, load  
rotation speed, calculated torque value, power consumption, calculated PID value, PID command value, PID  
feedback value, alarm code  
Liquid crystal display (LCD)  
Operation information, operational guide, functional code/name/setting data, alarm information, tester function,  
motor load rate measuring function (Maximum/average current (rms) during measuring period, maintenance  
information (Integrated operation hours, capacitance measurement for main circuit capacitors, heat sink  
temperature, etc.))  
Language  
Six languages (Japanese, English, German, French, Spanish, and Italian)  
Lamp display  
Charging (voltage residual), operation indication  
Overcurrent, short-circuit, ground fault, overvoltage, undervoltage, overload, overheating, blown fuse, motor  
overload, external alarm, input open-phase, output open-phase (when tuning), braking resistor protection, CPU  
and memory error, keypad panel communication error, PTC thermistor protection, surge protection, stall  
prevention, etc.  
Protective functions  
Installation location  
Ambient temperature  
Indoor, altitude less than 3300ft (1000m), free from corrosive gas, dust, and direct sunlight (Pollution degree 2)  
-10℃ (14°F) to +50℃ (122°F) (ventilating cover must be removed under conditions exceeding +40℃ (104°F)  
for models rated at 30HP or less)  
Ambient humidity  
Air pressure  
5 to 95%RH (no condensation)  
Operation/storage :86 to 106 kPa  
Transport  
:70 to 106 kPa  
0.12inch(3mm) at from 2 to less than 9Hz, 9.8m/s2 at from 9 to less than 20Hz,  
Vibration  
2m/s2 at from 20 to less than 55Hz, 1m/s2 at from 55 to less than 200Hz,  
Storage  
Ambient  
temperature  
-25℃ (-13°F) to +65℃ (149°F)  
Ambient humidity  
5 to 95%RH (no condensation)  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-3 Outline Dimensions  
■ Outline Dimensions (30HP or less)  
inch (mm)  
4.33(110)  
0.28(7)  
3.78(96)  
0.28(7)  
0.24(6)  
5.70(145)  
2.42(61.5)  
5.90(150)  
5.35(136)  
0.28(7)  
0.28(7)  
0.24(6)  
0.24(6)  
0.61(15.5)  
0.31(8)  
0.61(15.5)  
1.56(39.5)  
3.43(87)  
3.74(95)  
0.24(6)  
1.22 1.22  
1.73  
0.31(8)  
4.29(109)  
(44) (31) (31)  
5.12  
(130)  
FRNF25G11S-2UX to FRNF50G11S-2UX  
FRNF50G11S-4UX  
1.44  
(36.5)  
3.15  
(80)  
3.70  
(94)  
2.82  
(71.5)  
5.71  
(145)  
2.03  
(51.5)  
3.74  
(95)  
4.29  
(109)  
3.41  
(86.5)  
FRN001G11S-2UX  
FRN001G11S-4UX  
FRN002G11S-2UX to FRN005G11S-2UX  
FRN002G11S-4UX to FRN005G11S-4UX  
FRNF25G11S-2UX to FRN001G11S-2UX  
FRNF50G11S-4UX to FRN001G11S-4UX  
7.68(195)  
9.84(250)  
4.17  
(106)  
8.90(226)  
0.47(12)  
0.47(12)  
0.39(10)  
8.66(220)  
7.68(195)  
0.47(12)  
7.72(196)  
0.47(12)  
4.09(104)  
0.39(10)  
5.49(139.5)  
5.67(144)  
6.26(159)  
0.39(10)  
5.06(128.5)  
5.12(130)  
0.31(8)  
0.39  
(10)  
2.07  
(52.5)  
(46)  
2.28 1.81  
(58)  
2.17 2.42  
(55) (61.5)  
2.54  
(64.5)  
0.31(8)  
6.26(159)  
FRN007G11S-2UX to FRN010G11S-2UX  
FRN007G11S-4UX to FRN010G11S-4UX  
FRN007P11S-2UX to FRN015P11S-2UX  
FRN007P11S-4UX to FRN015P11S-4UX  
FRN015G11S-2UX to FRN030G11S-2UX  
FRN015G11S-4UX to FRN030G11S-4UX  
FRN020P11S-2UX to FRN030P11S-2UX  
FRN020P11S-4UX to FRN030P11S-4UX  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
■ Outline Dimensions (G11S :40HP to 350HP, P11S :40HP to 450HP)  
IInstallation inside panel type  
External cooling type  
W
D
W
D1  
2or3-φC  
W1  
2or3-φC  
D2  
D2  
D1  
W1  
W3  
W3  
4-φ18  
吊り穴  
4-φ18  
吊り穴  
4or6-  
4or6-  
C
C
mounting  
mounting  
W2  
W1  
hole  
hole  
W1  
W3  
W3  
230V Series  
Nominal  
applied  
Inverter type  
FRN-G11S series FRN-P11S series  
FRN040G11S-2UX FRN040P11S-2UX 13.4 9.45 12.8  
Dimension  
Unit inch (mm)  
Mounting  
bolt  
W
W1 W2 W3  
H
H1  
H2  
H3  
H4  
H5  
H6  
D
D1  
D2  
C
motor[HP]  
40  
21.7 20.9 19.7 20.2  
(550) (530) (500) (512)  
10.0  
(255)  
(340) (240) (326)  
－
FRN050P11S-2UX  
50  
60  
FRN050G11S-2UX  
－
－
24.2 23.4 22.2 22.7  
(615) (595) (565) (577)  
FRN060P11S-2UX  
－
0.47 0.98 0.35  
(12) (25) (9)  
5.71  
(145)  
0.39  
(10)  
M8  
FRN060G11S-2UX  
－
14.8 10.8 14.2  
(375) (275) (361)  
10.6  
－
(270)  
FRN075P11S-2UX  
－
0.16  
(4)  
29.1 28.3 27.2 27.6  
(740) (720) (690) (702)  
75  
FRN075G11S-2UX  
－
FRN100P11S-2UX  
－
100  
FRN100G11S-2UX  
20.9 16.9 20.1  
(530) (430) (510)  
29.5 28.3 27.0 27.4  
(750) (720) (685) (695)  
11.2 5.71  
(285) (145)  
－
FRN125G11S-2UX  
－
FRN125P11S-2UX  
－
0.61 1.28 0.49  
(15.5) (32.5) (12.5)  
0.59  
(15)  
125  
150  
M12  
26.8 22.8 26.0 11.4 34.6 33.5 32.1 32.5  
(680) (580) (660) (290) (880) (850) (815) (825)  
14.2 8.66  
(360) (220)  
FRN150P11S-2UX  
460V Series  
Nominal  
applied  
Inverter type  
FRN-G11S series FRN-P11S series  
FRN040G11S-4UX FRN040P11S-4UX 13.4 9.45 12.8  
Dimension  
Unit inch (mm)  
H5 H6  
Mounting  
bolt  
W
W1 W2 W3  
H
H1  
H2  
H3  
H4  
D
D1  
D2  
C
motor[HP]  
40  
10.0  
(340) (240) (326)  
(255)  
－
FRN050P11S-4UX  
－
21.7 20.9 19.7 20.2  
(550) (530) (500) (512)  
50  
FRN050G11S-4UX  
－
FRN060P11S-4UX  
－
60  
FRN060G11S-4UX  
－
0.47 0.98 0.35  
(12) (25) (9)  
5.71  
(145)  
0.39  
(10)  
M8  
FRN075P11S-4UX  
14.8 10.8 14.2  
(375) (275) (361)  
26.6 25.8 24.6 25.1  
(675) (655) (625) (637)  
10.6  
(270)  
75  
FRN075G11S-4UX  
－
－
FRN100P11S-4UX  
－
100  
125  
150  
200  
250  
300  
350  
FRN100G11S-4UX  
－
29.1 28.3 27.2 27.6  
(740) (720) (690) (702)  
－
FRN125P11S-4UX  
－
FRN125G11S-4UX  
－
0.16  
(4)  
FRN150P11S-4UX  
29.1 28.0 26.6 27.0  
(740) (710) (675) (685)  
12.4 6.89  
(315) (175)  
FRN150G11S-4UX  
－
－
FRN200P11S-4UX  
－
20.9 16.9 20.1  
(530) (430) (510)  
FRN200G11S-4UX  
－
FRN250P11S-4UX  
－
0.61 1.28 0.49  
(15.5) (32.5) (12.5)  
0.59  
(15)  
FRN250G11S-4UX  
－
M12  
FRN300P11S-4UX  
38.2 36.8 37.2  
(970) (935) (945)  
14.2 8.66  
(360) (220)  
39.4  
(1000)  
FRN300G11S-4UX  
－
－
FRN350P11S-4UX  
－
26.8 22.8 26.0 11.4  
(680) (580) (660) (290)  
FRN350G11S-4UX  
400  
450  
FRN400P11S-4UX  
FRN450P11S-4UX  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
■Outline Dimensions (G11S :400HP or more ,P11S :500HP or more)  
W
W1  
D
D1  
D1  
D2  
D2  
D1  
D2  
W3 W4  
Lifting bolts  
W2  
W1  
W2  
W1  
C
W1  
W3 W4  
W5  
W3 W4  
W3 W4  
Holes for  
fixing bolts  
Holes for  
fixing bolts  
Holes for  
fixing bolts  
Mounting dimensions  
of internal mounting type  
Mounting dimensions of external cooling type  
460V Series  
Nominal  
applied  
motor[HP]  
Inverter type  
Dimension  
W1 W2 W3 W4 W5  
Unit inch (mm)  
H4 H5  
FRN-G11S series  
FRN-P11S series  
W
H
H1  
H2  
H3  
H6  
H7  
D
D1  
400  
FRN400G11S-4UX  
－
－
450  
26.8 22.8 26.0 11.4  
(680) (580) (660) (290)  
24.0  
(610)  
－
FRN450G11S-4UX  
－
－
500  
600  
500  
600  
700  
800  
FRN500P11S-4UX  
FRN600P11S-4UX  
－
55.1 53.9 52.4 52.8 52.6 0.61 1.38 0.57 17.7 11.2  
(1400) (1370) (1330) (1340) (1335) (15.5) (35) (14.5) (450) (285)  
－
FRN500G11S-4UX  
FRN600G11S-4UX  
－
34.6 30.7 33.9 10.2 10.2 31.9  
(880) (780) (860) (260) (260) (810)  
－
－
FRN700P11S-4UX  
FRN800P11S-4UX  
Nominal  
applied  
motor[HP]  
Inverter type  
Dimension Unit inch (mm)  
Mounting  
bolt  
FRN-G11S series  
FRN-P11S series  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
C
400  
FRN400G11S-4UX  
－
FRN450P11S-4UX  
－
450  
FRN450G11S-4UX  
－
500  
600  
500  
600  
700  
800  
FRN500P11S-4UX  
FRN600P11S-4UX  
－
0.25 1.97 3.94 1.38 4.53 0.59  
(6.4) (50) (100) (35) (115) (15)  
M12  
－
FRN500G11S-4UX  
FRN600G11S-4UX  
－
－
－
FRN700P11S-4UX  
FRN800P11S-4UX  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
■ Outline Dimensions (Reactor; Accessories for 100HP or more)  
Fig. B  
terminal hole  
Fig. A  
terminal details  
MA X. E  
F± 5  
MA X. E  
F± 5  
terminal hole  
B± 1  
A± 3  
C±2  
D±3  
B± 1  
A± 3  
C±2  
D±3  
4-ø G  
4-ø G  
terminal hole  
terminal hole  
terminal hole  
Fig. C  
terminaldetails  
E±5  
MAX.F  
C±2  
20  
4-ø  
G×20
D±3  
B± 1  
A±3  
terminal hole  
230V Series  
Dimension  
Unit inch (mm)  
Mass  
[lbs]  
(kg)  
Inverter type  
DC Reactor type  
Fig.  
Terminal  
hole size  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
7.87 6.69 3.94 5.55 4.33 2.76  
(200) (170) (100) (141) (110) (70)  
7.09 5.91 4.33 5.94 5.51 2.95  
(180) (150) (110) (151) (140) (75)  
7.48 6.30 4.72 6.34 5.91 3.15  
(190) (160) (120) (161) (150) (80)  
8.27 10.6  
(210) (270)  
9.45 11.0  
40  
(18)  
44  
FRN100G11S/P11S-2UX  
FRN125G11S/P11S-2UX  
FRN150P11S-2UX  
DCR2-75B  
DCR2-90B  
DCR2-110B  
Fig. A  
Fig. B  
—
—
—
M12  
0.39  
(10)  
(240) (280) 0.98  
(25)  
(20)  
55  
—
—
φ15  
10.6  
13.0  
(270) (330)  
(25)  
460V Series  
Dimension  
Unit inch (mm)  
Mass  
[lbs]  
(kg)  
Inverter type  
DC Reactor type  
Fig.  
Terminal  
hole size  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
4.53 5.94 3.94 2.95  
(115) (151) (100) (75)  
9.45 10.6  
(240) (270)  
44  
(20)  
50  
FRN100G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN125G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN150G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN200G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN250G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN300G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN350G11S/P11S-4UX  
DCR4-75B  
DCR4-90B  
DCR4-110B  
DCR4-132B  
DCR4-160B  
DCR4-200B  
DCR4-220B  
Fig. A  
—
—
—
M10  
7.48 6.30  
(190) (160)  
0.39  
(10)  
4.92 6.34  
(125) (161)  
3.15  
(80)  
9.84  
(250)  
0.98  
(25)  
(23)  
55  
—
—
—
—
11.0  
(280)  
4.72  
(120)  
(25)  
62  
7.87 6.69  
(200) (170)  
10.2  
(260)  
11.4 12.6  
(290) (320)  
11.6 13.0  
(295) (330)  
φ12  
3.35  
(85)  
(28)  
71  
1.18  
(30)  
Fig. B  
8.27 7.09 5.31 6.73  
(210) (180) (135) (171)  
(32)  
77  
5.51 3.54  
(140) (90)  
(35)  
88  
11.8  
13.8  
(300) (350)  
(40)  
—
—
FRN400G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN450P11S-4UX  
14.6  
99  
(45)  
DCR4-280B  
8.66 7.48  
(220) (190)  
5.91  
(150)  
(370)  
0.47 12.6  
1.57  
(40)  
115  
(52)  
121  
(55)  
132  
(60)  
148  
(67)  
154  
(70)  
FRN450G11S-4UX  
DCR4-315B  
DCR4-355B  
DCR4-400B  
DCR4-450B  
DCR4-500B  
—
—
—
—
—
(12)  
(320)  
1.61 8.46  
(41) (215)  
3.74  
6.30  
φ15  
FRN500G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN600G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN700P11S-4UX  
5.71 7.13  
(145) (181)  
(95)  
(160)  
9.45 8.27  
(240) (210)  
Fig. C  
6.69  
(170)  
13.4  
(340)  
1.77 8.86  
(45) (225)  
10.2 8.86  
(260) (225)  
1.97  
(50)  
7.28 3.94  
(185) (100)  
FRN800P11S-4UX  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-4 RS-485 Modbus RTU Serial Communications  
The serial interface supports operation, configuration and monitoring of inverter functions through an  
EIA/RS-485 connection. The serial interface is based on Modbus RTU protocol. This protocol allows the  
inverter to function as an RTU slave on an industrial network.  
9-4-1 Transmission Specification  
Item  
Specification  
Physical level  
EIA/RS-485  
1600 ft (500 m)  
32 total  
Transmission distance  
Number of nodes  
Transmission speed  
Transmission mode  
Transmission protocol  
Character code  
19200, 9600, 4800, 2400 [bits/s]  
Half duplex  
Modbus RTU  
Binary  
Character length  
Error check  
8 bits  
CRC  
9-4-2 Connection  
Connection method  
Use shielded wire and connect to the control terminals (DX-, DX+ and SD). A termination resistor should be  
added between the data lines on the each end of the network. The value of the termination resistor  
depends on the characteristic impedance of the cable. A common value for termination resistors is 120  
ohms.  
Control terminals  
Terminal  
marking  
Terminal name  
Function description  
DX+  
DX-  
SD  
RS-485 communication data (+)  
RS-485 communication data (–)  
Cable shield  
Input/output terminals for RS-485  
communication.  
Electrically floating  
9-4-3 Serial Interface Configuration  
Inverter function codes H30 to H39 are used to configure the serial interface parameters, such as device  
address, baud rate and error response.  
9-4-4 Modbus RTU Functions  
The following RTU functions are supported. The maximum number of consecutive parameters for function  
03 and 16 messages is 16.  
Code  
03  
06  
16  
Description  
Read Holding Registers (16 registers maximum)  
Preset Single Register  
Preset Multiple Registers (16 registers maximum)  
9-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-4-5 Inverter Function Code Access  
All of the inverter function codes are accessible through the RS-485 serial interface. Inverter function codes  
are mapped to RTU holding registers. An inverter function code RTU address is 2 bytes in length. The high  
byte corresponds to a code that represents the inverter parameter sort (F–M). The low byte corresponds to  
the inverter parameter number within the sort (0 -99).  
Code  
0
1
2
3
4
Sort  
F
E
C
P
H
Name  
Basic function  
Terminal function  
Control function  
Motor 1 function  
High level function  
Code  
5
6
7
8
Sort  
A
Name  
Motor 2 function  
Option function  
Command/function data  
Monitor data  
o
S
M
For example, inverter function code M11, output current, is addressed as RTU parameter number 080B  
hexadecimal or 2059 decimal.  
high byte  
low byte  
inverter parameter sort code inverter parameter number  
9-4-6 Command and Monitor Data Registers  
The command and monitor function codes are used to control the operation of the inverter and monitor the  
status variables through the serial interface. The command and monitor function codes are not accessible  
from the inverter keypad interface. Inverter parameter H30 and digital input signal LE must be enabled to  
operate the inverter from the Modbus interface. If LE is not assigned to a digital input (X1-X9), the signal will  
default to ON.  
Frequency Setting Registers  
Read/  
Write  
Data  
Format  
Address Code  
Name  
Unit  
-
Variable Range  
-20000–20000  
Min. unit  
1793  
S01  
Frequency command  
(max. frequency at ± 20000)  
Hz 0.00–400.00  
1
0.01  
R/W  
R/W  
2
5
1797  
S05  
Frequency command  
Note:  
1) If both S01 and S05 are set, the inverter will ignore the setting of S05.  
2) A data setting that exceeds the setting range is possible, but the actual action will be limited by the inverter  
configuration.  
Operation command data Registers  
Read/  
Write  
Data  
Format  
Address Code  
Name  
Unit  
Variable Range  
Min. unit  
1798  
1799  
1804  
S06  
S07  
S12  
Operation command  
Universal Do  
Universal Ao  
-
-
-
Refer to the data format [14]  
Refer to the data format [15]  
-20000–20000  
-
-
1
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
14  
15  
2
(100% output at ± 20000 )  
Note:  
1) Since X1–X9 are configurable input commands, it is necessary to set the functions by E01–E09.  
2) The alarm reset is executed, when RST signal changes from ON to OFF even if there are no alarms.  
3) Universal Do is a function that utilizes the inverter’s digital outputs via communication.  
Function data Registers  
Read/  
Write  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Data  
Format  
3
Address Code  
Name  
Unit  
Variable Range  
0.1–3600.0  
0.1–3600.0  
20.00 –200.00, 999  
(P11S:20.00-150.00)  
0.00, 20.00–200.00, 999  
(P11S:20.00-150.00)  
Min. unit  
1800  
1801  
1802  
S08  
S09  
S10  
Acceleration time F07  
Deceleration time F08  
Torque limit level 1  
(driving) F40  
s
s
%
0.1  
0.1  
1.00  
3
5
1803  
S11  
Torque limit level 2  
(braking) F41  
%
1.00  
R/W  
5
Note:  
1) The writing of data out of range is treated as out of range error.  
2) Use a value of 7FFFH to enter 999 for torque limit functions.  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring parameter registers  
Read/  
Write  
R
Data  
Format  
[2]  
Address Code  
Description  
Unit  
-
Range  
- 20000–20000  
(max. frequency at ± 20000)  
0.00–400.00  
(P11S:0.00-120.00)  
- 20000–20000  
Min. unit  
1
2049  
2053  
2054  
M01 Frequency command  
(final command)  
M05 Frequency command  
(final command)  
Hz  
-
0.01  
1
R
R
[5]  
[2]  
M06 Actual frequency  
(max. frequency at ± 20000)  
2055  
2056  
2057  
M07 Actual torque value  
M08 Torque current  
M09 Output frequency  
%
%
Hz  
0.01  
0.01  
0.01  
R
R
R
[6]  
[6]  
[5]  
- 200.00–200.00  
- 200.00–200.00  
0.00–400.00  
(P11S:0.00-120.00)  
2058  
2059  
M10 Motor output (input  
electric power)  
M11 Output current r. m. s.  
%
%
0.01  
0.01  
R
R
[5]  
[5]  
0.00–200.00  
0.00–200.00 (inverter rating  
at 100.00)  
2060  
2061  
M12 Output voltage r. m. s.  
M13 Operation command (final  
command)  
V
-
1.0  
-
R
R
[3]  
[14]  
0.0–600.0  
Refer to data format [14]  
2062  
2063  
M14 Operating state  
M15 Universal output terminal  
data  
-
-
Refer to data format [16]  
Refer to data format [15]  
-
-
R
R
[16]  
[15]  
2064  
2065  
2066  
2067  
2068  
2069  
2071  
2072  
2073  
2074  
M16 Fault memory 0  
-
Refer to data format [10]  
-
R
[10]  
M17 Fault memory 1  
M18 Fault memory 2  
M19 Fault memory 3  
M20 Integrated operating time  
M21 DC link voltage  
M23 Type code  
M24 Inverter capacity code  
M25 ROM version  
M26 Transmission error  
processing code  
h
V
-
-
-
1
1
-
-
1
-
R
R
R
R
R
R
[1]  
[1]  
[17]  
[11]  
[1]  
0–65535  
0–1000  
Refer to data format [17]  
Refer to data format [11]  
0–64999  
-
Refer to data format [20]  
[20]  
2075  
2079  
2080  
M27 Frequency command at  
alarm (final command)  
M31 Frequency command at  
alarm (final command)  
-
Hz  
-
1
0.01  
1
R
R
R
[2]  
[5]  
[2]  
- 20000–20000 (max.  
frequency at ±20000 )  
0.00–400.00  
(P11S:0.00-120.00)  
- 20000–20000  
M32 Actual frequency at alarm  
(max. frequency at ± 20000)  
- 200.00 – 200.00  
- 200.00 – 200.00  
2081  
2082  
2083  
M33 Actual torque at alarm  
M34 Torque current at alarm  
M35 Output frequency at alarm Hz  
%
%
0.01  
0.01  
0.01  
R
R
R
[6]  
[6]  
[5]  
0.00 – 400.00  
(P11S:0.00-120.00)  
2084  
2085  
2086  
2087  
M36 Motor output at alarm  
(input power)  
M37 Output current r.m.s. at  
alarm  
M38 Output voltage effective  
value at alarm  
M39 Operation command at  
alarm  
%
%
V
-
0.01  
0.01  
1.0  
-
R
R
R
R
[5]  
[5]  
0.00–200.00  
0.00 – 200.00 (inverter rating  
at 100.00)  
0.0 – 600.0  
[3]  
Refer to data format [14]  
[14]  
2088  
2089  
M40 Operating state at alarm  
M41 Universal output terminal  
data at alarm  
-
-
Refer to data format [16]  
Refer to data format [15]  
-
-
R
R
[16]  
[15]  
2090  
M42 Integrated operation time  
at alarm  
h
1
R
[1]  
0–65535  
2091  
2092  
M43 DC link voltage at alarm  
M44 Inverter internal air  
temp.at alarm  
V
1
1
R
R
[1]  
[1]  
0–1000  
0–120  
°C  
2093  
2094  
M45 Cooling fin temp. at alarm  
M46 Life of main circuit  
capacitor.  
1
0.1  
R
R
[1]  
[3]  
0–120  
0.0–100.0  
°C  
%
2095  
2096  
M47 Life of printed circuit  
board capacitor.  
M48 Life of cooling fan.  
h
h
1
1
R
R
[1]  
[1]  
0–65535  
0–65535  
9-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-4-7 Data Format Specification  
All data in the data field of communication frame shall be represented by a 16 bit length word.  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
16 bits binary data  
Data format [1]  
Unsigned Integer data (Positive): Min. unit 1  
Example If F15 (Frequency limit, upper)= 60Hz  
60 = 003CH  
Data format [2]  
Integer data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 1  
Example data = -20  
-20 = FFECH  
Data format [3]  
Unsigned Decimal data (Positive): Min. unit 0.1  
Example: If F17 (frequency gain setting signal) = 100.0%  
100.0 X 10 = 1000 = 03E8H  
Data format [4]  
Decimal data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 0.1  
Example If: C31 (Analog input offset adjust, terminal12) = - 5.0%  
- 5.0 X 10= - 50 = FFCEH  
Data format [5]  
Example: If C05 (multi-step frequency 1) = 50.25Hz  
50.25 X 100 = 5025 = 13A1H  
Unsigned Decimal data (Positive): Min. unit 0.01  
Data format [6]  
Decimal data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 0.01  
Example: If M07 (actual torque value)= - 85.38%  
- 85.38 X 100= - 8538=DEA6H  
Data format [7]  
Unsigned Decimal data (Positive): Min. unit 0.001  
Example: If o05 (follow - up side ASR 1 constant) = 0.105s  
0.105 X 1000 = 105 = 0069H  
Data format [8]  
Decimal data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 0.001  
Example: Data = -1.234  
- 1.234 X 1000 = - 1234 = FB2EH  
Data format [9]  
Unsigned Integer data (Positive): Min. unit 2  
Example If P01 (Motor 1 number of poles) =2pole  
2 = 0002H  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Data format [10]  
Code  
Alarm Code  
Description  
Code  
22  
23  
24  
25  
Description  
Overheat, DB resistor  
Overload, motor 1  
Overload, motor 2  
Overload, inverter  
0
1
2
3
No alarm  
-
dbH  
OL1  
OL2  
OLU  
Overcurrent, during acceleration (INV output )  
Overcurrent, during deceleration (INV output )  
Overcurrent, during steady state operation  
(INV output )  
OC1  
OC2  
OC3  
5
6
7
8
10  
11  
14  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Ground fault  
EF  
OU1  
OU2  
OU3  
LU  
Lin  
FUS  
Er7  
27  
28  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
Overspeed  
OS  
Pg  
Overvoltage, during acceleration  
Over voltage, during deceleration  
Overvoltage, during steady state operation  
DC undervoltage  
Power supply open phase  
Blown DC fuse  
PG wire break  
Memory error  
Keypad error  
CPU error  
Option comm. error  
Option error  
PL error  
Output wiring error  
RS-485 comm. error  
Er1  
Er2  
Er3  
Er4  
Er5  
Er6  
Er7  
Er8  
Output wiring error  
Overheat, heat sink, inverter  
Overheat, outside thermal  
Overheat, unit inside temp.  
OH1  
OH2  
OH3  
Data format [11]  
Code  
Capacity code  
Code  
Capacity (HP)  
Capacity (HP)  
Code  
17500  
Capacity (HP)  
175  
7
15  
25  
50  
100  
200  
300  
500  
750  
1000  
1500  
0.07(spare)  
0.15(spare)  
2000  
2500  
3000  
4000  
5000  
6000  
7500  
10000  
12500  
15000  
20  
25  
30  
40  
50  
60  
75  
100  
125  
150  
20000  
25000  
30000  
35000  
40000  
45000  
50000  
60600  
60700  
60800  
200  
250  
300  
350  
400  
450  
500  
600  
0.25  
0.5  
1
2
3
5
7.5  
10  
15  
700  
800  
Data format [12]  
Index data (ACC/DEC time, display coefficient)  
15  
14  
0
13  
12  
0
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Polarity  
0
Index portion  
Data portion  
0: Positive (+),  
1: Negative ( - )  
0: 0.01  
1: 0.1  
2: 1  
X
X
X
X
001–999  
100–999  
100–999  
100–999  
(0.00–9.99)  
(10.0–99.9)  
(100–999)  
3: 10  
(1000–9990)  
Example: If F07 (acceleration time 1) = 20.0 s  
10.0 < 20< 99.9 → index =1  
20.0 = 0.1 X 200 → 0400H + 00C8H = 04C8H  
9-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Data format [13]  
Pattern operation  
15  
14  
0
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Direction  
of rotation  
Time  
Index portion  
Data portion  
0: 1st ACC/DEC time  
1: 2nd ACC/DEC time  
2: 3rd ACC/DEC time  
3: 4th ACC/DEC time  
0: 0.01  
1: 0.1  
2: 1  
X
001–999  
100–999  
100–999  
100–999  
(0.00–9.99)  
(10.0–99.9)  
(100–999)  
0: FWD  
1: REV  
X
X
X
3: 10  
(1000–9990)  
Example) If C22 (Stage1) = 10.0s R2 (10s, reverse rotation, acceleration time 2/deceleration time 2)  
Since 10.0 = 0.1 X 100 > 9000H + 0400H + 0064H = 9464H  
Data format [14]  
Operation command  
15  
14  
0
13  
0
12  
0
11  
0
10  
X9  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RST  
X8  
X7  
X6  
X5  
X4  
X3  
X2  
X1  
REV  
FWD  
(All bit are ON by 1)  
Example If S06 (operation command) = FWD, X1 and X5 = ON  
0000 0000 0100 0101b = 0045H  
Data format [15]  
Universal output terminal  
15  
0
14  
0
13  
0
12  
0
11  
0
10  
0
9
0
8
0
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
3
2
1
0
Y5  
Y4  
Y3  
Y2  
Y1  
(All bit are ON by 1)  
Example) If M15 (Universal output terminal)=Y1 and Y5 = ON  
0000 0000 0001 0001b = 0011H  
Data format [16]  
Operating state  
15  
14  
13  
12  
RL  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BUSY  
WR  
ALM  
DEC  
ACC  
IL  
VL  
TL  
NUV  
BRK  
INT  
EXT  
REV  
FWD  
(All bit are ON or active by 1)  
FWD: Forward operation  
REV: Reverse operation  
IL:  
Current limiting  
ACC: Under acceleration  
DEC: Under deceleration  
ALM: Inverter fault  
EXT: DC braking active (or pre-excitation)  
INT: No Output  
RL:  
Transmission valid  
BRK: Braking active  
NUV: DC link voltage is established  
(undervoltage at 0)  
WR:  
Function writing privilege  
0: Keypad panel  
1: RS-485  
TL:  
VL:  
Torque limiting  
Voltage limiting  
2: Fieldbus (option)  
BUSY: Processing data write  
9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Data format [17]  
Type code  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Type  
Generation  
Series  
Voltage series  
Code  
Type  
Generation  
Series  
Voltage series  
1
2
3
4
5
6
-
G
P
-
-
-
G11/P11  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
230V three phase  
460V three phase  
575V three phase  
-
-
USA  
-
Data format [18]  
Code setting (1–4 figures)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Data 4  
Data 3  
Data 2  
Data 1  
Data format [19]  
Amperage value Decimal data (positive ):  
Min. unit 0.01 inverter capacity is not more than 30HP  
Min unit 0.01 for not less than 40HP  
Example) If F11 (electronics thermal overload relay 1 level)107.0A (40HP)  
107.0 X 10=1070=042EH  
If F11 (electronics thermal overload relay 1 level)=3.60A (1HP)  
Since 3.60 X 100=360=0168H  
Data format [20]  
Code  
Transmission error code  
Code  
Description  
Description  
CRC error (no response)  
1
2
3
FC (function code) error  
Illegal address  
Illegal address (Data range error)  
71  
72  
73  
Parity error  
Other errors  
(no response)  
(no response)  
-Framing error  
-Overrun error  
-Buffer full error  
7
NAK  
-Priority for comm.  
-No privilege for writing error  
-Forbidden writing error  
9-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Data format [21]  
Auto tuning  
15  
14  
13  
0
12  
0
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
REV FWD  
Data portion  
0: Without forward rotation command  
1: With forward rotation command.  
0: Without reverse rotation command.  
1: With reverse rotation command.  
Example) If P04 (motor 1 auto - tuning)=1: Forward rotation  
0000 0001 0000 0001b=0101H  
9-4-8 Communication Errors  
Exception Response  
When the inverter receives a message that does not contain communication errors but the message can not  
be processed, the inverter will return an exception response. The exception response contains an error  
sub-code in the data field that represents the problem.  
Exception Response Errors  
Sub-Code  
Name  
Causes  
1
2
Illegal Function  
Illegal Data Address  
Received RTU Function other than 03, 06 or 16  
• The starting parameter address is an unused inverter parameter.  
• The starting parameter address plus the offset refers to inverter  
parameter greater than the last parameter in a Function Code sort.  
• The number of registers is greater than 16.  
3
7
Illegal Data Value  
Negative Acknowledge  
Data contains an out of range value for an inverter parameter  
• Requested data cannot be changed while the inverter is running.  
• The inverter parameter function is owned by the network interface  
option card and cannot be changed.  
Communication errors  
Communication errors occur when the inverter receives an invalid message. The inverter will not return a  
response to a communication error. A code that represents the last communication error is stored in  
inverter parameter M26. Typical communication message errors include parity, framing, and CRC errors.  
9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Options  
10-1 Built-in Options  
The inverter supports two internally mounted cards. One option card is mounted under the main cover  
(Location A) and the other option card is mounted in a special adapter under the keypad (Location B). Only  
one card can be mounted in these locations. There are two different types of option cards, Type 1 and Type 2.  
You cannot use two Type 1 or Two Type 2 cards but you can mix any combination of Type 1 and Type 2  
provided you only have one option per mounting location. Each option card must be mounted in the  
designated location. The chart below lists the option card, their types, and their mounting locations.  
2nd Option  
Type/Loc  
Name  
OPC-G11S-RY  
Type  
1
Loc  
A
Function  
2/B  
• Relay output card  
(Relay output card)  
The transistor output from the inverter control output  
terminals Y1 and Y4 are converted to the relay  
output (1SPDT).  
OPC-G11S-DIO  
(Digital interface card)  
2
2
A
A
None  
None  
• Frequency setting by binary code (max. 16 bits)  
• Monitoring (8 bits) of frequency, output current, and  
output voltage  
• Auxiliary input for analog frequency setting (0 to  
+/-10 V)  
OPC-G11S-AIO  
(Analog interface card)  
• Monitoring of inverter output frequency, current, and  
torque in analog voltage, analog output 0-10 VDC  
and 4-20mA  
OPC-G11S-PG  
(PG Feedback Card)  
(G11S only)  
1
1
1
A
A
A
2/B  
2/B  
2/B  
• This will enable vector control by pulse generator  
feedback signal  
• Proportional operation, tuning operation (12/15 V; A,  
B Signal)  
• This will enable vector control by pulse generator  
feedback signal  
• Proportional operation, tuning operation (5V; A, not  
A, B, not B Signals)  
OPC-G11S-PG2  
(PG Feedback Card)  
(G11S only)  
OPC-G11S-SY  
(Synchronized operation card)  
(G11S only)  
• Two motors are driven synchronously.  
OPC-G11S-PDP  
(Communication card)  
OPC-G11S-DEV  
(Communication card)  
OPC-G11S-COP  
(Communication card)  
OPC-G11S-MBP  
(Communication card)  
OPC-G11S-IBS  
(Communication card)  
2
2
2
2
2
B
B
B
B
B
1/A  
1/A  
1/A  
1/A  
1/A  
• Serial communication card for Profibus-DP  
• Serial communication card for Device Net  
• Serial communication card for CAN  
• Serial communication card for Modbus plus  
• Serial communication card for Interbus-S  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-2 Separately Installed Options  
Name (Type)  
Arrester  
Explanation  
Installation Position  
Power supply  
Absorbs power surges from the power source and protects the  
whole equipment connected to the power source.  
(CN23232)  
(CN2324E)  
EMC compliance filter  
An exclusive filter to conform to the EMC Directive  
(emissions) in European standard.  
Note: Refer to the "Installation Manual" when installing the  
filter.  
(FS5536-[][]-07)  
（EFL-[][]SP-2）  
(EFL-[][][]G11-4 )  
(RF3[][][]-F11)  
FAB  
or  
GFCI  
Output circuit filter  
Connected to the output circuit of the low-noise type inverter  
(OFL-[][][]-2) (Carrier frequency :8kHz to 15kHz, 6kHz when exceeding 40HP)  
(OFL-[][][]-4) and used for the following purposes.  
(OFL-[][][]-4A)  
① Voltage vibration suppression at the motor terminals.  
Prevent damage to the motor insulation by surge voltage for  
the 460V series inverter.  
② Leakage current reduction on the output side wiring.  
Reduce leakage current by parallel operation by multiple  
motors or long-distance wiring.  
- Length of wiring should be 1300ft (400m) or less.  
③ To reduce induced noise and radiating noise from output  
wiring. Effective in long-distance wiring such as plant lines.  
Note 1 : When OFL-[][][]-2 or OFL-[][][]-4 is connected, the setting  
value of the carrier frequency (F26) should be set to  
8kHz or more. (6kHz or more when exceeding 40HP.)  
Note 2 : There is no restriction of carrier frequency (F26) when  
connecting the OFL-[][][]-4A.  
R S T  
U V W  
DC reactor  
(For power coordination)  
(DCR2-[][][])  
(DCR4-[][][])  
① Used when the capacity of the power supply transformer  
exceeds 500kVA and exceeds the rated capacity of the  
inverter tenfold.  
② Used when a thyristor converter is connected as a common  
load on the same transformer.  
- If the commutating reactor is not used for the thyristor  
converter, an AC reactor is necessary at the inverter input  
side. Confirm.  
L1/R L2/S  
L3/T  
③ Used to prevent an inverter OV trip from occurring when the  
phase advanced capacitor in the power line is switched on  
and off.  
P1  
④ Used when the voltage imbalance exceeds 2%.  
P(+)  
( Max. Voltage [V] - Min. Voltage [V] )  
Voltage unbalance [%]  
=
x67%  
3-phase average voltage [V]  
Inverter  
Power supply capacity  
U V W  
R S T  
Series  
connected  
reactor  
M
U V W  
Power-factor  
improving capacitor  
Thyristor  
converter  
Motor  
(For improving the input power-factor and reducing harmonics)  
Used to reduce the harmonic current (improvement of  
power-factor).  
* For details on the degree of reduction, see the materials  
attached to the guidelines, etc.  
Surge suppressor  
Frequency meter  
For magnetic contactor  
(SZ-Z[]) [Product of Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.]  
Analog frequency meter (45, 60 square)  
M
(TRM-45)(FM-60) [Product of Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.]  
Frequency setting device  
(VR)  
(RJ-13BA-2)(WA3W-1kΩ)  
Frequency setting variable resistor  
[Product of Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.]  
Motor  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)  
11-1 General  
In accordance with the provisions described in the European Commission Guidelines Document on Council  
Directive 89/336/EEC,Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. has chosen to classify the FRENIC 5000G11S range of Inverters  
as "Complex Components".  
Classification as a "Complex Components" allows a product to be treated as an "apparatus", and thus permits  
compliance with the essential requirements of the EMC Directive to be demonstrated to both an integrator of  
FRENIC Inverters and to his customer or the installer and the user.  
FRENIC Inverters is supplied `CE-marked', signifying compliance with EC Directive 89/336/EEC when fitted  
with specified filter units installed and earthed in accordance with this sheet.  
This Specification requires the following performance criteria to be met.  
EMC product standard EN61800-3/1997 +A11/2000  
Immunity : Second environment ( Industrial environment )  
Emission : First environment ( Domestic environment )  
Distribution class of Emission  
Unrestricted distribution  
Restricted distribution  
Without OPC-G11S-***  
Without OPC-G11S-***  
FRN020G11S-4UX or less. FRN025G11S-4UX or more.  
FRN025P11S-4UX or less. FRN030P11S-4UX or more.  
FRN-G11S/P11S-2UX  
With OPC-G11S-***  
FRN-G11S-2UX/4UX all models with OPC-G11S-***.  
Card option :OPC-G11S-AIO, DIO, PG, PGA, PG2, SY, RY, PGDIO,  
PGRY, TL  
Bus option  
:OPC-G11S-PDP, DEV, MBP, IBS, COP  
WARNING  
This is a product of the restricted sales distribution class according to  
IEC61800-3.  
In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in  
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.  
Finally, it is customer’s responsibility to check whether the equipment conforms to EMC directive.  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-2 Recommended Installation Instructions  
It is necessary that to conformed to EMC Directive, these instructions must be followed.  
Follow the usual safety procedures when working with electrical equipment. All electrical connections to the  
filter, Inverter and motor must be made by a qualified electrical technician.  
1) Use the correct filter according to Table 11-1.  
2) Install the Inverter and filter in the electrically shielded metal wiring cabinet.  
3) The back panel of the wiring cabinet of board should be prepared for the mounting dimensions of the filter.  
Care should be taken to remove any paint etc. from the mounting holes and face area of the panel. This  
will ensure the best possible earthing of the filter.  
4) Use the screened cable for the control , motor and other main wiring which are connected to the Inverter,  
and these screens should be securely earthed.  
5) It is important that all wire lengths are kept as short as possible and that incoming mains and outgoing  
motor cables are kept well separated.  
" To minimize the conducted radio disturbance in the power distribution system, the length of the motor-cable  
should be as short as possible. "  
Table 11-1  
RFI filters  
Max.  
Rated  
Voltage  
RFI filter  
Rated  
Current  
Applied Inverter  
Filter Type  
Dimensions  
LxWxH [inch (mm)]  
Mount Dims  
Y x X [inch (mm)]  
Note  
FRNF50G11S-4UX  
FRN001G11S-4UX  
FS5536-5-07  
(EFL-0.75G11-4)  
12.6(320)×4.57(116)×1.65(42)  
11.5(293)×3.54(90)  
5A  
FRN002G11S-4UX  
FRN003G11S-4UX  
FRN005G11S-4UX  
FS5536-12-07  
(EFL-4.0G11-4)  
12.6(320)×6.10(155)×1.77 (45)  
11.5(293)×4.13(105)  
12A  
3ph  
480Vac  
Fig.  
11-1  
FRN007G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN010G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN015G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN020G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN025G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN030G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN040G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN040G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN050G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN060G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN075G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN100G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN125G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN150G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN200G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN250G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN300G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN350G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN400G11S/P11S-4UX  
FRN450G11S/P11S-4UX  
FS5536-35-07  
(EFL-7.5G11-4)  
FS5536-50-07  
(EFL-15G11-4)  
FS5536-72-07  
(EFL-22G11-4)  
13.4(341)×8.86(225)×1.87(47.5)  
19.7(500)×9.84(250)×2.76(70)  
19.7(500)×9.84(250)×2.76(70)  
17.1(435)×7.87(200)×5.12(130)  
12.2(311)×6.57(167)  
17.7(449)×7.28(185)  
17.7(449)×7.28(185)  
16.0(408)×6.54(166)  
35A  
50A  
72A  
RF 3100-F11  
100A  
Fig.  
11-2  
RF 3180-F11  
19.5(495)×7.87(200)×6.30(160)  
18.4(468)×6.54(166)  
180A  
3ph  
480Vac  
RF 3280-F11  
RF 3400-F11  
9.84(250)×23.11(587)×8.07(205)  
9.84(250)×23.11(587)×8.07(205)  
22.1(560)×3.35(85)  
22.1(560)×3.35(85)  
280A  
400A  
Fig.  
11-3  
Fig.  
11-4  
RF 3880-F11  
27.1(688)×14.33(364)×7.09(180)  
25.5(648)×5.91(150)  
880A  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fig.11-1  
Dimensions [inch(mm)]  
W
W1  
H
H1  
D
RF3100-F11  
RF3180-F11  
7.87  
(200)  
7.87  
6.54  
(166)  
6.54  
17.1  
(435)  
19.5  
16.1  
(408)  
18.4  
5.12  
(130)  
6.30  
(200)  
(166)  
(495)  
(468)  
(160)  
Fig.11-2 Outline Dimensions (RF3100-F11, RF3180-F11)  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23.1 (587)  
22.0 (560)  
Fig.11-3 Outline Dimensions (RF3280-F11, RF3400-F11)  
27.1 (688)  
25.5 (648)  
Fig.11-4 Outline Dimensions (RF3880-F11)  
Metal wiring cabinet  
RFI filter  
Inverter  
RCD or  
MCCB  
Motor  
Screened Motor Cable  
L1/R  
L2/S  
L3/T  
U
V
W
L1 L1’  
L2 L2’  
L3 L3’  
PE  
M
Screening must be electrically  
continuous and earthed at the  
cabinet and the motor.  
3ph  
Power supply  
Fig.11-5  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-3 The harmonics restriction in Europe Union (EU)  
Combinations of the inverter with DC-reactor in table 11-2 fulfill the harmonics requirements of the EN  
61000-3-2(+A14), which are European EN standard.  
However these inverters without DC-reactor don’t fulfill them. If they shall be connected to the public low  
voltage power supply system, the supply authority must be asked for permission to connect.  
Fuji Electric can provide this data sheets when you need the data for harmonics currents.  
Inverter model name  
FRNF50G11S-4UX  
FRN001G11S-4UX  
Applied DC-reactor model name  
Power supply  
Three-phase  
460V  
Table 11-2  
DCR4-0.4  
or  
or  
DCRE4-0.4  
DCR4-0.75  
DCRE4-0.75  
Middle voltage power supply system  
User C  
Public MV/LV  
Transformer  
Own MV/LV  
Transformer  
Public low voltage  
Power supply system  
Industrial low voltage  
User A  
User B  
Power supply system  
Inverter  
Inverter  
1kW or less  
1kW or less  
This inverter must fulfill EN61000-3-2+A14  
requirements or permission of the power  
supply authority is required if it doesn’t  
fulfill.  
This inverter doesn’t need to fulfill  
EN61000-3-2+A14 requirements.  
No standard of harmonic current exists  
for the present.  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2007-11 (K07/K07) 10CM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

EdgeStar Dehumidifier DEP400EW User Manual
Eizo Computer Monitor L465 User Manual
Fender Speaker 115SA User Manual
Fisher Security Camera VDC D2184VA User Manual
FujiFilm Photo Printer FL01712 100 User Manual
Fundex Games Board Games 0873 User Manual
Gateway MP3 Player 8510388 User Manual
GE Cordless Telephone 25922 Series User Manual
GE Home Security System 60 960 95 User Manual
GE Microwave Oven JE610 User Manual